En Ac80remapcelem C

ABB Drives
Reference Manual PC Elements Advant Controller 80
Reference Manual PC Elements
Advant Controller 80
AC80 Code: 3AFE 64021737 REVC EN EFFECTIVE: 20.09.2002 SUPERSEDES: 15.03.2000
2002 ABB Oy. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

Chapter 1 - Table of Contents..................................................................................................... 1-i Chapter 2 - Introduction ............................................................................................................. 2-1 Summary .................................................................................................................................. 2-1 The Programming Language .................................................................................................... 2-1 Call............................................................................................................................................ 2-1 Call Name ................................................................................................................................. 2-1 Call Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 Graphic Symbol ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 Connection of PC Element Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................ 2-2 Error Handling........................................................................................................................... 2-2 Integer Overflow ..................................................................................................................... 2-2 Overflow of Real Numbers ..................................................................................................... 2-3 Element Library for AC80 ......................................................................................................... 2-3 Programming with the PC Language........................................................................................ 2-3 The Data Sheets....................................................................................................................... 2-3 Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type ................................................................. 3-1 Structure Elements ................................................................................................................... 3-1 Combinational Elements........................................................................................................... 3-1 Bitwise Operation on the Integer Data Type............................................................................. 3-1 Memory Elements..................................................................................................................... 3-1 Time Elements.......................................................................................................................... 3-1 Register .................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Switches ................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Code Converters....................................................................................................................... 3-2 Multiplexers............................................................................................................................... 3-2 Arithmetic Elements.................................................................................................................. 3-2 Counters ................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Comparators ............................................................................................................................. 3-3 Function Generators ................................................................................................................. 3-3 Feedback and Filter Algorithms ................................................................................................ 3-3 Supervision Elements ............................................................................................................... 3-3 Communication Elements......................................................................................................... 3-3 Parameter Handling Elements.................................................................................................. 3-4 Status Supervision.................................................................................................................... 3-4 Event Handling Elements ......................................................................................................... 3-4 Datalogging Elements............................................................................................................... 3-4 Other Elements......................................................................................................................... 3-4 DataBase Elements .................................................................................................................. 3-4 Chapter 4 - Short Form Description - PC Elements, DB Elements and GHOST Elements4-1 Chapter 5 - PC Elements Groups by Product........................................................................... 5-1 Common (to all) ........................................................................................................................ 5-1 APC Elements with no Corresponding AC80 Elements ........................................................... 5-1 AC80 Elements with no Corresponding APC Elements ........................................................... 5-1 AC70 Elements with no Corresponding AC80 Elements.......................................................... 5-2 Corresponding APC and AC80 Elements................................................................................. 5-2 Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements......................................................................... 6-1 Execution Times ....................................................................................................................... 6-1 Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements.................................................................. 7-1
AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements
Chapter 1 - Table of Contents Chapter 8 - PC ELEMENTS from A to C .................................................................................... 8-1
Absolute Value ABS

Transmit/Receive ACS Datasets ACSRX Receive ACS Datasets ACSRXA Adder ADD
..................................................... 8-1 ........................................ 8-2 ..................................................... 8-8 ............................................................................ 8-12 ............................................................... 8-13 ...................................... 8-14 ..................................... 8-20 ............................................................... 8-27 ............................................................... 8-28 ............................................................... 8-30 ............................................................... 8-31 ............................................................... 8-32 ............................................................... 8-33 ............................................................... 8-34 ............................................................... 8-35 ................................................... 8-36 ................................................... 8-37 ...................................... 8-40 ................................................... 8-42 ................................................... 8-44 ................................................... 8-45 ................................................... 8-49 ............................................................... 8-52
Adder ADD-MR DataSet Receiver for AF100 AFREC DataSet Transmitter for AF100 AFTRA And Gate AND And Gate AND-O Average AVG Read One Bit BGET Block Header BLOCK Set One Bit BSET Comment C Comparator COMP Comparator Integer COMP-I Comparator Real COMP-R Three State Controller CON-PU1 Control Module CONTRM Code Converter CONV Code Converter CONV-BI Code Converter CONV-IB Counter COUNT
ii
Chapter 9 - PC ELEMENTS from D to F .................................................................................... 9-1

Data Logger DATALOG ................................................................. 9-1 ........................... 9-5 ............................. 9-10 .............. 9-15
Management of FBA Communications DCBAID

Communications with FieldBusAdapter DCBRX Demultiplexer with Memory and Integer Address DEMUX-MI
Derivator DER Divider DIV Divider DIV-MR Error Detection ERROR

Event Logger Debug EVBUG
............................................................... 9-17 ............................................................... 9-20 ............................................................... 9-21 ................................................... 9-22 ................................................... 9-24 ................................................... 9-26 ................................................... 9-28 ................................................... 9-30 ............................................................... 9-32 ............................................................... 9-35 ............................................................................ 9-38 ............................................................... 9-40 ................................................... 9-41 ................................................... 9-42
EVENT Detection EVENT Change Event Priority EVPRTY Event Detection EVT Event Logger EVTLOG
Queue Register FIFO Filter FILT-1P Filter Integer FILTI Function Header FUNCM
Function Generator FUNG-1V
Chapter 10 - PC ELEMENTS from I to P.................................................................................. 10-1
Two Integer to Integer Long Conversion IIL

Integer Long to two Integer Conversion ILI
.......................... 10-1 ............................ 10-2 ............................................................... 10-3 ............................................................... 10-6 ........................ 10-7 ......................... 10-9 ................................... 10-11
Integrator INT Inverter INV Absolute Read from Dual Port Memory IOBUSRD Absolute Write into Dual Port Memory IOBUSWR Transmit/Receive I/O Datasets IORX
iii
Limiter LIM-N Master Header MASTER Maximum Selector MAX DataSet Receiver for AF100 MB90REC
............................................................. 10-16 ................................................. 10-19 ................................................. 10-20 .................................... 10-22 ................. 10-28 ................................................. 10-34 ................................................. 10-36 ................................................. 10-38 ................................................. 10-40 .................................... 10-42 ............................................................. 10-43 .................................... 10-44 ................................................. 10-45 ................................. 10-46 ............ 10-48 ............. 10-50 .................................. 10-52 ............................................................. 10-54 ............................................................. 10-55 ............................................................. 10-57 .................................... 10-58 .................................... 10-59 ................................ 10-69 ................................................. 10-71 ................................................. 10-73 ............................................................. 10-75 ............................................................. 10-79
DataSet Transmitter for AF100 MB90TRA MB90TRA Minimum Selector MIN ModBus Read MODR ModBus Write MODW Mono Function MONO Element for Copying Data MOVE Multiplier MUL Integer Scaling Element MULDIV Multiplexer for Text MUXA-I Multiplexer with Integer Address MUX-I Multiplexer with Memory and Integer Address MUX-MI Multiplexer with Memory and 1-of-N Address MUX-MN Multiplexer with 1-of-N Address MUX-N Or Gate OR Or Gate OR-A Oscillator OSC-B Oscillator for Sine Wave OSC-SIN Panel Control PC Element PANC Save PARDAT Values to PROM PARSAVE Program Header PCPGM PDP-Function PDP
PI-Function PI PII Regulator PII
iv
PIP-Function PIP Pointer to next PC element POINT Printer Control PC element PRTCON
............................................................. 10-82 .................................... 10-84 .................................... 10-87
Chapter 11 - PC ELEMENTS from R to X ................................................................................ 11-1
Ramp Generator RAMP

S-RAMP Generator RAMP-S1
................................................... 11-1 ................................................... 11-4 ................................................... 11-7 ............................................................. 11-10 ................................................. 11-12 ................................................. 11-15 ............................................................. 11-18 ............................................................. 11-20 ............................................................. 11-22 ................................................. 11-23 ................................................. 11-24 ................................................. 11-25 ................................................. 11-27 ................................................. 11-29 ................................................. 11-30 ................................................. 11-32 ............................................................. 11-34 ............................................................. 11-35 ................................................. 11-36 .................... 11-38 .................................... 11-39 ................................................. 11-40 ................................................. 11-41
S-RAMP Generator RAMP-SSH Register REG Group Data Register REG-G

Memory Monitoring RWM Save a Value SAVE Shift Register SHIFT
Slave Header SLAVEM Square Root Element SQRT Memory Element SR Memory Element SR-AA Memory Element SR-AO Memory Element SR-D Memory Element SR-OA Memory Element SR-OO Subtractor SUB Switch SW
Switch - Change Over SW-C
Element for Calculation of System Load SYSL Time and Date Element SYSTIME Threshold Element THRESH-L
Time Delay Off TOFF
Time Delay On TON Time Delay On Retentive TON-RET Trigger Element TRIGG Watchdog for AC80 WDOG80 Exclusive Or Gate XOR
................................................. 11-42 .................................... 11-43 ................................................. 11-45 ................................................. 11-46 ................................................. 11-47
Chapter 12 -DB Elements from A to P..................................................................................... 12-1
AI Module AI810,AI820 RTD Module AI830 TC Module AI835 AI Calculated (Event option) AIC AO Module AO810,AO820 Boolean Data DAT(B) Integer Data DAT(I) Packed Integer Data DAT(II) IntegerLong Data DAT(IL) Real Data DAT(R)
............................................................... 12-3 ............................................................... 12-5 ............................................................... 12-7 ...................................... 12-9 ............................................................. 12-12 ............................................................. 12-14 ............................................................. 12-17 ................................................. 12-18 ................................................. 12-19 ............................................................. 12-20 ..... 12-21
Fieldbus Adapter Parameters(=DCB initialisation) DCB01 DI Module DI810,DI811,DI820,DI821 DI Calculated (Event option) DIC
DO Module DO810, DO820 DriveBus Link DRB00
............................................................. 12-26 .................................... 12-28 ............................................................. 12-30 ............................................................. 12-32 ................................................. 12-34 ................................................. 12-35 ............................................................. 12-38 ................................................. 12-41 ................................. 12-45 .................................. 12-48
Drive Data Set DRIDS

Engineered Drive DRIENG Standard Drive DRISTD DataSet Peripheral DSP
Event Set (Send) (Event option) EVS(S)

MVI Data Block (ModBus option) MVB
vi
MVI Channel (ModBus option) MVICHAN MVI Node (ModBus option) MVINODE Special I/O Link NCBIO
.................................... 12-52 ................................... 12-56 ................................................. 12-58 .................................... 12-59 ............................................................. 12-63 ................................................. 12-66 ................................................. 12-67 ................................................. 12-68 ................................................. 12-69 ................................................. 12-70 ............................................................. 12-71 ................................................. 12-72
Panel Bus Configuration PANBUS

Boolean Param PARDAT(B)
Integer Param PARDAT(I) Packed Int. Param PARDAT(II) IntegerLong Param PARDAT(IL) Packed Bool. Param PARDAT(NB) Packed Int. Param PARDAT(NI) Real Param PARDAT(R) Processor Module PM825
vii
Chapter 2 - Introduction
AC80 (Advant Controller) is a microcomputer based control system designed specially for electrical drive applications. The system provides a programming language, methods and tools for process control functions. The programming language for process control functions is based on software implemented logic elements, viz. PC Elements and DataBase (DB) Elements. Many of the PC Elements are the same as those in the industrial controllers of the Advant OCS family (e.g. Advant Controller 110 and Advant Controller 70) and APC (Application Controller for drive applications). The remaining PC elements are specific to the AC80. A PC element is the smallest unit of the application program. Each element performs a complete function, such as a logical AND gate, a counter or a feedback control element. Each element has an unique call name that enables it to be accessed. Many of the elements have call parameters which allow size, function, data type, and other properties to be determined.
COMP-I(C1) -1 -2 I1 I2 I1>I2 I1=I2 I1<I2 5 6 7
Summary
The Programming Language Call
Call Name
Figure 1. The mnemonic call name provides information Graphic Symbol about the basic function of the element. Further information about the function of the element or the data types for which the element is intended is given by a suffix to the name. E.g. COMP-I, comparator for integers, and COMP-R, comparator for real numbers, see table 2-1. Table 2-1Suffix
Suffix A B D I R O T G M L Description AND function in compound elements Boolean Data Integer Real number OR function in compound elements Time Group data Memory function Load function; Limiting function, Threshold function 1-of-N addressing Number of poles Packed Boolean Variable
N P PB V
2-1
Call Parameters
For structure elements, the call parameters determine the cycle time, and the place in the cycle time table (this determines the order of execution for control modules having the same cycle time). For a function element, the call parameters may specify the size, data type, number of inputs and outputs, etc.
- 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 21
> L U / D-N > C R EN I
COUNT (C1) > 0 = 0 < 0
10 11 12
22
Figure 2. Graphic Symbol
Graphic Symbol
Each PC element has a graphic symbol similar to that shown in figure 2. Normally it is the call name of the element written in the upper part of the symbol. For certain functions, e.g. AND and OR, there is a graphic a symbol instead of the name. When the element has supervisory control signals, the terminals for these signals are collected in a separate part of the symbol as shown in figure 2.
Connection of PC Element Inputs and Outputs
Only inputs and outputs with the same data type can be interconnected. If, for example, an output of the type IL is to be connected to an input of the type R, a type conversion element, e.g. CONV (with parameters C1= IL, C2 = R) must be inserted in the data path. Table 2-2Data types
Designation A B G
I IL R T TR
Data type Character Array Boolean Group data, i.e. a collection of data with one of the above data types Integer, 16 bit Integer, 32 bit Real number Time Time, real representation
Error Handling
Integer Overflow
The range of integer values allowed is as follows. For I = -32768 ...32767 For IL = -2147483648 ... 2147483647
2-2
When the range is exceeded, the output is set to the respective limiting value.
Overflow of Real Numbers
The range of allowed real numbers is 9.2 x 1018 ... -0.1.x 1018. When the range is exceeded, the output is set to the respective limiting value. The smallest magnitude that can be represented by a real number is 5.0 x 10-20. Any output with an absolute value smaller than this is set to 0. The AC80 has an element library which defines the set of available PC elements. Detailed documentation of the available PC elements can be found in the PC Element and DB Element Descriptions parts of this manual. When programming an AC80 based control system, PC elements are selected from the AC80 PC element library and included on a AC80 software design template. The PC elements are then interconnected on the diagram to define the data interchange between the elements. The compiler of the FCB translates the program into object (target) code, which is loaded into the AC80 memory. An element description starts with a short Summary that describes the main function of the element. The graphic symbol of the element is shown to the right of the summary. The calling of the element is described under the heading Call. If the element has call parameters, they are described in a table where their permissible values are stated. Element inputs and outputs are described under the heading Connections. This section provides a table giving each terminal a number, name, type, description and permissible values. The type of connection is given as xy, where x is I or O if it is an input or an output terminal, and y denotes the data type previously described in Table 2-2. If the terminal data type is specified with a call parameter, y is the call parameter name (e.g. IC1 for an input for which data type is defined with call parameter C1). A detailed functional description is given under the heading Function.
Element Library for AC80
Programming with the PC Language
The Data Sheets
2-3
AC80 PC Element Descriptions
Summary SUB is used for subtraction of two integers or real numbers. Call SUB Call Parameters Table 1. Parameter Description C1 Data type Permissible values I, IL, R
Subtractor
SUB
1 2 20
The call name of the element. Short description of the function of the element. The graphic symbol of the element. Call, with table over the parameters, if any. The terminals of the element are described in a table. Detailed description of the elements function.
Figure 1.
Connections Table 2.
No Name Type Application 1 IC1 Input for minuend 2 IC1 Input for subtrahend 20 OC1 Output for difference Function The value at input 2 subtracted from valve at input 1 and the result is stored at output 20. Overflow If the maximum positive or negative values are exceeded, the output is limited to the highest or lowest allowable for the data type.
Figure 3. Description, Schematic Outline.
2-4
Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

Note: Only elements included in AC80PC element library are listed here.
Structure Elements
Block Header Control Module Header Change Event Priority Function Module Header Master Module Header Program Header Slave Module Header And Gate And Gate with Or-ed inputs Inverter Or Gate Or gate with And-ed inputs Threshold Element Exclusive Or Gate
BLOCK CONTRM EVPRTY FUNCM MASTER PCPGM SLAVEM AND AND-O INV OR OR-A THRESH-L XOR
Combinational Elements
Bitwise Operation on the Integer Data Type Memory Elements
Read One Bit Set One Bit
BGET BSET
Memory Element Memoy Elements Memory Elements Memory Element with Data Input Memory Element Memory Element
SR SR-AA SR-AO SR-D SR-OA SR-OO
Time Elements
Mono Function Oscillator Sine Wave Oscillator Time Delay Off Time Delay On Time Delay On Retriggable Trigger Element
MONO OSC-B OSC-SIN TOFF TON TON-RET TRIGG
3-1
Register
Queue Register Data Copying Element Register Group Data Register Shift Register
FIFO MOVE REG REG-G SHIFT
Switches
Switch Switch with Changeover
SW SW-C
Code Converters
Code Converter Code Converter from Boolean to Integer Code Converter from Integer to Boolean Two Integers to Integer Long Conversion Integer long to two Integers Conversion
CONV CONV-BI CONV-IB IIL ILI
Multiplexers
Demultiplexer with Memory and Integer Address Multiplexer for ASCII-strings Multiplexer with Integer Address Multiplexer with Memory and Integer Address Multiplexer with Memory and 1-of-N Address Multiplexer with 1-of-N Address
DEMUX-MI MUXA-I MUX-I MUX-MI MUX-MN MUX-N
Arithmetic Elements
Absolute Value Element Adder Adder with a multiplication Divider Divider with multiplied inputs Limiter Multiplier Integer Scaling Element Square Root Element Subtractor
ABS ADD ADD-MR DIV DIV-MR LIM-N MUL MULDIV SQRT SUB
Counters
Counter
COUNT
3-2
Comparators
Comparator Comparator for Integer Values Comparator for Real Values Maximum Selector Minimum Selector
COMP COMP-I COMP-R MAX MIN
Function Generators Feedback and Filter Algorithms
Function Generator
FUNG-1V
Average of n-samples Three State Controller Derivator Single pole Filter Single Pole Filter for Integer Signals Integrator PDP-controller PI-controller PI controller with integer calculation PIP-Function Ramp generator S-ramp generator SSH-ramp generator
AVG CON-PU1 DER FILT-1P FILTI INT PDP PI PII PIP RAMP RAMP-S1 RAMP-SSH
Supervision Elements Communication Elements
Element for Actual Time and Date System Load Measurement
SYSTIME SYSL
Transmit and receive datasets to/from ACS 600 MultiDrive or ACS 600 SingleDrive. Receive datasets from ACS 600 Multidrive or ACS 600 SingleDrive. Receive dataset from AF100 Transmit dataset to AF100 To exit once in every application program, which contains DCBRX elements (or other FBA communication elements). DCBRX may exist as several instances in same application program. Generate cyclic communication with IOboard through NCB. ModBus Read ModBus Write AF100 receive (packed integers) AF100 transmit (packed integers) Panel Control Printer Control
ACSRX
ACSRXA AFREC AFTRA DCBAID
DCBRX IORX MODR MODW MB90REC MB90TRA PANC PRTCON
3-3
Status Supervision
Memory monitoring Watchdog
RWM WDOG80
Parameter Handling Elements Event Handling Elements
Save PARDAT values to PROM. Save reference value in RWM (battery backup).
PARSAVE SAVE
Error recording element Event logger debug aid Event recorder Event recorder with acknowledgement Event logger definition
ERROR EVBUG EVENT EVT EVTLOG
Datalogging Elements Other Elements
Datalogging element
DATALOG
Comment I/O Bus Read I/O Bus Write Gives absolute address for debugging
C IOBUSRD (toolbox option) IOBUSWR (toolbox option) POINT (toolbox option)
DataBase Elements
Analog Input Analog Output Boolean Data Integer Data IntegerInteger Data IntegerLong Data Named Integers Data Real Data DCB initialisation DI module DO module Drive Bus Link Drive Data Set Engineered Drive Standard Drive DataSet Peripheral (=AF100 dataset) NCB I/O configuration Panel Bus configuration Boolean Param Integer Param Packed Int. Param IntegerLong Param
AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835 AO810, AO820 DAT(B) DAT(I) DAT(II) DAT(IL) DAT(NI) DAT(R) DCB01 DI810, DI811, DI814, DI820, DI821 DO810, DO814, DO820 DRB00 DRIDS DRIENG DRISTD DSP NCBIO PANBUS PARDAT(B) PARDAT(I) PARDAT(II) PARDAT(IL)
3-4
DataBase Elements continued
Packed Bool. Param with names Packed Int. Param with names Real Param Processor Module
PARDAT(NB) PARDAT(NI) PARDAT(R) PM825
Event Option
AI Calculated DI Calculated Event Srt (Send)
AIC DIC EVS(S)
ModBus Option (embedded)
Multivendor interface data block Multivendor interface channel Multivendor interface node
MVB MVICHAN MVINODE
APC PC Elements Option (GHOST Elements)
Reads basic analog inputs Reads extended Analog inputs Writes to extended analog outputs Write to analog outputs on Speed Measurement board Read basic digital inputs Read extended digital inputs Write to basic digital outputs Write to extended digital outputs Diagnostic counters of the Drive Links Error reading from a drive Send parameters to a drive Receives signals from a drive Transmit signals to a drive Read parameters from a drive Read speed measurement
AIAPC AIEXT AOEXT AOMEAS DIAPC DIEXT DOAPC DOEXT DRDIAG DRFLT DRPAR DRREC DRTRA DRUPL SPEEDP
APC DB Elements Option (GHOST Elements)
Drive Communication Board configuration Drive Link configuration Event Logger configuration AF100 or MasterBus 90 configuration Panel Link configuration Memory reservation for saved values
DCB00 DRL00 EVT00,EVT01 MB90 PAN00 SAVE00
Note: APC PC/DB Elements option to be removed or replaced by real AC80 Elements after backtranslate of APC source code.
3-5
Chapter 4 - Short Form Description - PC Elements, DB Elements and GHOST Elements

Table 4 - 1Short form description of PC Elements
Element ABS ACSRX ACSRXA ADD ADD-MR AFREC AFTRA AND AND-O AVG BGET BLOCK BSET C COMP COMP-I COMP-R CON-PU1 CONTRM CONV CONV-BI CONV-IB COUNT DATALOG DCBAID DCBRX Description Calculates the absolute value of an integer or a real number. The result is multiplied by a scale factor. Transmit and receive datasets to/from and ACS600 MultiDrive or ACS600 SingleDrive. ACSRXA element can be used to for reading dataset values from an ACS 600 drives. Adds up to 19 integers or real numbers. Adds and subtracts signal values and multiplies the result by another value. Receives a data set over the AF100 bus. Sends a data set over the AF100 bus. Gives the Boolean product of up to 19 Boolean values Performs a combination of the AND and OR functions on the input signal groups. Calculates the average of a selected number of signal samples. Reads the value of the selected bit from an integer or integer long value.. Module header for conditionally executed blocks. Sets the value of the selected bit in an integer or integer long value. Write comments in application program. Comparates two values with equal datatype. Compares two integers. Compares two real numbers. Three state controller with outputs for increase/decrease for control via an integrating actuator. Module header for control modules. Conversion of data between the types I, IL, R, T and TR. Converts data in BC, BCD, 1-of-N code and Gray code given at a number of boolean inputs into data in integer form (I or IL). Converts data in integer form (I or IL) into data in BC, BCD, 1of-N code Gray code at a number of boolean outputs. Pre-settable counter for counting pulses, up or down. With checking of the value relative to 0. Logs the selected data. Makes possible to use FBA (FieldBusAdapter) modules connected to NCB board. Creates one or two VCIs (=VirtualConnectorInterfaces) and using it/them as data buffers acts as interface between FBA (=FieldBusAdapter) module and AC80 application program.
4-1
Chapter 4 - Short Form Description- PC Elements
Table 4 - 1 continued
Element DEMUX-MI DER Description Signal demultiplexer with the memory. Gives derivation effect. The elements has inputs and outputs for limit values, setting of gain, filter function for restricting the derivation effect and the possibility of following and external reference Divides two real numbers or two integers. For integers the quotient is obtained along with the remainder at a separate output. Performs compounded multiplication/division operations on the input signal groups. Writes detected error codes to the Event Logger. EVBUG element can be used to diagnose event loggers. Detects a Boolean event and writes the associated information to Alarm/Fault logger or Event logger. EVPRTY element provides means for changing the priority of an event driven CONTRM. Detects both edges of event signal, allows acknowledgement. EVTLOG element is used to create and manage an event logger. Queue register with up to 9 queues each with a maximum of 64 places. 1-pole low pass filter with options for limiting the output signal and for following an external reference. Single pole low pass filter for integers. Module header for function module. Generates a piece-wise linear function of one variable using tables, with up to 255 elements. Packs two integers into an integer long value. Unpacks an integer long to two integer values. Gives integration effect. The element has inputs and outputs for limit values, setting of gain and following with an external reference. Inverts a Boolean value. IOBUSRD element makes possible to read contents OF Dual Port Memory of NCB board. IOBUSRD is available only if you have enabled Toolbox option of AC80. IOBUSWR element makes possible to write data into absolute addresses of Dual Port Memory of NCB board. IOBUSWR is available only if you have enabled Toolbox option of AC80. In APC IOBUSRD and IOBUSWR access Dual Port Memory of extended I/O boards. In AC80 they access Dual Port Memory of NCB board. Used to transmit and/or receive datasets to/from an I/O device. Limits integers,real numbers or time values. Several limit values may be selected. Module header for master modules. Selects the largest of up to 19 integers or real numbers. Receives a Data Set over the MP90 bus. Sends a Data Set over the MP90 bus. Selects the smallest of up to 19 integers or real numbers.
DIV
DIV-MR ERROR EVBUG EVENT EVPRTY EVT EVTLOG FIFO FILT-1P FILTI FUNCM FUNG-1V IIL ILI INT
INV IOBUSRD
IOBUSWR
IORX LIM-N MASTER MAX MB90REC MB90TRA MIN
4-2
Element MODR MODW MONO Description MODR element can be used for reading data from a remote device through ModBus. MODW element can be used for writing data to a remote device through ModBus. Generates a pulse with a given duration when the input changes from 0 to 1. The pulse duration is specified at an input. Retriggability is controlled with an input. Moves data from input terminals to output terminals. Multiplies of up to 19 integers or real numbers. Scaling element for the integer data. Multiplexer for text arrays with integer address. Selector for up to 19 inputs. Integer address. Selector for up to 19 inputs. Integer address and memory. Selector for up to 19 inputs. 1-of-N address and memory. Selector for up to 19 inputs. 1 out of N address. Gives the Boolean sum of up to 19 Boolean values. Performs a combination of the AND and OR functions on the input signal groups. Oscillator for a Boolean variable with variable frequency and pulse time. Sine wave generator. PANC controls one CDP80 panel. PARSAVE element provides means for controlling the storage of current PARDAT values into PROM memory. Module header for a PC program. Gives proportional effect and limited derivation effect. The element permits limiting of the output signal and following. Standard PI regulator for serial compensation in feedback systems. The element permits limiting of the output signal and following. PI controller for the signals represented as integers with the integer long arithmetics. Used to give proportional effect and limited integration effect. The element permits limiting of the output signal and following. Gives absolute address for debugging. The Point is available only if you have enabled Toolbox option of AC80. Printer control. Limits the rate of change of a signal. The element permits limiting of the output signal and tracking. Reference signal generator with the second derivative limitation. Generates an S-shaped output signal when reaching the level of the input signal. Memory element with an optional number of positions. Assembles simple variables into one single variable of the group type. Monitors the memory. Saves the signal/parameter value to the battery backed RWM area. Shift register with optional length.
MOVE MUL MULDIV MUXA-I MUX-I MUX-MI MUX-MN MUX-N OR OR-A OSC-B OSC-SIN PANC PARSAVE PCPGM PDP PI
PII PIP POINT PRTCON RAMP RAMP-S1 RAMP-SSH REG REG-G RWM SAVE SHIFT
4-3
Element SLAVEM SQRT SR SR-AA SR-AO SR-D Description Module header for slave modules. Subordinate of MASTER. Calculates the square root of a real number. The result is multiplied by a scale factor. Memory for Boolean variables. The element has one Set and one Reset input. SR flip flop with combinatory S, R inputs: A for AND function. SR flip flop with compinatory S, R inputs. A for AND, O for OR function. Memory for Boolean variables with data input. The element has one Set and one Reset input and data and clock inputs for clocking in data. SR flip flop with combinatory S, R inputs. A for AND, O for OR function. SR flip flop with combinatory S, R inputs. O for OR function. Subtracts one real number or one integer from another. Switching element with up to 9 closing channels. Switching elements with up to 9 change-over channels. Calculates and indicates the system load. Actual time and date Determines when more than a given number of Boolean signals are set. Delay for turning a Boolean signal off. Delay for turning a Boolean signal on. Delay for turning a Boolean signal on with accumulating time measurement. Provides a pulse with duration of one program cycle when the input signal changes from 0 to 1. Watchdog Give a signal when just one of several input signals is true.
SR-OA SR-OO SUB SW SW-C SYSL SYSTIME THRESH-L TOFF TON TON-RET TRIGG WDOG80 XOR
Table 4 - 2 Short form description of DB Elements

Element AIC AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835 AO810, AO820 DAT(B) DAT(I) DAT(II) DAT(IL) DAT(NI) DAT(R) DCB01 DI810, DI811, DI820, DI821 Description AI Calculated (= event option) Analog Input Analog Output Boolean Data Integer Data IntegerInteger Data IntegerLong Data Named Integers Data Real Data DCB01 element is necessary for initialization and usage of an optional FBA module of AC80. DI module
4-4
DO810, DO820 DIC DRB00 DO module DI calculated element is an event channel element used for detection of calculated digital events. (= optio) DRB00 is used to define the (physical) drive numbers, drive types and application identifiers of the ACS 600 drives connected to AC80. Drive Data Set Engineered Drive Standard Drive. DataSet Peripheral (=AF100 dataset) Event Srt (Send) (= optio) Multivendor interface data block (= optional tool) Multivendor interface channel (= optional tool) Multivendor interface node (= optional tool)) NCB I/O configuration Panel Bus configuration Boolean Param Integer Param Packed Integer Param IntegerLong Param Packed Bool. Param with names Packed Int. Param with names Real Param Processor Module (CPU) of the AC80 control system.
DRIDS DRIENG DRISTD DSP EVS(S) MVB MVICHAN MVINODE NCBIO PANBUS PARDAT(B) PARDAT(I) PARDAT(II) PARDAT(IL) PARDAT(NB) PARDAT(NI) PARDAT(R) PM825
Table 4 - 3 Short form description of GHOST PC Elements.

Element AIAPC AIEXT AOEXT AOMEAS DIAPC DIEXT DOAPC DOEXT DRDIAG DRFLT DRPAR DRREC DRTRA DRUPL SPEEDP Description Reads basic analog input channels from the APC board. Reads analog input channels from the Extension I/O boards. Writes to the analog output channels on the Extension I/O board. Writes to the analog output channels on the Speed Measurement board. Reads basic digital input channels from the APC board. Reads digital input channels from the Extension I/O board. Writes to the digital output channels on the APC board. Writes to the digital output channels on the Extension I/O board. Displays and optionally clears the diagnostic counters of the drive links. Detects drive faults and writes them to the Event Logger. Sends parameter values to a drive controller (drive). Receives signal values from a drive controller. Sends values for drive signals to a drive controller. Reads (drive) parameter values from a drive controller. Calculates the speed and position measured with the YPH107 board.
4-5
Table 4 4 Short form description of GHOST DB Elements

Element DCB00 DRL00 EVT00,EVT01 MB90 PAN00 SAVE00 Description Reserves memory for buffers of the DCB driver. Reserves memory for a drive link. Reserves the memory for Event Loggers. Reserves memory and activates the MB90/AF100 dataset driver. Reserves the memory and initiates the panel link. Reserves the storage area in RWM memory to be used by the SAVE elements.
4-6
Chapter 5 - PC Elements Groups by Product

This chapter shows the correspondence between AC80, APC and AC70.
Common (to all)
ABS, ADD, ADD-MR, AND, AND-O, BGET, BLOCK, BSET, COMP-R, CONTRM, CONV, CONV-BI, CONV-IB, COUNT, DER, DIV, DIV-MR, FIFO, FILT-1P, FUNCM, FUNG-1V, INT, INV, LIM-N, MASTER, MAX, MIN, MONO, MOVE, MUL, MULDIV, MUX-I, MUX-MI, MUX-MN, OR, OR-A, PCPGM, PDP, PI, RAMP, REG, REG-G, SHIFT, SLAVEM, SQRT, SR, SR-AA, SR-AO, SR-D, SR-OA, SROO, SUB, SW, SW-C, SYSL, THRESH-L, TOFF, TON, TON-RET, TRIGG, XOR. ACSPR, ACSPW, AIAPC, AIEXT, AOEXT, AOMEAS, DCBINIT, DCBRD, DCBREC, DCBTRA, DCBWR, DIAPC, DIEXT, DOAPC, DOEXT, DRDIAG, DRFLT, DRPAR, DRPAR, DRREC, DRTRA, DRUPL, EVLOG, FBI, PANCON, PANREC, PANTRA, PAR, SPEEDP, WDOG. ACSRXA, COMP-I, CON-PU1, DCBAID, DCBRX EVBUG, EVPRTY, EVTLOG, IORX, MODR, MODW, OSC-B, PANC, PARSAVE, PIP, POINT, PRTCON, SYSTIME, WDOG80.
APC Elements with no Corresponding AC80 Elements
AC80 Elements with no Corresponding APC Elements
5-1
Chapter 5 - Product grouping for PC Elements
AC70 Elements with no Corresponding AC80 Elements Corresponding APC and AC80 Elements
COMP-B, DRI-CNV, OR-TRG, P-1, SEQ, STEP, TIMER. APC Element DCB00 EVLOG PANCON PAR PANREC PANTRA AC80 Element DCB01 EVTLOG PANC PARDAT, PARSAVE MODR MODW
5-2
Chapter 6 - Execution Times for PC Elements

The following pages show the execution times for PC elements. Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 1 of 6
Name ABS ACSRX ACSRXA ADD ADD-MR AFREC AFTRA AND AND-O AVG Execution time, Typical (s) 7 17 23 61+18xC2 34 3+0.7xC2 3+1xC2 10.7xC2 6.4+11.7xC1+11.7xC2 41+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 10 51+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 11 2.4+1.4xC1 5.4+2xC1+2xC2+2xC3+2xC4+2xC5+2xC6 9 15 33 6 10 23 5 3 5 4 9 9 9 9 16.4+7x(C1+C2) 189 155 330 Notes C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R EN = 1 EN = 0 C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R ACT = 1 ACT = 0 ACT = 1 ACT = 0 C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R C1 = I & SET = 1 C1 = IL & SET = 1 C1 = R & SET = 1 C1 = I,IL EN = 1 EN = 0 C1 = I, IL, B, T C1 = R. TR C1 = A C1 = I, IL C1 = 0 C1 = 1
Execution Times
BGET BLOCK BSET C COMP COMP-I COMP-R CON-PU1 CONTRM
6-1
Table 6 - 1 Execution times for PC Elements - Sheet 2 of 6

Name CONV Execution time, Typical (s) 7 17 21 15 33 39 17 5 33 11+2xC3 16.8+3.1xC3 7+2xC3 16.8+3.1xC3 11+2xC3 5 10.8+2.5xC3 25.6+3.1xC3 10.8+2.5xC3 12.8+2.5xC3 5 15 5 10 17.7 7 6 13+1xC3 14+1xC3 14 58 23 13 Notes I,IL I,IL I,IL R I,IL T, TR R I,IL,TR RT T I,IL,R,TR TR I,IL TR R TR T C1=I,IL,C2=1(BCI,IL) C1=I,IL C2=2(BCDI,IL) C1=I,IL C2=3(1of NI,IL) C1=I,IL C2=4(GrayI,IL) C1=I,IL C2=5(16/32BCI,IL) R=1 or L passive C1=I,IL C2=1(I,ILBC) C1=I,IL C2=2(I,ILBCD) C1=I,IL C2=3(I,IL1 of N) C1=I,IL C2=1(ILGray) R=1 or L passive EN = 1 & R = 0 EN = 0 & R = 0 CLEAR = 1 EN = 1 & CLEAR = 0 EN = 0 & CLEAR = 0 CLEAR = 1 C1 = I, IL, B, T C1 = R, TR R = 1 or L passive BAL = 0 & RDER = 0 BAL = 0 & RDER = 1 BAL = 1
CONV-BI
CONV-IB
COUNT DATALOG DCBAID DCBRX DEMUX-MI DER
6-2

Name DIV DIV-MR ERROR EVBUG EVENT EVPRTY EVT EVTLOG FIFO Execution time, Typical (s) 7.4 18 24 16.4xC1+16.4xC2 11.5 30.4 169.5 11 81.7. 19 6 189.5 24.5+2.5xC2 25.4+2.6xC2 30+4.6xC2 30+3.5xC2 24.8+3.2xC2 11 72 14 10.7 0 91 80 5 5 41 11 3 16+4.5xC1+4.5xC2 16+4.5xC1+4.5xC2 55+26xC2 9+1.4xC2 12+1xC2 14+1xC2 12.4+1xC2 13+1xC2 330 5.7+1.7xC2 7+2.4xC2 33+3.4xC2 Notes C1 = 1 C1 = IL C1 = R No events Events No events Events ACK = 1 ACK = 0 C1 = I C1 = IL, R C1 = B C1 = T C1 = TR R=1 BAL = 0 BAL = 1 BAL = 0 BAL = 1 BAL & RINT = 0 BAL & RINT = 1 EN = 1 EN = 0 EN = 1 EN = 0 C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R C1 = T C1 = TR C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R
FILT-1P FILTI FUNCM FUNG-1V IIL ILI INT INV IOBUSRD IOBUSWR IORX LIM-N
MASTER MAX
6-3

Name MB90REC MB90TRA MIN MODR MODW MONO MOVE MUL MULDIV MUXA-I MUX-I MUX-MI MUX-MN MUX-N OR OR-A OSC-B OSC-SIN PANC PARSAVE PCPGM PDP PI Execution time, Typical (s) 41+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 10 51+5xC1+8xC2+8xC3 9 5.7+1.7xC2 7+2.4xC2 33+3.4xC2 8 1.8+2.6xC2 2.8+3.1xC2 1.4+2xC2 9xC2 15xC2 7.4 10.4 6 6 7 11 7 10.4+1.3xC2 12.4+1.3xC2 9 6.8+1.1xC2 9.5+1.1xC2 2.4+1.4xC1 2+2x(C1+C2+C3+C4+C5+C6) 9.5 53 4 33 330 87 13 90 95 63 Notes ACT = 1 ACT = 0 ACT = 1 ACT = 0 C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R
C1 = B, I, IL, R C1 = T, TR C1 = I C1 = IL C1 = R C2 = 20 C1 = I C1 = IL, R, B, TR C1 = T C1 = I, IL,B, R, T, TR RESET = 1 C1 = I, IL, R, TR C1 = T RESET = 1 C1 = I, IL, R, B, TR C1 = T (1.4+1.2xC1),()=Inlinetime EN = 1 EN = 0
BAL = 0 BAL = 1 REVACT = 1 REVACT = 0 RINT = 1
6-4

Name PII PIP POINT PRTCON RAMP RAMP-S1 RAMP-SSH REG Execution time, Typical (s) 37 10 85 21 67 15 299 43 201 35 7+1.7xC2 6.4+2xC2 6.4+3x C2 7+2.4xC2 6 7+1xC2 8+1xC2 8.4+1xC2 7.4+1.4xC2 8.7+1xC2 9+1xC2 8 10 183 29 20 8 8.4 8.7 5.7 7 8 14 9 7 0 54 4 4+1xC1+1xC2 4+1xC1+1xC2 6 4 4+1xC1+1xC2 4+1xC1+1xC2 5 Notes RESET = 0 RESET = 1
REG-G
RWM
SAVE
SHIFT
BAL = 0 BAL = 1 BAL = 0 BAL = 1 BAL = 0 BAL = 1 C1 = I C1 = IL, R, B C1 = T C1 = TR S=0 C1 = I L1 = IL C1 = R C1 = B C1 = T C1 = TR S=0 SEL = -2 or -1 SEL = 0 SEL = XXY & Y = 0 SEL = XXY other conversions C1 = I, IL C1 = R C1 = B EN = 0 C1 = I L1 = IL, R C1 = B C1 = T, TR R=1
SLAVEM SQRT SR SR-AA SR-AO SR-D SR-OA SR-OO SUB
S=0&R=0 S = 1 or R = 1 C1 = I, IL, R
6-5

Name SW Execution time, Typical (s) 5.7+1.7xC2 6+2xC2 5.7+3xC2 6+2.4xC2 4 4.7+2xC2 4.3+2.3xC2 4.3+3.3xC2 4.7+2.7xC2 13+18xC1 87 4.6+1.2xC2 8 3 4 3 8.4 6 3 4 11 4 Notes C1 = I C1 = IL, R, B C1 = T C1 = TR ACT = 0 C1 = I C1 = IL, R, B C1 = T C1 = TR
SW-C
SYSL SYSTIME THRESH-L TOFF TON TON-RET TRIGG WDOG80 XOR
I=1 I=0 I=1 I=0 I=1 I=0&R=0 I=0&R=1
(1.5), () = inline time
6-6
Chapter 7 - Space Requirements for PC Elements

The following pages show the RAM space requirements for the PC elements when all the inputs of each element are connected to the output of another element. Table 7 1 Space requirements for PC Elements - Sheet 1 of 3
Element ABS ACSRX ACSRXA ADD ADD-MR AFREC AFTRA AND AND-O AVG BGET BLOCK BSET C COMP COMP-I COMP-R CON-PU1 CONTRM CONV CONV-BI CONV-IB COUNT DATALOG DCBAID DCBRX DEMUX-MI DER DIV DIV-MR PC Statement 12 Data 2 4 2 4 0 2 12+2xC2 0 2 0 Notes C1=I C1=IL C1=I C1=IL,R
2xC2+8 10+2C1+2C2 2xC1+8 12+6C1+6C2+X0 6C3+6C4+6C5+6C6 16 12 10 16
4x(C1+C2)+16
8+2x(C1+C2)
2xC3+22 2xC3+22 28 36 36 20+2xC2 32 16 8+2C1+2C2
6 8 12+2xC3 10 12 22+2xC2 22+4xC2 X2 44 4 8 0
C1=I C1=IL C1=I C1=IL XC1=B,I XC1=IL,R
C1=I C1=IL
7-1
Table 7 1 Space requirements for PC Elements - Sheet 2 of 3

Element ERROR EVBUG EVENT EVPRTY EVT EVTLOG FIFO FILT-1P FILTI FUNCM FUNG-1V IIL ILI INT INV IOBUSRD IOBUSWR IORX LIM-N MASTER MAX MB90REC MB90TRA MIN MODR MODW MONO MOVE MUL MULDIV MUX-I MUX-MI MUX-MN MUX-N MUXA-I OR OR-A OSC-B OSC-SIN PC Statement 12 Local Data 84 Notes
4xC2+22 12 28 0 24 10 10
16+2x(C2+C2xC3) 16+4x(C2+C2xC3) 12 40 0 36 0 0
C1=I,B C1=IL,R,T,TR
6xC2+22 32 2xC2+12 22+2xC1+2xC2+2xC3 20+2xC1+2xC2+2xC3 2xC2+12
14 20 4 4 14 14 4 6
C1=I C1=IL,R,T,TR
C1=I C1=IL
16 4xC2+6 2xC2+8 14 2xC2+12 2xC2+20 4xC2+18 10+2xC2 12+2xC1 2xC1+8 12+2C1+2C2+2C3 16
12 2xC2 4xC2 2 4 0 4 6 6 6 8 0 0
C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR C1=I C1=IL,R C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR
16
7-2
Table 7 1 Space requirements for PC Elements - Sheet 3 of 3

Element PANC PARSAVE PCPGM PDP PI PII PIP POINT PRTCON RAMP RAMP-S1 RAMP-SSH REG
REG-G RWM SAVE SHIFT SLAVEM SQRT SR SR-AA SR-AO SR-D SR-OA SR-OO SUB SW SW-C SYSL SYSTIME THRESH-L TOFF TON TON-RET TRIGG WDOG80 XOR
PC Statement
Local Data
Notes
20 30 36 32
2 48 36 20
32 42 44 4xC2+14 26+2xC2+2xC3
52 54 66 2+2xC2 2+4xC2 6+2xC5 6+4xC5 4 2+2xC2 2+4xC2 6 2 0 0 4 0 0 2 4 2xC2 4xC2 2xC2 4xC2 8+6xC1
C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR
20 22
C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR
12 9 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 +2C4+2C5+2C6 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 +2C4+2C5+2C6 16 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 +2C4+2C5+2C6 8+2C1+2C2+2C3 +2C4+2C5+2C6 12 4xC2+8 6xC2+8 8+8xC1
C1=I C1=IL,R C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR C1=B,I C1=IL,R,T,TR
14 14 16 10 10
12 12 12 4 2
7-3
7-4
Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions
Chapter 8 - PC ELEMENTS from A to C Absolute Value

Summary
ABS (ABSolute value) is used to obtain the absolute value of an integer, long integer or a real number. The absolute value is multiplied by an optional value. ABS (C1) Table 1.
Parameter Description C1 Data type Permissible values IL, R, I
ABS
ABS (C1) I O K
1 2
Call Call Parameters
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 5 Name I K O Type IC1 IC1 OC1 Description Input. Input for number, whose absolute value is to be obtained. Input for multiplication factor K. Output. Output for the product of K and the absolute value of I.
Function
The absolute value of input I is multiplied by the value at input K and the result is stored at output O.
8- 1
Transmit/Receive ACS Datasets

Summary
The ACSRX (ACS Receive Xmit) element is used to transmit and/or receive datasets to/from an ACS 600 Drive (e.g. ACS 600 MultiDrive or ACS600 SingleDrive).
F1 1 2 3 21 22 23 24 25 11+10*C2 12+10*C2 13+10*C2 14+10*C2 15+10*C2 EN RESET CNTRL DS1 WR1 I11 I21 I31 DS*C2 WR*C2 I1*C2 I2*C2 I3*C2
ACSRX
ACSRX C1 DRNR ERR RDY LINK 4 5 6
O11 O21 O31
26 27 28
O1*C2 O2*C2 O3*C2 ERRC
16+10*C 17+10*C 18+10*C 99
ACSRX (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Block number Number of datasets
Figure 1.
Permissible values 1 = basic block, 2...6 other block
Connections
Table 2.
No FI 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 22 23 Name DRNR EN RESET CNTRL ERR RDY LINK DS1 WR1 I11 Type II IB IB II OB OB OI II IB II Description Target DRIve NumbeR. ENable the block. RESET the error code ERRC. Operation CoNTRoL ERRor in the FB or ACS link operation. Data ReaDY. New valid data received. Current status of the ACS LINK. DataSet number of the first transmit dataset. Enable the WRrite of the first transmit dataset. First Integer of the first transmit dataset. Value 1...12 0 or 1 01 see table 3
see table 4 1...254 0 or 1
8-2
Table 2 continued
No 24 25 26 27 28 n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8 99 Name I21 I31 O11 O21 O31 DS*C2 Type II II OI OI OI II Description Value
WR*C2 IB I1*C2 I2*C2 I3*C2 OI*C2 O2*C2 O3*C2 ERRC II II II OI OI OI OI
Second Integer of the first transmit dataset. Third Integer of the first transmit dataset. First integer of the first received dataset. Second integer of the first received dataset. Third integer of the first received dataset. DataSet number of the last (C2) transmit dataset. Enable the Write of the last (C2) 0 or 1 transmit dataset. First Integer of the last (C2) transmit dataset. Second Integer of the last (C2) transmit dataset. Third Integer of the last (C2) transmit dataset. First integer of the last (C2) received dataset. Second integer of the last (C2) received dataset. Third integer of the last (C2) received dataset. ERRor Code see Table 5
Bits of the CNTRL Terminal
Table 3.
Bit # 0 Description This block is a synchronizing block (this block must be a "basic" block, too).
Bits of the LINK Terminal
Table 4.
Bit # 0 1 Description
Drive link is OK. Drive link is broken, DriveBus manager will disconnect communication. 2 Drive link initialisation is progress. 3 No NDBU-xx units present or incorrect node address of the NDBUxx units. Note : The value of this terminal is not an integer value but a batch of 16 bits.
8- 3
Initialisation of the Drive Communication Links Use of a ACSRX Element
Before ACSRX PC element can be executed you must initialise (with DB elements DRB00) the communication links to the drives that are used in the application program. The (logical) target drive number of a ACSRX element is defined with the function parameter DRNR (the physical drive number of this target drive is defined in the DB element DRB00). Call parameter C1 defines the number of the ACSRX element: 1 = basic (of this DRNR) 2...6 = other (of this DRNR)
Every drive that is used in the application program has a "basic" ACSRX element (and optional "other" ACSRX element) of its own. Maximum total number of ACS blocks (ACSRX, ACSPR and ACSPW) / drive is 6. The value of this call parameter is displayed inside the graphical ACSRX element by FCB. Call parameter C2 defines the number (1...4) of the transmit datasets. The inputs DS1 to DS*C2 define the dataset numbers (1 to 254) of the transmit datasets. The values of the transmit datasets are in the I11...I3*C2 inputs. One dataset contains always three 16 bit integers. If other number types are needed then these must be packed/unpacked in the AC80 by using e.g. PC elements IIL, ILI and CONV.
8-4
If the WR input of a transmit dataset is set to 1 then the ACSRX element transmits the values of this dataset to the target drive and automatically receives the values of a dataset whose dataset number = transmit dataset number + 1 (a ACSRX element only starts this transmit/receive process during its execution and the actual transmitting/receiving is done as a background operation while the other blocks are executing). The values of the received datasets are in the O11...O3*C2 outputs. These values have been received from the target drive after the previous execution of the ACSRX element (they are not read from the drive during the current execution of this block). The receipt of new valid values from all receive datasets of the ACSRX element is acknowledged by setting the RDY output to 1 for one execution cycle of this block. This output is set to 0 if new valid dataset values have not been received since the last execution of this block (either the cycle time of this block is too short or the ACS communication link is invalid). Note: Application programs both in the AC80 and in the target drive must interpret the meaning of the values in the transmit and receive datasets in the same way. This is left on the responsibility of the application programmer(s). The Application Identifier (a 16 bit integer defined by the drive application programmer) of the target drive application assists in verifying the correct meaning of the dataset values (see the APPIDn inputs in the DB elements and error number 50 in Table 5).
Execution Sequence of the ACSRX Element
The drive communication time is divided into a sequence of fixedlength time slots. The length of one time slot = the time that is needed to process all datasets in all basic blocks. Every second time slot is reserved for the datasets in the "other" blocks and for other drive communication. Every second time slot is reserved for the datasets in the "other" blocks and for other ACS communication (if the number of all "other" datasets is greater or equal than the number of all "basic" datasets then two or more two-slot sequences are needed to process all "other" datasets).
8- 5
This time slot sequence is illustrated in Figure 2:

All Basic datasets Part of (or all) Otherdatasets All Basic datasets Part of (or all) Otherdatasets All Basic datasets
Figure 2. Processing of the Datasets of the ACSRX the ACSRX elements.
Synchronization of the ACSRX Element of a ACS Comm Board
If bit 0 in the CNTRL inputs of all "basic" blocks is set to 0 then the ACSRX communication is freewheeling (as described in the previous chapter). During every time slot reserved for other datasets the system periodically check (check interval = 1 millisecond) if bit 0 in the CNTRL input of a basic block is set to 1 (the EN input of this block must be set to 1, too). If it is then the execution of this other time slot is terminated and the execution of a new basic time slot is started. Note 1: At least one other dataset is processed in the beginning of every other time slot before the above described sync block test. This ensures that the processing of other datasets is never totally blocked. Note 2: If bit 0 in the CNTRL inputs of several basic blocks are set to 1 (this is a programming error in the application program) then the basic block with the smallest DRNR is used as the synchronizing block.
Error Handling
In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output indicates the applicable error code (see Table 5). Errors are originated either from the execution of the ACSRX element itself (error codes 70nn to 82nn) or from the DB element DRB00 that defines the target drive of the ACSRX element (error codes 89nn). The ERR output is set to 0 with the first successful response. The ERRC output retains the code of the last occurred error. A 0->1 transition in the RESET input clears the ERRC output if the error situation is no more in effect.
8-6
Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions Error code = Error code = Error code = 7000+error_number 34 (see below) 7000+drive_number (1...12)* 100+error_number (see below) 8900+error_number (see below) or or
Error Codes
Table 5.
Error # 1 4 5 8 16 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40...49 Description Invalid drive type definition (DRTYPEn) in DB element DRB00. The NCB communication board is missing. Invalid NCB communication board. The AC80 expansion module is other than the NCB communication board. Initialization error in NCB communication board. Call parameter C1 is not in the range 1...6. Call parameter C2 is not in the range 1...4. Drive link timeout. Drive number (DRNR) is not in the range 1...12. DB element DRB00 does not exist. This block number (C1) is already in use with this drive (DRNR). Dataset number (DSn) is not in the range 1...254. Communication error detected by NCB communication board. 42 = Receive failure 43 = Transmit failure 44 = Drive not responding 45 = Sequence error 46 = Drive disapproved 48 = Wrong dataset in reply (or lost, therefore this dataset rejected). 49 = Unknown error Application IDs in the DRB00 (APPIDn) and in the drive are different.
50
Related Documents
Description of DB elements DRB00.
8- 7
Receive ACS Datasets

Summary
The ACSRXA (ACS Receive Xmit Auxiliary) element can be used to for reading dataset values from an ACS 600 drive (e.g. ACS 600 SingleDrive or ACS 600 MultiDrive). The advantage of using ACSRXA is, that the new values are thus (typically) available for application program before they appear into output pins of actual ACSRX. Using of ACSRXA does not change reception characteristics of ACSRX: It will also copy the read values to it is output pins, whether ACSRXA exist or not.
F=1-F1
ACSRXA
ACSRXA DRNR ERR RDY LINK 011 021 031 012 022 032 013 023 033 014 024 034 ERRC 2 3 4 10 11 12 20 21 22 30 31 32 40 41 42 99
Call Parameters
ACSRXA (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Block number Number of datasets
Figure 1.
Permissible values 1 = basic block, 2...6 other block 1...4
Connections
Table 2.
No FI 2 3 4 10 11 12 n0 n1 n2 99 Name DRNR ERR RDY LINK O11 O21 O31 O1*C2 O2*C2 O3*C2 ERRC Type II OB OB OI OI OI OI OI OI OI OI Description Value
Target DRIve NumbeR. 1...12 ERRor in the FB or drive link operation. Data ReaDY. New valid data received. Current status of the drive LINK. see Table 3 First integer of the first received dataset. Second integer of the first received dataset. Third integer of the first received dataset. First integer of the last (C2) received dataset. Second integer of the last (C2) received dataset. Third integer of the last (C2) received dataset. ERRor Code. see Table 4
8-8
Table 3.
Bit # 0 1 Description
Drive link is OK. Drive link is broken, DriveBus manager will disconnect communication. 2 Drive link initialisation in progress. 3 No NDBU-xx units present or incorrect node address of the NDBUxx units. Note 1: The value of this terminal is not an integer value but a batch of 16 bits.
Use of ACSRXA Element
Before ACSRXA element can be executed you must insert respective ACSRX element in some other place of your program. (Recommendation = in same task, but in later point of execution chain). Respective block = Block, which has same call parameters C1 and C2 and same function parameter DRNR. The (logical) target drive number of a ACSRX/ACSRXA elements is defined with the function parameter DRNR (the physical drive number of this target drive is defined in the DB element DRB00). Call parameter C1 defines the number of the ACSRX element: 1 = basic (of this DRNR) 2...6 = other (of this DRNR)
Every drive that is used in the application program has a "basic" ACSRX/ACSRXA element (and optional "other" ACSRX elements) of its own. The value of this call parameter is displayed inside the graphical ACSRXA element by FCB. Call parameter C2 defines the number (1...4) of the transmit datasets. Also this parameter must be the same as used in ACSRX (for safety and simplicity). There are no inputs to define the dataset numbers (1...254) of the datasets to be received. The definition is common with ACSRX. In other words: The received dataset numbers are those written in ACSRX input pins, incremented by 1, because the given values are there for sendind datasets. This convention is common to ACSRX and ACSRXA. The values of the received datasets are written into the O11...O3*C2 outputs. These values have been asked from the target drive after the previous execution of the accompanying ACSRX element.
8- 9
The receipt of new valid values from all receive datasets of the ACSRX/ACSRXA elements acknowledged by setting the RDY output to 1 for one execution cycle of this block. This output is set to 0 if new valid dataset values have not been received since the last execution of this block (either the cycle time of this block is too short or the drive communication link is inoperational). Note: Application programs both in the AC80 and in the target drive must interpret the meaning of the values in the receive datasets in the same way. This is left on the responsibility of the application programmer(s). The Application Identifier (a 16 bit integer defined by the drive application programmer) of the target drive application assists in verifying the correct meaning of the dataset values (see the APPIDn inputs in the DB element DRB00).
Execution Sequence of the ACSRX/ACSRXA Elements
The drive communication time is divided into a sequence of fixedlength time slots. The length of one time slot = the time that is needed to process all datasets in all "Basic" elements. Every second time slot is always reserved for all datasets in all "Basic" elements. Every second time slot is reserved for the datasets in the "Other" elements and for other drive communication. This time slot sequence is illustrated in Figure 2:
All Basic datasets Part of (or all) Otherdatasets All Basic datasets Part of (or all) Otherdatasets All Basic datasets
Figure 2. Processing of the Datasets of the ACSRX/ACSRXA elements.
Error Handling
In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output indicates the applicable error code (see Table 4). Errors are originated either from the execution of the ACSRX or ACSRXA element itself (error codes 70nn...82nn) or from the DB element DRB00 that defines the target drive of the ACSRX/ACSRXA element (error codes 89nn). The ERR and ERRC outputs are set to 0 with the first successful response.
8 - 10
Chapter 8 - PC Element Descriptions Error code = Error code = Error code = 7000+error_number 34 (see below) 7000+drive_number (1...12)* 100+error_number (see below) 8900+error_number (see below) or or
Error Codes
Table 4.
Error # 1 4 5 8 16 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40...49 Description Invalid drive type definition (DRTYPEn) in DB element DRB00. The NCB communication board is missing. Invalid NCB communication board. The AC80 expansion module is other than the NCB communication board. Initialization error in NCB communication board. Call parameter C1 is not in the range 1...6. Call parameter C2 is not in the range 1...4. Drive link timeout. Drive number (DRNR) is not in range 1...12. DB element DRB00 does not exit. This block number (C1) is already in use with this drive (DRNR). Dataset number (DSn) is not in the range 1...254. Communication error in NCB communication board. 42 = Receive failure 43 = Transmit failure 44 = Drive not responding 45 = Sequence error 46 = Drive disapproved 48 = Wrong dataset in reply (or lost, therefore this dataset rejected). 49 = Unknown error Application IDs in the DRB00 (APPIDn) and in the drive are different. Respective ACSRX element is missing. Respective ACSRXA created twice. Respective ACSRX has different number of datasets.
50 53 54 55
Related Documents
Description of DB elements DRB00.
8 - 11
Adder
Summary Call Call Parameters
ADD (ADDer) is used to calculate the sum of up to 19 integers or real numbers. ADD (C1,C2) Table 1.
Parameter Description
C1 C2
1 2
C2
ADD
+ C1 20
Figure 1.
Permissible values
Data type I, IL, R Number of inputs 2...19
Connections
Table 2.
No
1 2 . . . C2 20
Name
-
Type
IC1 IC1 IC1 OC1
Description
Input for addend. Input for addend. Input for addend. Output for sum.
Function Overflow
The values at inputs 1...C2 are added and the sum is stored at output 20. If the maximum positive or negative value is exceeded, the output is limited to the highest or lowest allowable value for the data type.
8 - 12
Adder
Summary
ADDer with Multiplier of Real numbers is used for the addition of an optional number of real numbers. The numbers are added in two groups, each of a maximum of 19 numbers, after which the second group is subtracted from the first. The result is multiplied with a real number. ADD-MR (C1,C2) Table 1.
C1 C2 Number of positive inputs in the addition element. Number of negative inputs in the addition element.
1 11 .. 10 + C1 31 .. 30 + C2
ADD-MR
* + 50
Figure 1.
Permissible values
1...19 1...19
Connections
Table 2.
No
1 11 12 . . . 10+C1 31 32 . . . 30+C2 50
Name
-
Type
IR IR1 IR IR IR IR IR OB
Description
Input for the multiplication factor. Input for augend with positive weight factor. Input for addend with positive weight factor. Input for addend with positive weight factor. Input for augend with negative weight factor. Input for addend with negative weight factor. Input for addend with negative weight factor. Output for result.
Function
The sum of the real numbers at the inputs 31 to 30 + C2 is subtracted from the sum of the inputs 11 to 10 + C1. The result is multiplied with the value at input 1. The result is stored at the output 50. If the maximum positive or negative real number is exceeded, the output is limited to the greatest or lowest representable value respectively.
Overflow
8 - 13
DataSet Receiver for AF100

Summary
AFREC
AFREC Advant Fieldbus 100 RECeive element is F1 ERR IDENT used to receive cyclic data packets STATION F2 ACT 1 RDY (=CDPs) from the Advant Field Bus AF100. Data types within the packet are I1 indicated by the call parameters and can I... be I, IL, or R, and should equal the call I*C1 IL1 parameters of the respective transmitting IL... AFTRA PC element (or DSP DB-element if IL*C2 the transmitting station is not APC or R1 AC80). AFREC element should be always R... accompanied with respective DSP in DB RC3 part of the application (in order to specify ERRC assumed CDP transfer interval and to enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to summarize various CDPs in each station). Figure 1. The AFREC PC element can be used to trigger execution of event driven task. (=CONTRM (2,255,0))
10 11 21 20+... 20+C1
51 50+... 50+C2 71 70+... 70+C3 99
AFREC (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter
C1 C2 C3
Description
Number of I values Number of IL values Number of R values Where: 0 < C1 + C 2 + C 3 8
Permissible values
0...8 0...8 0...8
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 1 10 Name IDENT STATION ACT ERR Type II II IB OB Description Dataset IDENTity number. Node number of the sender. Input. ACTivates CDP reception. Communication ERRor. Values 1...50 1...79 1=active
8 - 14
Table 2 continued
No 11 21 . . . 20+C1 51 . . . 50+C2 71 . . . 70+C3 99 Name RDY I1 IC1 IL1 ILC2 R1 RC3 ERRC Type OB OI OI OIL OIL OR OR OI Description Output data has been updated. Output. I value number 1. Output. I value number C1. Output. IL value number 1. Output. IL value number C2. Output. R value number 1 Output. R value number C3. ERRor Code Values
*see Table 3
Error Codes
Table 3.
Error code # Description
Communication startup errors: 3002 Bus coupler self-test failed. 3003 Not enough memory available in system-RWM. 3004 AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB element. 3005 Station address in the hardware is not equal to the STNNO value of PM825 AF100 part. 3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element in the same AC80). 3102 STATION value is equal to the address defined in the PM825 STNNO. (= impossible to receive from itself) 3103 Illegal IDENT. 3104 Illegal length of CDP 3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified. 3106 Respective DSP missing from DB part. 3108 Respective DSP specified different CDP length. 3109 Respective DSP specified different transfer direction. 3201 Too many CDPs used in this station. 3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP configuration.
Run time errors (may occur even after successful start-up):

3402 3403 3501 Time-out when waiting for address frames from the BA. No response to address frame from the data source station. CRC-error (data frame corrupted during transfer, or two stations responded to same address frame).
8 - 15
When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error code (above) are translated to texts:
3000...3099 3100...3199 3200...3299 3400...3499 3500...3599 MB90 START FAILED MB90 DATASET REJ. MB90 FULL (LOCAL) MB90 PARTNER FAIL MB90 DISTURBANCE
Function
Upon initialization the AFREC PC element: checks that the PM825 DB element has specified the AF100 bus coupler checks the working condition of the bus coupler checks the legality of the IDENT and STATION parameters checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application allocates a communication port for the CDP.
The reception of the CDP is introduced internally to AF100 specific system software of the station, which then configures the local bus coupler respectively. But the reception preparations are not told to (or made in) the BusAdministrator. The specified CDP should be configured into BA by some other station, which thereafter is responsible also to send the data always after BA sends the proper address frames. If the sender is an AC80 station, it should contain a respective AFTRA PC element or if some other type of station, contain a respective sending DSP element. This mechanism makes it possible, that AFREC can indicate at ERRC pin, why the data was not received: Either address frames from the BA or actual CDP data from the sending station were missing. AFREC captures from AF100 the CDP telegrams tagged with the specified signal address. The signal address is computed using the STATION and IDENT parameters. To enable the receive function of a communication port, the STATION and IDENT of the AFREC PC element must equal the station and ident numbers found in the sending block. Additionally, the length of the telegram must equal the length specified by the transmitting block. Identical values for call parameters (which effectively specify CDP length) should be therefore used in transmitting and receiving ends. (mismatching length specification may disable the bus coupler to receive the CDPs, although they contained correct signal address). The STATION parameter of the AFREC must be equal to the STNNO value of PM825 (AF100 part of it) DB-element in the sending station.
8 - 16
The IDENT parameter must be equal to IDENT of the sending AFTRA. RDY is set (to 1) if a new CDP telegram was transferred after the previous execution, and the output terminals were updated. Updating of output data (and all other output pins as well) can be temporarily or permanently disabled by clearing the input ACT = 0. Error code ERRC, if set for any reason, can be cleared only by a raising edge (=transition 0 -> 1) at ACT pin. Boolean values must be unpacked from integers ( I ) or long integers (IL). Packed booleans DAT(B) or DAT(NB) from DSPs of other Advant Controller types must be unpacked from long integers. All data items within a CDP are assumed to be 4 bytes long, even if they are16 bit integers. This makes AFREC compatible with DSPs of other Advant Controller types, where DAT(I) is also placed into CDPs so, that it takes 4 bytes space. Therefore the restriction C1 + C2 + C3 must be <= 8. (because max. CDP length = 32 bytes). If the sending DSP contains DAT(II) or DAT(NI), they should be received in AC80 by AFREC as IL data item and then unpacked with ILI element (or use MB90REC element for reception instead of AFREC) The order of the data in the CDP received by the AFREC PC element is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of this rule, when assembling DSPs in other Advant Controller stations, if they should be receivable by AC80. If receiving integers (I) sent by MB90TRA, the first, third, fifth etc. integer will be lost. (However such communication (MB90TRA -> AFREC) should be never necessary (or used) between two APC or AC80 stations).
Fault Handling
The ERR output is set (to 1) when a new reception does not occur within 4 receiving intervals (or within 4 execution intervals, if the respective DSP is missing from the DB-part). A diagnostic error code is loaded to output ERRC (see table 3). The ERR output will reset (to 0) or set (to 1) depending on the communication status, but the last error code will always remain at the ERRC output even when ERR is reset (ERRC is assumed to be cleared during the next restart of the station, or by a 0-pulse in the ACT-pin.) A mismatch between the NODE value and hardware switch settings disables all CDP communications from and to the station. However, service communications to the station are still possible via AF100. During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not been received from the bus administrator and is not an error condition.
8 - 17
Error code 3402 is also a normal thing after start-up, because BA does not send proper address frames for AFREC before respective CDP is configured there by the sending station, and this may happen after AFTRA became active. Look always ERR pin before you worry about ERRC contents.
Event Triggering
In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC, AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC elements that specifies an interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and start an event driven application task in the station. AFREC or AFTRA PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with respect to data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was positive. The bus administrator does not know of the existence of CDP interrupts. AFREC will be typically used to specify the triggering CDP, although AFTRA may be used as well. In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM that is executed due to interrupts from AF100. This CONTRM must have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined as 2 (AF100 interrupts). The event triggering AFREC PC element will normally reside inside the event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between the physical data reception and the actual updating of the output pins of the AFREC PC element. The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur: the respective CDP communication port will be disabled no AF100 interrupts will be generated the event task will no longer be executed if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM then setting ACT (to 1 from 0) will have no effect, because the AFREC is never executed and therefore never detects the change of ACT signal. (If the AFREC element is outside the event driven task, then setting the ACT input (from 0 to 1) will reenable events to be triggered.)
It is not necessary that the interrupting CDP is the same in all AC80 stations.
Type Circuits
AFIN and AF_IN type circuits are available to make it easier to insert both AFREC and respective DSP into AC80 application.
8 - 18
AFIN will insert dedicated DAT(x) elements respective to each data pin of AFREC, and MOVE elementsfor updating the contents of these DATs. AF_IN will only insert respective DSP, but connect it to common DAT(IL) element named DUMMYDAT and do not update it is content. DUMMYDAT must be inserted into DB-part before AF_IN can be inserted anywhere in PC-part of the application.
8 - 19
DataSet Transmitter for AF100

Summary
AFTRA
AFTRA Advant Fieldbus 100 TRAnsmit element is ERR 10 F1 IDENT used to send cyclic data packets (=CDPs) SCAN F2 1 ACT to the Advant Field Bus AF100. The data values are updated in the bus coupler 21 I1 ERRC 99 memory each time the PC element is 20+... I... executed. The actual cyclic transmission of 20+C1 I*C1 51 IL1 the data is however independent of the PC 50+... IL... element execution. The sending interval is 50+C2 IL*C2 configured by this block. Data types within 71 R1 the packet are indicated by the call 70+... R... parameters and can be I, IL, or R, and RC3 70+C3 should equal the call parameters of the respective receiving AFREC PC elements Figure 1. (or DSP DB elements if the receiving station is not APC or AC80). AFTRA element should be always accompanied with respective DSP in DB part of the application (in order to enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to summarize various CDPs in each station). The AFTRA PC element can be used to trigger execution of event driven task. (=CONTRM (2,255,0))
AFTRA (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter
C1 C2 C3
Description
Number of I values Number of IL values Number of R values Where: 0 < C1 + C 2 + C 3 8
Permissible values
0...8 0...8 0...8
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 1 10 Name IDENT SCAN ACT ERR Type II II IB OB Description CDP IDENTity number. Transmission interval. Input. ACTivates CDP reception. Communication ERRor. Values 1...50 1...4096 ms see Table 3 1 = active
8 - 20
Table 2 continued
No 21 . . . 20+C1 51 . . . 50+C2 71 . . . 70+C3 99 Name I1 IC1 IL1 ILC2 R1 RC3 ERRC Type II II IIL IIL IR IR OI Description Input. I value number 1. Input. I value number C1. Input. IL value number 1. Input. IL value number C2. Input. R value number 1 Input. R value number C3. ERRor Code Values
*see Table 4
SCAN Values
Table 3.
Value of SCAN 1 2 3...5 6...11 12...23 24...47 48...95 96...191 192...383 384...767 768...1535 1536...3071 3072...4096 Actual transmission interval used 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
Although all SCAN values <= 4096 are allowed, the value should match with respective DSP and there is aloowed only 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096.
Error Codes
Table 4.
Error Code # 3002 3003 3004 3005 3101 3103 Description Bus coupler self-test failed. Not enough memory available in system-RWM. AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB element. Station address in the hardware is not equal to the STNNO value of PM825 AF100 part. Signal address already reserved (by another PC element in the same APC). Illegal IDENT-value.
8 - 21
Table 4 continued
Error Code # 3104 3105 3201 3301 3302 3401 Description Illegal length or SCAN-value of CDP. Multiple interrupting CDPs specified. Too many CDPs used in this station. Time slots cannot be allocated for the CDP. CDP identifier reserved by another station. Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP configuration.
Run time error (may occur even after successful start-up):

3402 Time-out waiting for address frames from the BA.
When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error code(above) are translated to texts:
3000...3099 3100...3199 3200...3299 3300...3399 3400...3499 3500...3599 MB90 START.FAILED MB90 DATASET REJ. MB90 FULL (LOCAL) MB90 FULL (GLOBAL) MB90 PARTNER FAIL MB90 DISTURBANCE
Function
Upon initialization the AFTRA PC element: checks that the PM825 DB element has specified the AF100 bus coupler checks the working condition of the bus coupler checks the legality of the IDENT and STATION parameters checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application allocates a communication port for the CDP.
The CDP is introduced to the Bus Administrator. After approval, the transmission of the CDP is started after a while (= not immediately), and repeated at intervals determined by the parameter SCAN. Time-out of approval message and/or disappearance of cyclic time slots for the CDP (=disappearance of respective address frames from the BA) will be detected and signaled at AFTRA error pins.
8 - 22
The CDP configured by a AFTRA PC element can be received by AFREC PC element in other AC80s or APCs or by a DSP database element in other Advant Controller stations. Each AFTRA IDENT value should be unique for a station. To be received correctly there should be at the other end of a link a receiver element AFREC with identical call parameter and IDENT values. The STATION value of the receiving block must equal the station number of the transmitting AC80. The station numbers of transmitting stations are declared using the STNNO parameter of the DB element PM825. The matching address value must be also set physically in the AC80 hardware using the provided rotary switches in front panel. Allowed address range is 1...79, and the station number must match with STNNO parameter defined in PM825. Otherwise it is impossible to even download the application into the AC80. (Note: Hardware address is set up as decimal number. Tens in upper switch and ones in lower switch) SCAN determines the transmission interval for the CDP on AF100 (i.e., how often the data values are transmitted). See table 3 for possible values. The transmission interval can be clearly shorter than the execution interval of AFTRA, provided there is capacity on AF100. (Or the opposite case, if AF100 is severely loaded and there is free capacity available in AC80, AFTRA execution interval may be much shorter than than the CDP transfer interval.) Transmission can be initially and/or dynamically deactivated by reseting (to 0) the input ACT. Even then the AFTRA PC element will present a CDP to the bus administrator and a communication port is locally reserved in the bus coupler memory for the CDP. However, the transmit function associated with the signal address will be disabled, and therefore the receiving blocks in other stations will show an error. Boolean values must be packed into integers ( I ) or long integers (IL). Packed booleans intended for Advant Controller stations (= for DAT(B)s in DSPs) must be packed to long integers with CONV-BI before connecting to AFTRA input.
8 - 23
All data items sent by AFTRA always occupied 4 bytes. The order of the data in the CDP sent by the AFTRA PC element is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of this rule, when transmitting to other Advant Controller stations. It is recommended not to use many integer (I) values, because thus the first, third, fifth, etc. word of the transmitted telegrams will not be utilized. To be received correctly there should be at the other end of a link a receiver element AFREC with identical call parameter and IDENT values. The STATION value of the receiving block must equal the station number of the transmitting APC. The station numbers of transmitting stations are declared using the NODE parameter of the DB element MB90. The matching address value must be also set on the AF100 bus coupler board (YPK112A) using the provided hardware switches. If the NODE value is 127 or 255, all hardware settings (within supported address range 1 to 79 = 00H to 4FH) are correct, and the station number for AFTRA is copied from the hardware switches. (Note: Hardware address switches are read as hexadecimal values, e.g., station 33 must be 21H in the set-up switches.) SCAN determines the transmission interval for the dataset on AF100 (i.e., how often the data values are transmitted). See table 3 for possible values. The transmission interval can be clearly shorter than the execution interval of AFTRA provided there is capacity on AF100. (Or the opposite case, if AF100 is severely loaded, there is free capacity available in APC, and the transmission delays should be minimal.) Transmission can be initially and/or dynamically deactivated by reseting (to 0) the input ACT. Even then the AFTRA PC element will present a dataset to the bus administrator and a communication port is locally reserved in the dual port memory of YPK112A. However, the transmit function associated with the signal address will be disabled, and therefore the receiving blocks in other stations will show an error. Boolean values must be packed into integers ( I ) or long integers (IL). Packed booleans intended for Advant Controller 100 stations must be packed to long integers. All data items sent by AFTRA always occupied 4 bytes.
8 - 24
The order of the data in the dataset sent by the AFTRA PC element is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of this order when transmitting to Advant Controller 100 stations. It is recommended not to use integer (I) values, because then the first, third, fifth, etc. word of the transmitted telegrams will not be utilized.
Fault Handling
The ERR output is set (to 1) when a transmission does not occur within 4 sending intervals as defined by SCAN pin of the PC element. A diagnostic error code is loaded to output ERRC (see table 4). The ERR output will reset (to 0) or set (to 1) depending on the communication status, but the last error code will always remain at the ERRC output even when ERR is reset (ERRC is assumed to be cleared during the next restart of the station or by a zero-pulse in the ACT-pin). A mismatch between the STNNO value of PM825 and hardware switch settings disables all CDP communication from and to the station. However, service communications to the station are still possible via AF100. During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not been received from the bus administrator and is not an error condition. Error code 3402 is also normal after start-up, because BA does not start sending proper address frames for AFTRA immediately after it sent acknowledgement message about the CDP configuration. Look always ERR pin before you worry about ERRC contents.
Event Triggering
In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC, AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC element that specifies an interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and start an event driven application task in the station. AFREC or AFTRA PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with respect to data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was positive. The bus administrator does not know of the existence of CDP interrupts. AFTRA may be used to specify the event triggering CDP, although AFREC or MB90REC will be typically used. In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM that is executed due to interrupts from AF100.
8 - 25
This CONTRM must have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined as 2 (AF100 event task). The event triggering AFTRA PC element will normally reside inside the AF100 event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between the physical data transmitted and the actual updating of data for next transmission. (=maximizes the time, how long updated data waits for transfer along the bus, and makes that time constant = c. scan time of the CDP) Note that the first event caused by the AFTRA is generated after the configuration message is received from the Bus Administrator. This first event does not signify that actual data has been sent from this AFTRA by the AF100 bus coupler. The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur: the respective CDP communication port will be disabled no AF100 interrupts will be generated the event task will no longer be executed if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM then setting ACT (from 0 to 1) will have no effect, because the AFTRA is never executed and therefore never detects the change of ACT signal. (If the AFTRA element is outside the event driven task, then setting the ACT input (from 0 to 1) will reenable events to be triggered.)
8 - 26
And Gate
Summary
AND elements are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables. The elements can have a maximum of 19 inputs. AND (C1) Table 1.
Parameter C1 Description Number of inputs Permissible values 2...19
1 2 C1
AND
& 20
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 20 Name Type IB IB IB OB Description Input Input Input Output
Function
The output signal is set to 1 if all inputs 1..C1 are set to 1. See the truth table below. Truth Table of AND(2) Table 3.
1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
2
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
20
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
8 - 27
And Gate
Summary
AND with OR gates on the inputs is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
1
AND-O
& 60
C1 11
10+C2 51
>1
>1
AND-O (C1,C2,C3,Cn) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 . . . Cn Description Number of inputs in the AND part of the element. Number of inputs in the first OR gate of the element. Number of inputs in the second OR gate of the element
50+C6
Figure 1.
Permissible values 0...9 0...9 0...9
Number of inputs in the last OR gate of the element.
0...9
1 n 6 Where: 1 C1 C 2 .. Cn 40
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 11 12 Name Type IB IB Description Input direct to the AND gate in the element. Input direct to the AND gate in the element. Input direct to the AND gate in the element. Input to the first OR gate in the element. Input to the first OR gate in the element. Values
IB IB IB
8 - 28

Table 2 continued
No . . . 10+C2 21 22 . . . 10*(n-1)+1 10*(n-1)+2 . . . 10*(n-1)+Cn 60 Name Type Description Values
IB IB IB
Input to the first OR gate in the element. Input to the second OR gate in the element. Input to the second OR gate in the element. Input to the last OR gate in the element. Input to the last OR gate in the element. Input to the last OR gate in the element. Output.
IB IB
IB OB
Function
This function provides faster execution than if separate elements are used. The inputs only need to be tested until the value of the output can be determined. If input 1 is 0, then the output can be reset to 0 irrespective of all other inputs. See the example of AND_O (3,3,3) as shown in figure 2 and in table 3. Truth Table of AND-O (3,3,3) Table 3
1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2
x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3
x x 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11
x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
12
x x x 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 x x x x
13
x x x 0 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x
21
x x x x 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
22
x x x x 0 0 1 x 0 0 1 x 0 0 1 x
23
x x x x 0 1 x x 0 1 x x 0 1 x x
60
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
x indicates that the input has no effect on the value o the output or the execution time of the PC element.
8 - 29
Average
Summary
AVeraGe element is used to calculate the floating average of an optional number of integers or real numbers. AVG (C1,C2) Table 1.
Parameter C1 C2 Description Data type Number of samples
AVG
AVG(C1,C2) SET O 10 OF 11 I
1 2
Figure 1.
Permissible values I, IL, R 2...255
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 10 11 Name SET I O OF Type IB IC1 OC1 OC1 Description Input for storage of a new sample value each time the element is executed. Input of signal whose floating average is to be calculated. Output for the calculated floating average. Output for First value in the sample queue. Values
Function
New data is entered into the queue by replacing the oldest sample with the current value of I. The floating average is calculated by summing all values in the queue and then dividing by the number queue places C2 as shown in figure 1 below:
n 1
Figure 2. Floating Average Calculation
Output of Data
When the input SET is 1, data at I is loaded to the outputs O and OF. The number of values samples is set to 1. When the input SET is reset (to 0), the last value loaded at OF remains and O is calculated as in figure 1 above. If the number of sampled values, i.e., the number of times the element has been executed after SET has gone from 1 to 0, is less than C2 then this value is substituted as the divisor in calculation shown in figure 2, above.
8 - 30

1 C2
C2
In
Read One Bit
BGET
Summary
BGET is used to read one selected bit from an integer or long integer. The integer usually contains packed Boolean data.
1 2
BGET(C1) BITNR I O
10
Figure 1.
BGET Table 1.
Parameter C1 Description Data type Permissible values I, IL
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 10 Name BITNR I O Type II II OB Description The selected BIT NumberR to read. Input. Data input. Output. Status of the selected bit. Values 0...15 (C1=I) or 0...31 (C1=IL)
Function
The bit value of input I, specified by BITNR, is loaded to the output O. If BITNR is not in the range 0 to 15 (C1=I) or 0 to 31 (C1=IL), then the output O is set to 0.
8 - 31
Block Header
Summary Call Connections
Block header BLOCK is used to enable/disable the execution of several PC elements. BLOCK Table 1.
No
1 5
BLOCK
BLOCK ON RUN
Figure 1.
Name
ON RUN
Type
IB OB
Description
Control input which is set (to 1) for normal execution. RUN indicates execution of elements in the block.
Function
The structure element BLOCK is used to enable/disable a number of PC elements in a control module, a slave module or sequence step. A block may not contain structure elements or nested BLOCK elements. For normal execution of a block, the supervisory execution unit must be under normal execution, and the input ON of the block header must be set to 1. If the ON input is set to 0 after the block has been executed, the calculated data remains until the next time the block is executed. If the supervisory execution unit is executed in the reset mode, the elements in the block are also executed in that mode, irrespective of the state of the ON input. The output RUN is set if normal execution is in progress, i.e. the supervisory ecxecution unit is under normal execution and the ON input of the block is set.
. 1 ON RUN 5
Execution
Run
Normal execution of PC elements
Figure 2. Function Diagram
8 - 32
Set One Bit

Summary
BSET is used to change the state of one selected bit of an integer or long integer value. The integer usually contains packed Boolean data.
BSET
BSET(C1) EN BITNR BIT I O 10
1 2 3 4
Figure 1.
BSET (C1) Table 1.

Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name EN Type IB Description ENable. If EN is reset (to 0), then the current value I is loaded unchanged to output O. Input for selecting the BIT NumberR to set. Input. Value for the BIT. Input. Data Input. Output. Output of data. Values
2 3 4 10
BITNR BIT I O
II IB II OI
0...15(C1=I) or 0...31(C1=IL) 0...1
Function
If the value of the input EN is set (to 1), then the data bit, determined by BITNR, is replaced by the value of the input BIT and the result is loaded to the output O.
8 - 33
Comment
Summary Call Connection
C (C1, C2) is used to write comments in application program. C (C1,C2) Table 1.
Parameter C1 C2 Description Number of string values. No. of characters in string. Permissible values 1...32 1...30
8 - 34
Comparator
Summary Call Call Parameter
COMP (COMParator) is used to compare inputs.
1
COMP
COMP(C1,C2) I1 I2 I1>I2 I1=I2 I1<I2 5 6 7 2
COMP (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Data type. Length of the array.
Figure 1.
Permissible values A, B, I, IL, R, T,TR 0...80
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 5 6 7 Name I1 I2 I1>I2 I1=I2 I1<I2 Type IC1 IC1 OB OB OB Description Input 1. Input, whose value is compared with input I2. Input of signal whose floating average is to be calculated. Input 1 > Input 2. Output which is set if input I1 is grater than input I2. Input 1 = Input 2.Output which is set if input I1 is equal to input I2. Input 1< Input 2. Output which is set if input I1 is less than input I2. Values
Function
The values at the two inputs are compared and the result of the comparison can be read at the outputs I1<I2, I1=I2 or I1>I2. If the type of inputs is array, outputs I1 > I2 and I1 < I2 are set based on the first not equal characters of the input arrays. Example: If I1 = "AAAA" and I2 = "AAXA" then I1 < I2. At startup, output I1=I2 is set before the first execution regardless of the values of inputs I1 and I2.
8 - 35
Comparator Integer
Summary
COMP-I (COMParator - Integer) is used to compare two integers or long integers.
COMP-I
COMP-I(C1) I1 I1>I2 I2 I1=I2 I1<I2
1 2
5 6 7
COMP-I (C1) Table 1.

Parameter C1 Description Data type
Figure 1.
Permissible values I, IL
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 5 Name I1 I2 I1 > I2 Type IC1 IC1 OB Description Input 1. Input, whose value is compared with the value at input I2. Input 2. Input, whose value is compared with the value at input I1. Input 1 > Input 2. Output which is set to 1 if the value at input I1 is greater than the value at input I2. Input 1 = Input 2. Output which is set if the value at input I1 is equal to the value at input I2. Input 1 < Input 2. Output which is set if the value at input I1 is less than the value at input I2.
6 7
I1 = I2 I1 < I2
OB OB
Function
The values at the two inputs are compared and the result of the comparison can be read at the outputs I1 > I2, I1 = I2, I1 < I2. The output signal is 0 if the input signals are different and 1 if they are equal. At startup, output I1 = I2 is set before the first execution, regardless of the values of inputs I1 and I2.
8 - 36
Comparator Real
Summary
COMP-R (COMParator - Real) is used for limit value monitoring of real numbers with relation to several limits.
COMP-R
COMP-R (C1,C2) I I<H1 HHYS I>=H1 H1 I>=H2 H2 HC1 LHYS L1 L2 LC1 I>=HC1 I>L1 I<=L1 I<=L2 I<=LC2
1 10 11 12 10+C1 30 31 32 30+C2
20 21 22 20+C1 40 41 42 40+C2
COMP-R (C1, C2 Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description
Figure 1.
Permissible values 1...9 1...9
Number of limit values for high level Number of limit values for low level
Connections
Table 2.
No
1 10
Name
I HHYS
Type
IR IR
Description
Input. Input whose value is compared with limit values H1...HC1 and L1...LC2. High HYSteresis. Hysteresis common for all H-values. The Hysteresis is the difference between the I-value at which the H outputs are reset and the value at which they are set. High 1. Upper limit value 1. High 2. Upper limit value 2.
11 12 . . . 10 + C1 20 21 22
H1 H2
IR IR
HC1 I < H1 I H1 I H2
IR OB OB OB
High C1. Upper limit value C1. Input < H1. Output which is set if I is less than H1. Input H1. Output which is set if I is greater than or equal to H1. Input H2. Output which is set if I is greater than or equal to H2.
8 - 37
Table 2 continued
No . . . 20 + C1 30 Name Type Description
I HC1 LHYS
OB IR
31 32 . . . 30 + C2 40 41 42
L1 L2
IR IR
Input HC1. Output which is set if I is greater than or equal to HC1. Low HYSteresis. Hysteresis common for all L values. The Hysteresis is the difference between the I-values at which the L outputs are reset and the value at which they are set. Low 1. Lower limit value 1. Low 2. Lower limit value 2.
LC2 I > L1 I L1 I L2
IR OB OB OB
. . . 40 + C2
Low C2. Lower limit value C2. Input > L1. Output which is set if I is greater than L1. Input L1. Output which is set if I is less than or equal to L1. Input L2. Output which is set if I is less than or equal to L2.
I LC2
OB
Input LC2. Output which is set if I is less than or equal to LC2.
Function
Input signal I is compared with the limit values specified at inputs H1...HC1 and L1...LC2. For upper limits, the output for the different limits will be set when input I becomes equal to or greater than the limit value. For lower limits, the output is set when I becomes less than or equal to the limit value. Limits can be set optionally within the range -9.2 x 10-18 to 9.2 x 1018. The lowest allowable positive and negative values are 5.0 x 10-20 and -5.0 x 1020. The element sets 20 (I < H1) and 40 (I > L1) to 1 before the first execution, regardless of the value at input I.
Hysteresis
The input HHYS gives the hysteresis for all limits at high level, and LHYS for all limits at low level. The hysteresis is the difference between the input values at which the different outputs are set and the values at which they are reset.
8 - 38
At high level, the outputs will be reset when I becomes lower than the limit minus the hysteresis HHYS. At low level, the outputs will be reset when I becomes greater than the limit value plus the hysteresis LHYS.
Figure 3. Function Diagram.
8 - 39
Three State Controller

Summary
CON-PU1 (CONtroller-PUlsed 1) is a three state controller intended to control, by means of pulses (increase/decrease), a process via an integrating actuator such as a shifting motor of a solenoid valve. CON-PU1 can be combined with, for example, a PI regulator for process control. If only pulse generation is desired, a simplified function can be chosen with a call parameter.
CON-PU1
CON-PU1 (C1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 REVF I BLK PF ACTT TPMIN TGAP K DEADB TMBC MAXDEV TPAMIN TPAC PULSE CALCUL. DEV INC DEC 30 31 32
SIM SIMULATION BAL OF ACTUATOR BALREF POSITION DBPOS DBREF SUPERVISION ERR 33
CON-PU1 (C1) Table 1.

Parameter
C1
Figure 1.
Description
Selection of extended or ordinary function. The value 0 gives ordinary function.
Permissible values
0...1
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Name REFV I BLK PF ACTT TPMIN TGAP K Type IR IR IB II ITR ITR ITR IR Description REFerence Value. Input for setpoint. Input value. Input for measured value. BLocK pulse calculation. Pulse Frequency Factor. Minimum pulse cycle time = PF x TS. ACTuator Time. The delay time interval of the actuator. Time Pulse MINimum. Min pulse length for excitation of the motor. Time GAP. Compensation for play. Pulse length factor. Pulse = (KxdDEVxACTT)/100+TGAP+TPMIN.
8 - 40
Table 2 continued
No 9 10 Name DEADB TMBC Type IR ITR Description DEADBand. DEV DEADB if a pulse is to be given. Time Minimum Between Change. Minimum pause time after DEV having changed sign. MAXimum DEViation. Maximum deviation for pulse length calculation. This value does not affect output DEV. Time PAuse MINimum. Minimum pause time. Time PAuse Constant. Pause Time factor. Pulse time = TPAMIN + TPAC x Pulse duration. SIMulate actuator position. Input for activation of simulation of actuator position. BALance. Input for activation of tracking. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when tracking. DeadBand for POSition change. Deadband for supervision of position change of actuator. DeadBand REFerence for position change alarm. tn When DEVk DT >DBPOS a check is made to determine if Itn - Ito>DBREF and if not, the error signal ERR is set. Position DEViation. DEV=I - REFV. INCrease. Output for increase of actuator position. DECrease. Output for decrease of actuator position. ERRor. Actuator position has not followed the change commanded.
20
(1)
MAXDEV
IR
21 22
(1)
TPAMIN TPAC
ITR IR
(1)
23
(1)
SIM
IB
24 (1) 25 26
(1)
(1)
BAL BALREF DBPOS
IB IR IR
27
(1)
DBREF
IR
30 31 32 33
(1)
DEV INC DEC ERR
OR OB OB OB
Function
The three state controller CON-PU1 is intended to control, by means of pulses at the outputs INC and DEC (increase/decrease respectively), a process via for example a shifting motor or a solenoid valve. With the call parameter C1 can be selected ordinary (C1=0) or extended (C1=1) function. The following inputs should be in unit % (0-100): REFV, I, DEADB, MAXDEV, BALREF, DBPOS, DBREF.
8 - 41
Control Module
Summary
CONTRM (CONTRol Module) is used for structuring a PC program into separate execution units. Function modules, blocks and function elements can be included in a control module. CONTRM (C1, C2, C3) Table 1.
Parameter C1 C2 Description Cyclicity in ms. Place in the cycle time table and/or scheduling strategy.
CONTRM
CONTRM(C1,C2,C3) RUN ON MODP SINGLE R
1 2 3
5 6
Figure 1.
Permissible values Allowed values are between 2ms and 2000 ms in steps of 2 ms. 1...251:place in the cycle time table, cyclic activation. 252: activation at initialisation after power down. 253:activation at power down
C3
Currently not used.
Connections
Table 2.
No
1 2
Name
ON SINGLE
Type
IB IB
Description
Control input which is set (to 1) with normal execution. If input ON and R are 0, elements in the control module can be executed once by setting SINGLE. Reset. Input for clearing elements in the control module are executed. RUN indicates that elements in the control module are executed. MODify Permission. Is always true.
3 5 6
R RUN MODP
IB OB OB
Function
The control module header CONTRM is a supervisory execution controlling element for a control module. The call parameter C1 is used to specify how often the control module is to be executed. The call parameter C2 is used to specify the execution sequence of execution units with te same cycle time. When and how the control module is to be executed is determined with the control inputs ON, SINGLE and R.
8 - 42
Execution
The input ON is set for normal execution. The control module is then executed in accordance with the call parameters C1 and C2. If ON input is reset after execution of the control module, the calculated data remains until the next time the control module is executed. The ON input overrides the SINGLE input, i.e. if ON is set, SINGLE has no effect. The execution is performed in three steps: 1. reading variables from the I/O devices, common data area, and a from other modules 2. element execution 3. writing variables to the I/O devices, common data area, and to other modules.
SINGLE Execution Clearing
In the SINGLE input is set when the ON input is reset, the control module is executed once in accordance with normal execution. If input R is set, the control module is executed in the reset mode. This means that all outputs of the elements within the control module are given default values which in most cases are the 0-value of the data. Input R overrides the inputs ON and SINGLE.
RUN
Output RUN is set only if normal execution is in progress, i.e. if ON is set, or if the control module is being SINGLE executed. With SINGLE execution, the RUN output is set during one cycle only. Is always true. ON and R inputs on the program header override the inputs on the control module header. The input ON on PCPGM must be set to permit normal execution or reset execution of the elements in the control module.
MODP Effects from PCPGM
8 - 43
Code Converter
Summary
CONV (CONVerter) converts integer, real, time and time-real data from one representation to another.
CONV
CONV (C1,C2) I O ERR
5 6
Figure 1.
CONV (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Input data type Output data type Permissible values I, IL, R, T, TR I, IL, R, T, TR
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 5 6 Name I O ERR Type IC1 OC2 OB Description Input. Input for data to be converted. Output. Output for converted data. ERRor. Output which is set (to 1) if a limit is reached at output O.
Function
Data at input I with data type in accordance with the call parameter C1 is converted to data with data type according to the call parameter C2 at the output O. When conversion is to the data types I and IL (integer) or T (time), overflow can occur at the maximum or minimum limit values. The error signal output ERR is set when an overflow occurs. When converting from real numbers to integers, the number is rounded up when the decimal is 0.5 or greater, and down when the decimal is less than 0.5. When converting from T to R, I or IL the value given is the number of entire seconds from midnight. When converting from R, I or IL to T the input value is treated as the number of entire seconds from midnight.
Rounding Off
8 - 44
Code Converter
Summary
CONV-BI (CONVerter - Boolean to Integer) converts data from BC, BCD, 1-of-N, Gray code or 16/32 bit BC formed from Boolean variables into integers. The element has a memory function for storage of converted data.
CONV-BI
CONV-BI (C1,C2,C3) ERR S L R SIGN I1 I2 IC3 O 50
1 2 3 4 11 12 10+C3
CONV-BI (C1, C2, C3) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2
Figure 1.
Permissible values
Data type I, IL Type of input code 1...5 1 for BC 2 for BCD 3 for 1-of-N code 4 for Gray code 5 for 16/32 bit BC* C3 Number of inputs for data to be 1...31 converted. If C2=5 then C3 must be 31. * when C2=5 the output O cannot be interpreted as I/IL by the aid.
Number of Inputs Reguired with
Table 2.
Code BC BCD 1-of-N Gray 16/32 bit BC Number of Inputs Required with I IL 15 31 18 31 31 31 15 31 15+SIGN 31+SIGN
8 - 45
Connections
Table 3.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description
Set. Input for storage of a new value each time the element is executed. When this input is reset (to 0) the last calculated value will remain at the output. 2 L IB Load. Dynamic input for loading of data. 3 R IB Reset. Input for clearing of the output. This input overrides the S and L inputs. 4 SIGN IB Input set (to 1) with negative data values. If C2=5, SIGN is used as the most significant input to get a 16/32 bit conversion. 5 ERR OB ERRor. Output which is set when more than one input is set with conversion of 1-of-N code or if the integer value to be stored at the output cannot be represented by the data type. 11 I1 IB* Input 1. Input 1 for BC, BCD, 1-of-N, Gray code or 16/32 bit BC.. 12 I2 IB* Input 2. Input 2 for BC, BCD, 1-of-N, Gray code or 16/32 bit BC. 10+C3 IC3 IB* Input C3. Input C3 for BC,BCD, 1-OF-N, Gray code or 16/32 bit BC.. 50 O OC1 Output 1. Output for the converted data. * the data at each of these inputs is of Boolean type, but together they form a value of the type specified by parameter C1.
Function
The element can convert binary code (BC), binary coded decimal code (BCD), 1-of-N code or Gray code to integers of data type I (16 bit) or IL (32 bit). With BC the SIGN input can be used as a sign bit (C2=1) or as most significant bit (C2=5).
Examples of Input Values with Different Recordings
Table 4.
Input I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 Input Integer Value BC BC without Sign with Sign 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 BCD 1 2 4 8 10 20 40 80 1-of-N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 - 46
Table 4 continued
Input I9 I10 . . : I31 SIGN Input Integer Value BC BC without Sign with Sign 256 512 . . . 30 2 sign 256 212 . . . 30 2 31 2 BCD 100 200 1-of-N 9 10
Only one of the inputs may be set with 1-of-N code. All inputs have a fixed value with BC, BCD and 1-of-N codes but not with Gray code.
BC
I4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 I2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 I1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Gray Code
I4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 I2 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 I1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1-of-N-code
I15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 I14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 I13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 I10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 I9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 I8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I2 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Storage of Data
When input L is set, the code at inputs I1 to IC3 is immediately converted and stored. If input S is set, the input code is converted and the integer is stored each time the element is executed. When S is reset (to 0) after having been set, the data stored most recently remains. The input S overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect.
Clearing
The input R clears the output and prevents all further storage of data while R is set.
8 - 47
Supervision
When converting 1-of-N code, the setting of only one of the inputs 1 to IC3 is supervised. If two or more inputs are set, the value of the input signal with the lowest number is stored. The error signal output ERR is also set. If the integer value to be stored at the output exceeds the allowable range, the error signal output is set. In addition, the output is limited to the upper or lower limit value.
CONV-BI 11 12 I1 I2
When DEC 2 test
ERR 1
IC3 10 + C3
Conversion Test valid data I
4 1 2 3
SIGN S L R
1 1
50
8 - 48
Code Converter
Summary
CONV-BI (CONVerter -Integer to Boolean) converts data from integers into BC, BCD, 1-of-N, Gray code 16/32 bit BC formed from Boolean variables. The element has a memory function for storage of converted data.
CONV-IB
CONV-IB (C1,C2,C3) -1 -2 -3 -10 S >L R I ERR SIGN ZERO O1 O2 5 6 7 11 12 . . .
OC3
10+C3
CONV-BI (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter
C1 C2
Figure 1.
Description
Permissible values
Data type I, IL Type of input code 1...4 1 for BC 2 for BCD 3 for 1-of-N code 4 for 16 or 32 bit BC * C3 Number of outputs for converted data. 1..23 * when C2=4, the input 1 cannot be interpreted as I/IL by the aid MasterAid 2XX.
Number of Outputs with Different Codes
Table 2.
Code BC BCD 1-of-N 16/32 bit BC Number of Outputs Required with I IL 15 31 18 32 32 32 15+SIGN 31+SIGN
8 - 49
Connections
Table 3.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description Set. Input for storage of a new value each time the element is executed. When this input is reset (to 0) the last calculated value will remain at the outputs. Load. Dynamic input for loading of data. Reset. Input for clearing of the output. This input overrides the S and L inputs. ERRor. Output which is set when the integer value exceeds the value which can be represented at the outputs. Output which is set to 1 with negative data values. Output which is set to 1 when the input I is ZERO. Input. Input for the integer value to be converted. Output 1. Output 1 for the binary code.
2 3 5
L R ERR
IB IB OB
6 7 10
SIGN ZERO I
OB OB IC1 OB* OB*
11 O1 12 O2 . . . 10+C3 OC3
Output C3. Output C3 for the BC, BCD, 1-of-N code or 16/32 bit BC. * the data at each of these outputs is of Boolean type, but together they form a value of the type specified by parameter C2.
OB*
Function
The element can convert integers of the data types I (15 bits) or IL (31 bits) to binary code (BC), binary coded decimal code (BCD) or 1-of-N code. The data type I/IL can also be converted to 16/32 bit BC. The code conversion to be performed is specified by the call parameters C1 and C2. With positive data values the output SIGN is reset (to 0) and with negative values, set (to 1). For 16/32 bit BC SIGN is used as output 16/32. Table 4.
Output BC O1 O2 O3 O4 1 2 4 8 Output Integer Value BCD 1-of-N 1 2 4 8 1 2 4 4
Ex. of Output Values with Different Recordings
8 - 50
Table 4 continued
Output BC Output Integer Value BCD 1-of-N
O5 16 10 5 O6 32 20 6 07 64 40 7 O8 128 80 9 O9 256 100 9 O10 512 200 10 . . . SIGN* * SIGN is used as a sign for BC, BCD and 1-of-N. Only one of the outputs is set with 1-of-N-code.
Storage of Data
When input L is set, the integer at input I is ommediately converted. If input S is set, the input code is stored and the result is converted each time the element is executed. When S is reset (to 0) after having been set, the data stored most recently remains until the element is executed once more with one of the inputs S, L or R set. The input S overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect. The input R clears the output and prevents all further storage of data while R is set. When converting data from integers to 1-of-N code, the numbers are restricted to - 32 to + 32. If the integer value to be converted exceeds the allowable output range, the error signal output is set. In addition, the output is limited to the upper or lower limit value.
CONV-IB 01 10 I 1 S 2 L 3 R 1 1
R I C Conversion
Clearing Supervision
11 12
02
0C3 ZERO SIGN
10 + C3 7 6
Test valid data
ERR
8 - 51
Counter
Summary
COUNT (COUNTer) is a presettable counter for counting pulses, up or down. The counter also monitors the relation of the counter value to 0.
COUNT
COUNT(C1) L >0 U/D-N =0 C <0 R EN I O
1 2 3 4 5 21
10 11 12
22
COUNT(C1) Figure 1. Table 1.

Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 3 Name L U/D-N C Type IB IB IB Description Load. Loads the counter with the value at input I Up/Down-N. Input which determines if the counter is to count up (U/D-N=1) or down (U/D-N=0) Clock. When this input changes from 0 to 1 the counter counts up or down in accordance with the status of the input U/D-N. Reset. Input which clears the counter and prevents all further counting or loading. This input overrides all other inputs! ENable. Input which is set to 1 to permit counting or loading. Reset execution is, however, performed independently of EN. Output which is set when the value of the counter is greater than 0. Output which is set when the value of the counter is 0. Output which is set when the value of the counter is less than 0. Input. Input for new value when loading. Output. Output for counter value.
IB
EN
IB
10 11 12 21 22
>0 =0 <0 I O
OB OB OB IC1 OC1
8 - 52
Function
When input C is set, the counter value immediately increases or decreases. The value increases if U/D-N = 1 and decreases if U/D-N = 0. The duration of the counter period may not be less than twice the cycle time of the program. When the input L is set, the counter is loaded with the value at input I. If both input L and C are set simultaneously, the counter is first loaded, after which an up or down count is performed. The input EN must be set for the counter to count or load a new value.
The input R clears the counter and prevents all further counting or loading. R overrides EN. The status outputs specify the relation of the counter value to zero (>0, =0, <0). When the counter reaches its least or greatest value for the data type, all counting ceases.
8 - 53
8 - 54
Chapter 9 - PC ELEMENTS from D to F Data Logger

Summary
DATALOG
DATALOG DATALOG PC element is a single channel data (C1,C2,C3) logger used to record a stream of variable 1 CLEAR ACT RUN 2 EN samples into the buffer. One value is stored into the buffer every time the PC element is executed. 3 >TRIGG RDY POSTNR FULL 4 Logger operation can be controlled from both the application program via input terminals 1 to 4 or O I 21 LAST 22 ELEM the Drive Tool via a special Command (CMD) TIME word internal to the DATALOG element structure. Multiple DATALOG elements can be Figure 1. implemented under the same CONTRM. 10 11 12 13 31 32 33
DATALOG (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 Description Permissible values
Data type I, IL, R, B Storage unit size 2...250 samples */ Number of storage units in a 1...4 */ buffer */ the total capacity of the Data logger buffer is calculated as C2 x C3. Any combination of valid C2 and C3 is acceptable.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 3 4 Name CLEAR EN TRIGG POSTNR Type IB IB IB II Description Logger reset. Sampling ENable. Init for the logging termination sequence. Number of samples to be collected after trigger. Values
9-1
Table 2 continued
No 10 11 12 13 21 22 31 32 33 Name ACT RUN RDY FULL I ELEM O LAST TIME Type OB OB OB OB IC1 II OC1 OI OIL Description Logger not in RESET mode. Logger in RUN mode (sampling). Sampling teminated, data available in the buffer. Logger buffer FULL. Input data to log. Location number of the logged sample. Value of the sample selected by ELEM. Location number of the LAteST sample. TIME stamp for the TRIGG or, the last sample if logger stopped but not triggered or, the first sample if logger is running. Values
Function
DATALOG samples input data into its internal buffer. The logger operation can be controlled both by the application program or by the Drive Tool. The FB input terminals CLEAR, ENABLE and TRIGG are used by the application program for this purpose. The Drive Tool accesses the internal DATALOG element Status and Command (CMD) words. The Status word includes the same information as the DATALOG FB output terminals: ACT, RUN, RDY POST and FULL. The CMD word includes the CLEAR, ENABLE and STOP individual control bits. The resultant control signals are formed in a following way: signal CLEAR signal ENABLE signal TRIGG signal STOP = (input CLEAR ) or (CMD bit CLEAR) = (input ENABLE) or (CMD bit ENABLE) = input TRIGG = CMD bit STOP
9-2
There are 4 possible states that the DATALOG operation can enter: RESET, RUN, RDY and POST.
RESET
RUN=1 CLEAR=1 CLEAR=1, or STOP= 1->0 CLEAR=1 EN=0, or STOP=0->1
RUN
RDY
POST_CNT=0
TRIGG=0->1
POST
Figure 2. State Diagram of DATALOG element.
RESET State
(the highest priority) Entered in the system "Power up" mode and also when: CLEAR signal becomes 1, or STOP changes from 1 to 0. In this state: sampling is stopped the buffer is cleared and LAST points to the first (sample) position in the buffer the time mark is cleared ACT, RUN, RDY and FULL are all reset (to 0).
This RESET state is terminated after one cycle if the EN = 1
RUN State
Entered from the RESET state when EN signal becomes 1. The Time of the first recorded data sample is recorded for the TIME output. In this state: input data are collected, ACT is set to 1, RUN is set to 1, RDY is set to 0, FULL reflects the current buffer status.
9-3
If the EN signal changes from 1 to 0 or the STOP signal changes from 1 to 0 then the TIME stamp is updated with the current time and LAST is updated with the current sample location (number) after which the RDY state is entered.
POST State
The state POST is entered when the signal TRIGG becomes active. It executes the following logging termination sequence: 1. update the TIME stamp with the current time 2. collect "POSTNR" additional input data samples 3. freeze the content of the logger buffer and then 4. enter the RDY state.
RDY State
Entered from the RUN state when EN becomes 0 or the STOP changes from 1 to 0 or, from the POST state after the sampling termination procedure has been completed. In this state: Sampled data are frozen in the buffer. ACT is set to 1, RUN is set to 0, RDY is set to 1, FULL reflects current buffer status.
FULL is set when the buffer becomes full. Recording continues by overwriting the oldest sampled value. Recording can be stopped when the buffer is full by a feedback connection from the output FULL to input ENABLE. Data samples in the buffer are numbered 1. (C2 x C3). ELEM indicates the number of the sample to be moved to the DATALOG OUT terminal. If is out of range then OUT is zero. TIME Output The TIME is expressed as a 32 bit integer. It is read from the system clock and represents the number of the 100us ticks since midnight.
9-4
Management of FBA Communications

Summary
DCBAID PC element makes possible to use FBA (=FieldBusAdapter) modules connected to NCB board. It is intended for general management of the link between NCB and FBA, and also for debugging of communications start up. DCBAID is necessary to exist once in every application program, which contains DCBRX elements (or other FBA communication elements). DCBAID should not be inserted more than once in any application program.
-1 -2 -3 -4
DCBAID
DCBAID CHAN PARID ERR FAIL 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 40 99 VCIADDR FBATYPE VCIOFFS PROTOCS HWVERS SWVERS DATE DCBSTAT DCBERR DCBSPEC NCBSTAT NCBERR NCBSPEC FBASTAT FBAERR FBASPEC PARVAL VCIMAX VCIUSED VCIVAL ERRC
Call Connections
DCBAID Figure 1. Table 1.

No Name Type Description
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30
CHAN PARID VCIADDR VCIOFFS ERR FAIL FBATYPE PROTOCS HWVERS SWVERS DATE DCBSTAT DCBERR DCBSPEC NCBSTAT NCBERR NCBSPEC FBASTAT FBAERR FBASPEC PARVAL
II II IIL II OB OI OA20 OA20 OA20 OA20 OA20 OI OI OI OI OI OI OI OI OI OI
12 CHANnel, whose VCI is to be shown Parameter, whose actual value is to be shown. Which VCI is to be shown. Which location in the VCI to be shown. Is the DCBAID usable or not. Code (= reason) why parameterization FAILed. FBA board TYPE text. Available PROTOColS in FBA. HardWare VERSion of FBA. SoftWare VERSion of FBA. Generation DATE of FBA software. DCB STATe. DCB ERRor code. DCB SPECial info. NCB STATe. NCB ERRor code. NCB SPECial info. FBA STATe. FBA ERRor code. FBA SPECial info. VALue of inquired PARameter.
9-5
Table 1 continued
No 31 32 40 99 Name VCIMAX VCIUSED VCIVAL ERRC Type OI OI OI OI Description MAX amount of VCIs (of special size). Number of created VCIs. VALue of inquired location in VCI header. ERRor Code.
Function
The PC element has dual role: 1. Towards other FBA related software it is taking care of DCB state machine status of this machine is stored in DualPortMemory between AC80 CPU and NCB boards, and from there it is distributed readable by NCB and FBA software. 2. Towards the human debugger of the application, DCBAID shall help testing of FBA communication. Especially those things, which are common to whole FBA module (or whole channel of FBA module) can be checked from output pins of DCBAID.
Input Pins
1.
CHAN specifies, from which channel the output pins VCIMAX and VCIUSED shall be fetched. Normally this pin should have value =1, but with some (future) FBAs there might exist 2 channels, and then possible values are 1 and 2. PARID specifies which FBA parameter value (= actual value) should be shown in PARVAL output. Some values have special meaning: 0 = do not show any value, 1 = show board type (=enumerate), which should match with the given board type text in DCB01, 2 = show actually used protocol (= same as given in DCB01, presuming, that FBA accepted it), 332 other FBA parameters. (Note: that you can use PARID and PARVAL pins to look at both the default values of the FBA parameters and the parameter values given by DCB01 DB element.) VCIADDR specifies which VCI shall be the source for VCIVAL output: 0 = VCIVAL not updated, 1255 = identification number of the VCI (available from output pins VCI_IN and VCI_OUT of DCBRX), >256 = pointer to the actual VCI . VCIOFFS = specifies how far from the beginning of the VCI the value toVCIVAL pin shall be picked.
2.
3.
4.
Output Pins
10. 11. 12.
ERR indicates whether DCBAID is usable (= 0) or not (= 1). FAIL indicates some programming errors (e.g. FB_NO_NCB_AVAIL or DCB01_PAR_ERR). FBATYPE shows the board type identification text.
9-6
Output Pins continued 13. PROTOCS shows all available protocols in FBA. They are shown as a string, where each character reflects one available protocol, so that protocols 19 are shown with respective digit, and protocols 1015 are shown with characters AF. 14 HWVERS shows FBA hardware identification text. 15. SWVERS shows FBA software identification text. 16. DATE shows FBA software generation date as text. Note: that all pins 1216 are initialized to show text UNKNOWN. If you see such text, you know that no text has arrived from the FBA since initialization (or re-initialization). 17. 18. 19. DCBSTAT = the internal status of DCB communications inside CPU of AC80. This variable is maintained by the DCBAID itself, and read by the NCB and FBA software. DCBERR = error code shown by DCBAID to NCB and FBA software. DCBSPEC = special info from DCBAID to NCB and FBA software. (if DCBERR = 0, then used as free running counter to indicate that DCBAID (and contained state machine) is still alive.) NCBSTAT = the internal status of DCB communications inside NCB board of AC80. This variable is maintained by the NCB firmware, and read by the respective state machines of CPU and FBA. NCBERR = FBA communications error code shown by NCB to CPU and FBA software. NCBSPEC = FBA communications special info from NCB to CPU and FBA software (if NCBERR = 0, then used as free running counter to indicate that NCBSTAT state machine is still alive.) FBASTAT = the internal status of DCB communications inside FieldBusAdapter. This variable is cyclically sent to the NCB (using DDCS protocol) and stored there in DualPortMemory to be readable by DCBAID. FBAERR = error code sent by FBA to NCB and CPU software (see FBA protocol specific manual.) FBASPEC = special info from FBA to NCB and CPU software (see FBA protocol specific manual.) PARVAL shows the actually used parameter value, whose identity is specified by PARID pin. Note: that all actual parameter values have come from FBA, and they are checked there against allowed range limit values. VCIMAX shows how many VCIs are possible on channel CHAN with given size of DCB01. VCIUSED shows how many VCIs actually are created on channel CHAN.
20.
21. 22.
23.
24. 25. 30.
31. 32.
9-7
Output Pins continued 40. VCIVAL shows the requested value from a VCI header. The VCI is specified through VCIADDR pin, where you can tell either VCI identifier number (=1255) or VCI starting address. Or if VCIADDR = 0, DCBAID does not show anything on VCIVAL pin. Offset from start of VCI is given via pin VCIOFFS. (To be really used, you should know the internal structure of VCI-header. However normal users do not need to look into VCI-headers this way) 99. ERRC = error code, showing what is wrong in using DCBAID. Note: that actual FBA communication errors are shown in pins DCBERR, NCBERR and FBAERR, and not in this pin.
Error Codes
Table 2.
Error # 1000 1100 1101 Description
FB_NO_DCB01
/*No DCB01 element in the application */
FB_DCBAID_FOUND_ALREADY /*DCBAID can exist only once */ ILLEGAL_VCI_NUM
/* illegal value in DCBAID input pin */
State Machines
DCBSTAT
Following states may occur in DCBSTAT 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DCB_NOT_DEFINED (= no DCB01 DB-element in the application.) DCB_DATA_BASE_DEFINED (= DCB01 element found and configured.) DCB_DEFIN_WRITTEN_TO_DPM, (=DCBAID found in the application.) DCB_VCIS_RESERVED (= DCBAID run in normal cyclic mode, and found, that all created VCIs are fully configured.) DCB_RUNNING (= DCBAID found that NCB and FBA software are ready for normal cyclic communications.) DCB_BLOCKED (After users Block command from FCB this code is set into DCBSTAT presuming, that old state there was DCB_RUNNING. This is exceptionally done by NCB software, because DCBAID cannot do anything while blocked.) DCB_RECONFIG (Set by system software while detecting DCB01 in the newly downloaded application, presuming that old state was nonzero, i.e. the old application contained DCB01, too. AC80_SYSTEM_NOT_OPERATIVE DCB_UNDEFINED NCB_READY_FOR_DCB_DEFINITIONS DCB_DEFIN_WRITTEN_TO_AMCT FBA_TYPE_APPROVED
6.
NCBSTAT
Following states may occur in NCBSTAT 0. 1. 2. 3. 4.
9-8
NCBSTAT continued 5. PARAM_WAIT_FROM_FBA 6. DCB_PARAM_WRITTEN_TO_DPM 7. ( not used) 8. DCB_HEADERS_READY_FOR_FBA 9. NCB_RUNNING_DCB 10. NCB_BLOCKED_DCB 11. NCB_RECONFIGURATION 12. FBA_FAILURE 99. NCB_ERROR
FBASTAT
Following states may occur in FBASTAT 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 99. DDCS_LINKOFF DDCS_DATASETS_RUN_TO_NCB CID1_CONNECT ID_DATA_SENT PARAMETER_DEFIN_RECEIVED PARAMETER_LIMIT_CHECKED PARAMETER_BLOCK_SENT (to NCB) (not used) VCB_HEADERS_N_RECEIVED VCB_HEADERS_CHECKED (not used) FIELD_BUS_COMM_STARTED FBA_COMMUNICATION_RUN FBA_BLOCKED_DCB FBA_RECONFIGURATION DCB_COMMUNICAT_FAIL
9-9
Communications with FieldBusAdapter

Summary
DCBRX PC element creates one or two VCIs (= VirtualConnectorInterfaces) and using it/them as data buffers acts as interface between FBA (= FieldBusAdapter) module and AC80 application program. DCBRX may exist as several instances in same application program.
F=1-F1 F=0-F2 F=0-F3 F=0-F4 F=0-F5 -1 -2 -3 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15
DCBRX
DCBRX CHAN SPECIAL IDENT CONFIG EN >INIT >CLEAR IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 ERRC 50 51 52 53 54 55 99 RDY ERR LASTPIN VCI_IN VCI_OUT 4 5 6 7 8 9
>STATION STATUS
DCBRX (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Number of input pins Number of output pins
Figure 1.
Permissible values 032 032
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9+C1 50 49+C2 99 Name CHAN SPECIAL STATION IDENT CONFIG EN INIT CLEAR RDY ERR STATUS LASTPIN VCI_IN VCI_OUT IN1 IN*C1 OUT1 OUT*C2 ERRC Type II II II IL II IB IB IB OB OB OI OI OIL OIL II II OI OI OI Description 12 CHANnel, where VCI is to be created. SPECIAL info, if needed. Remote STATION ID IDENTifier of the data block. Communication mode through the VCI. ENable DCBRX to communicate. Abort and re-INITialize communication. CLEAR error code in ERRC. New transfer to/from the FBA just detected. Communication via these VCIs not usable. Combination of STATUS bits. How many output pins were updated. Identifier of INput VCI. Identifier of OUTput VCI. First transmit data pIN. Last transmit data pin. First receive data pin. Last receive data pin. ERRor Code
9 - 10
Function
During initialization phase DCBRX shall specify an input VCI, an output VCI or both (= a VCI pair) depending on values of C1 and C2. If C1 or C2 = 0, respective VCI is not generated. It is forbidden, that both C1 and C2 are = 0. Additionally C1 and C2 values specify how long VCIs are needed for the DCBRX. If DCB01 specified shorter buffers, an error code is set and no VCIs created. Created VCIs identifiers are available from pins VCI_IN and VCI_OUT, and can be from there connected e.g. to DCBAID pin VCIADDR. Each VCI (or VCI pair) will have additionally two attributes: IDENT and STATION, which specify the data source or the destination in the remote station. During normal runtime DCBRX will control the communication status of the dedicated VCIs (through pin EN). And if EN = 1, it will also copy values from pins I1I*C1 to output_VCI and from input_VCI to pins OUT1OUT*C2. There are several possible variations, how the communications (and copying of data pins to/from VCIs) can be done. The actual selection of variation is given with pin CONFIG.
Function Parameters
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
CHAN specifies, from which channel data area the VCI shall be taken. (If the FBA supports one channel only, CHAN must be = 1.) SPECIAL can be used to specify such things, which do not have dedicated input pins. STATION specifies the station address of the communication partner. IDENT specifies the identifier for the data block(s) for (or in) the remote station. CONFIG is a word, which consist of independent configuration bits. Their meanings are
1= 2= 4= Next transmission forbidden before previous acknowledged. Transmit only when/if requested by the remote station. Output VCI is updated by DCBRX during every execution, although transmitted to remote station only when/if requested by the remote station. (auto-answer mode.) Copy all received data from the VCI to DCBRX output pins, i.e. older data is sent first to FBA, if the VCI contains both older and newer data. (If this bit is not set, DCBRX overwrites always the older data in the VCI with newer data regardless whether FBA got the older data or not. The exception case is while FBA is just reading the older data. In such case DCBRX cannot write new data into VCI at all, but gives error code.) This DCBRX is intended to ask data from the remote station. (OUT_VCI is used for sending questions and IN_VCI for receiving answers.)
8=
32=
9 - 11
Function Parameters continued

64= 128= 256= The created VCI shall receive local error information from the FBA (the VCI is an Error-VCI"). The created VCI shall receive local diagnostic information from the FBA (the VCI is an Diagnostics-VCI). No timeout supervision for this DCBRX. If this bit is = 0, the timeout supervision is done against timeout limit given in DCB01 parameter #33 (= timeout in milliseconds). Or if parameter #33 is not specified, default timeout limit = 1000 ms. FBA is not capable to process several VCIs alternately using same DDCS datasets. Therefore we allow only one DCBRX (= this one) in AC80 application, and specify the used dataset numbers with mask words in SPECIAL (= input mask) and STATION (= output mask) pins according following interpretation: 1 dataset#1 in SPECIAL dataset#2 in STATION 2 dataset#3 in SPECIAL dataset#4 in STATION 4 dataset#5 in SPECIAL dataset#6 in STATION 8 dataset#7 in SPECIAL dataset#8 in STATION 16 dataset#10 in SPECIAL dataset#10 in SPECIAL 32 dataset#12 in SPECIAL dataset#13 in SPECIAL 64 dataset#14 in SPECIAL dataset#15 in SPECIAL 128 dataset#16 in SPECIAL dataset#17 in SPECIAL 256 dataset#18 in SPECIAL dataset#19 in SPECIAL 512 dataset#20 in SPECIAL dataset#21 in SPECIAL 1024 dataset#22 in SPECIAL dataset#23 in SPECIAL 2048 dataset#24 in SPECIAL dataset#25 in SPECIAL 4096 dataset#26 in SPECIAL dataset#27 in SPECIAL 8192 dataset#28 in SPECIAL dataset#29 in SPECIAL 16384 dataset#30 in SPECIAL dataset#31 in SPECIAL -32768 dataset#32 in SPECIAL dataset#33 in SPECIAL
512=
Input Pins
1. 2.
3. 10.
EN enables use of the VCI(s) for communication (or disables while EN = 0). INIT positive edge will abort from any pending dialog, and restart the usage of the VCIs of this DCBRX. (This is an abnormal thing, and should not be done except in some recovery procedure.) CLEAR positive edge will clear the error code in ERRC. Otherwise the last nonzero value will sustain there forever. IN1IN*C1 will carry data for the FBA to transmit it to the remote station. It is not possible limit sending into some part of the pins. They are sent all if any (or at least all copied into the output_VCI. It is also impossible to use other data types than Integer. (IL type may be converted to 2 Integers with ILI PC-element before connecting to DCBRX.
9 - 12
Output Pins
4.
5.
6.
RDY indicates whether DCBRX just found new data in the input_VCI or if just detected that previous data was picked from the output_VCI. ERR indicates whether this DCBRX is operative and communicated with FBA in the near history (= within timeout limit). STATUS is a word, which consist of several independent bits:
1= 2= 4= 8= 16= 32= 64= 128= 256= ACT (= DCBRX is active). INITOK (=initialization succeeded). CLEAR (= INIT pin caused reinitialization). STARTING (= have not yet detected FBA to be in normal cyclic mode). RDY (= have detected FBA to be in normal cyclic mode). BUSY (= waiting for response or acknowledgement from remote station). IN_DONE (= just copied new data from input_VCI to OUTx pins). OUT_DONE (= just found, that old data from output_VCI sent to FBA). SHORT (= new data received from FBA was shorter than configured by C2. Use LASTPIN to see how many data pins contain new data). NAK (= received bad acknowledgement from remote station). REQ (= remote station is asking information from this DCBRX, or was asking, if this DCBRX is in auto-answer mode). RECONFIG. ERR (= configuration error. This DCBRX is unusable.)
512= 1024= 16384= -32768=
7.
8. 9. 50.
99.
LASTPIN shows how many OUTx pins contain new data. This pin is irrelevant (and not updated) if the protocol always updates all OUTx pins. VCI_IN shows identifier of allocated input_VCI. VCI_OUT shows identifier of allocated output_VCI. OUT1OUT*C2 will carry data from the FBA (= received from the remote station). It is possible that with some protocols, new values are received into limited (first) part of the pins only. Then the number of updated pins can be read from LASTPIN pin. It is impossible to use other data types than Integer. (IL type may be converted from 2 Integers with IIL PC element connected to DCBRX out pins. ERRC = error code, showing what is wrong in using DCBRX. Note, that link specific failures are shown in DCBAID output pins. DCBRX shall show only (or typically) VCI specific error conditions. Note also, that ERRC of DCBRX will register the last occurred error. Well done communication will not clear old error code. For that purpose you need to cause rising signal edge at CLEAR pin.
9 - 13
Error Codes
Table 3.
Error # 2 3 4 5 Description
CONTAINS_NO_DATA /*nobody ever written into the buffer*/ CONTAINS_OLD_DATA /* no sense to read it again */ CONTAIN_STILL_NEW_DATA /* and overwriting is forbidden */ BOTH_PAGES_RESERVED /* cannot overwrite, because the older
1000 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 2000 2001 3000 3001 3002 3003 5002 5003 5004 5005
page is currently reserved for reading (and we never overwrite the newer page) */ FB_NO_DCB01 /* No DCB01 element in the application */ TOO_SHORT_VCIS /* PC-element needs longer VCI(s) than configured by DCB01 */ NO_DATA_DEFINED_FOR_VCIS /* Total configured length of VCIs = 0 */ ONLY_ONE_BLOCK_ALLOWED /* There are several DCBRX instances, which specify single-VCI-mode */ NO_ACK_BUFFER /* CONFIG-pin specified acknowledgement mode, but C2 did not specify a buffer for acknowledgements. */ NO_INQUIRY_BUFFER /* CONFIG-pin specified inquiry mode, but C1 did not specify a buffer for sending inquiries */ FB_NO_MORE_BUFFERS /* all available VCI space already allocated */ FB_TOO_BIG_CHAN_NUMBER /* no VCIs for such channel# are possible */ IDENT_ALREADY_USED /* each DCBRX must have unique identification info */ FB_NO_NCB_AVAIL /* No functional NCB board found */ FB_DCB_START_TIMEOUT /* Waited too long time for communications to start up */ VCI_IN_TIMEOUT /* Too long time without data update from FBA */ VCI_OUT_TIMEOUT /* Too long time without data request from FBA */ ACK_TIMEOUT /* Too long time waiting ACK message from remote station FBA */ VCI_NEVER_IN /* Too long waiting for first data update from FBA */ FORBIDDEN_DIRECTION /* PC element tried to write into input buffer or read from output buffer */ RESERVED /* PC element tried to open already opened VCI */ NOT_OPENED /* PC element tried to close already closed VCI */ VCI_MISSIN /* PC element tried to open or close a missing VCI */
9 - 14
Demultiplexer with Memory and Integer Address DEMUX-MI

Summary
DEMUltipleXer with Memory and Integer address is used as a demultiplexer with memory function. DEMUX-MI has an optional number of outputs can be specified. The data type can be integers, real numbers, boolean variables or time. DEMUX-MI (C1,C2) Figure 1. Table 1.
Parameter C1 C2 Description Datatype Number of outputs Permissible values B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...19
DEMUX-MI (C1,C2) S AERR L R A I OA1 . . . OA*C2 51 . . . 50+C2
1 2 3 11 31
10
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description Set. Input for loading of new values each time the element is executed. When the input S is reset (to 0), the outputs will retain their most recently loaded values.. Load. Dynamic input for loading of data from the input I to the output addressed by input A Reset. Input for resetting the outputs. This input overrides inputs S and >L. Address ERRor. Set (to 1) when input A is greater than call parameter C2 or a negative value. Address. Selection of which output, the value loaded at I should be stored. If the value is 0, the value 0 is stored at all outputs. Input. Data input Output Address 1. The first output from the demultiplexer. Output Address C2. The last output from the demultiplexer.
2 3 5
>L R AERR
IB IB OB
11
II
31 50 . . . 50+C2-1
I OA1
IC1 OC1
OAC2
OC1
9 - 15
Function Addressing
Loading
The input address A (1..C2) specifies at which output (OA1...OAC2) the data value at input I is to be stored. If A is 0 then the value 0 is store at all outputs. If the value of L is 1 when the PC element DEMUX-MI is executed and the value of L was 0 during the previous execution, then the value at input I is loaded. If the input S is set, new data from the input I is loaded each time the PC element is executed. When S is reset (to 0 from 1), the data most recently loaded remains until one of the inputs S, L, or R are set. The input S overrides the input L. When S is set L has no meaning.
When the input R is set (to 1) the data outputs (OA1 to OAC2) are reset (to 0) and data is not loaded at the input I. The value of the input address A is checked each execution of the PC element. If it is greater than the number of outputs specified by the call parameter C2 or it is a negative number, then the AERR output is set (to 1). The data value 0 is stored at all outputs.
9 - 16
Derivator
Summary
DER (DERivator) is used to give derivation effect. The derivation effect can be limited with the filter function, which serves as a low pass filter. The output signal can be limited with limit values specified at special inputs. The balancing function permits the output signal to track an external reference and permits a bumpless return to the normal function. All transfers from static states are bumpless. DER Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Name I K TD TF RDER BAL BALR EF OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR Type IR IR ITR ITR IB IB IR IR IR OR OB OB OB Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DER I K TD TF RDER BAL BALREF OHL OLL
DER
O O = HL O = LL ERR 10 11 12 13
Figure 1.
Call Connections
Input. Input for actual value. Input for setting gain. Time Derivation. Input for time constant for derivation. Time Filter. Input for filter time constant. Rset DERivator. Input for clearing derivator. BALance. Input for activation of tracking. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when tracking. Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value. Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value. Output. Output signal. Output=High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches to the upper limit value. Output=Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches the lower limit value. ERRor. Output which is set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
9 - 17
Function
The step response in the TD time plane for a derivator K TF is: O(t) = K (TD/TF)e -VTF x I(t) where I(t) specifies the magnitude of the step. t TF The transfer function for a DER function is: G(s) = Figure 2. Step Response. K(s x TD)/(1 + s x TF) This has been implemented in the DER element as a recursive algorithm. The design of the algorithm is such that normal functioning is maintained even during limiting. This ensures a controlled return to a dynamic state. Certain constants are precalculated to make TD K the execution time of TF the element as short as possible. The results are stored internally in the element. These 1 constants are TF recalculated if TD, TF or K are changed by more than 1/128 of their previous value, or if the sampling time TS is changed. When recalculating a test is performed to check whether TD and TF 2 x TS. If not, TD and/or TF are equal to 2 G x TS. Both the output O(t) and the internal state of the output are cleared when RDER goes to 1.
+ 90 + 45 Ig 1
IgIGI
Gain, Derivation-, Filter- and Sampling Time
Ig
Clearing of the Derivator
Tracking
If BAL is set to 1, the TF derivator immediately goes Figure 3. Bode Diagram. into tracking and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value. Return to dynamic state is bumpless.
9 - 18
Limitation Function
The limitation function limits the output signal to the values at the inputs OHL for upper limit and OHL OLL for the lower limit. If the actual value exceeds t the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit, the Figure 4. Function in a Limiting State. output O = LL is set to 1. The element checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the values they had in the sample before the error occurred. After an error, the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, such as in the case of tracking above.
7 OHL 8 O LL
ACT
5 BA L 6 B A LR E F 1 2 3 4 I K TD TF 5 RDER 1 DER
O
I1 I1 > I2 I2 I1 I1 < I2 I2
10
ACT
0 = H L 11 O = LI 12 E R R 13
I1 I1 < I2 I2
RESET PRES ET
ACT
9 - 19
Divider
Summary
DIV is used for division of two integers or real numbers. When dividing integers, the quotient is obtained with the remainder at a separate input. DIV (C1) Table 1.
Parameter C1 Description Data type Permissible values I, IL, R
1 2
DIV
DIV
REM 20 21
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
1 2 20 21
REM
IC1 IC1 OC1 OC1
Input for dividend. Input for divisor. Output for quotient. REMainder. Output for remainder. Applies only with division of integers.
Function
The value at input 1 is divided by the value at input 2. The quotient is stored at output 20. When dividing integers, the remainder is stored at the output REM. If the maximum positive or negative values are exceeded, the output is limited to the highest or lowest allowed value for the data type.
Overflow
9 - 20
Divider
Summary
DIVider with Multiplier Real numbers is used for the division of two products of real numbers. DIV-MR (C1,C2) Table 1.
Parameter C1 C2 Description Number of inputs in the first multiplication element. Number of inputs in the second multiplication element.
1
DIV-MR
DIV-MR
...
C1 21
. .
40
...
20+C2
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 21 22 . . . 20+C2 40 Name Type IR IR IR IR IR IR OB Description Factor for the dividend. Factor for the dividend. Factor for the dividend. Factor for the divisor. Factor for the divisor. Factor for the divisor. Output for quotient.
Function
The product of the real numbers at the inputs 1...3C1 is divided by the product of the real values at the inputs 21...20+C2. The quotient is stored at the output 40. If the maximum positive or negative real numbers is exceeded, the output is limited to the greatest or lowest representable value respectively.
Owerflow
9 - 21
Error Detection
Summary
The ERROR PC element is used to write Error events into the Event Logger. The Error events are created by the ERROR element that works together with the PC element that generates the ERRC (Error Code) output signal. ERROR Table 1.
No F1 1 10 Name LOGNR I ERR Type II II OB Description The NumbeR of the Event LOGger to be used. Dynamic Input for the error code. ERRor
ERROR
ERROR FI 1 LOGNR I ERR 10
Figure 1.
Call Connections
Values 1...8
Function
All PC elements with an ERRC output terminal generate error codes in the case of a malfunction. The structure of an error code is 100* group + number. The group indicates the origin of the fault. The 2digit number is a group specific code. In order to record those errors into the Event logger the ERRC output of the given PC element has to be connected to the input I of an ERROR element. When the ERROR element detects ERRC value change to a nonzero value then it reads the current date and time and writes this information along with the descriptive text string (see below) into the event logger as a new event. The group code is automatically converted to a descriptive text in English by the ERROR element. If no text is defined for the group (inside the ERROR element) then the text ERROR nnnnn is used. The ERRC terminal of a element can generate a sequence of error codes. Each error code creates a new event but the reappearrance of an error code in the same sequence is ignored (error code 0 at ERRC starts a new sequence of ERROR events).
9 - 22
Event information in an event logger can be read by a Drive Tool and / or Panel equipments. The simple panel display uses the following presentation form. DRIVE LINK 3 ERR 32 1998 01 08 11:25:31 ,0571 Output pin ERR is set to 1 if one of the following error conditions exists: function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8 logger (LOGNR) does not exist logger (LOGNR) is full and the overwrite permission bit of the CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 0
Related Documents
Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, EVENT, EVT and EVBUG.
9 - 23
Event Logger Debug

Summary
EVBUG element can be used to diagnose event loggers. The input terminals are used to select an event and to acknowledge the selected event. The output terminals are used to monitor the state of the event logger and to read the content of the selected event. EVBUG Table 1.
No F1 1 2 10 11 12 21 22 31 32 33 34 99 Name LOGNR ENABLE CNTRL ERR FIRST LAST RECNR ACK TEXT TIME CODE ESTAT ERRC Type II IB II OB OI OI II IB OA20 OT OI OI OI Description The NumbeR of the Event LOGger to be used. ENABLE the element. Operation CoNTRoL ERRor Record number of the oldest event. Record number of the newest event. RECord NumbeR ACKnowledge the selected event. TEXT of the selected event. TIME of the selected event. CODE of the selected event. Status of the selected event. ERRor Code
EVBUG
EVBUG F1 1 2 21 22 LOGNR ENABLE CNTRL RECNR > ACK ERR FIRST LAST TEXT TIME CODE ESTAT ERRC 10 11 12 31 32 33 34 99
Call Connections
Figure 1.
Values 1...8 1 = true See table 2 1 = true 1...RECMAX 1...RECMAX 1...RECMAX 0=>1 = true
See table 3. See table 4.
Table 2.
Bit # Description
Bits of the ESTAT Terminal
Table 3.
Bit # 0 1 Description Event is acknowledged Event is ON
9 - 24
Event Logger Operation
Event logger writes events into consecutive record locations of the logger in a cyclic manner. It means that after filling the last location (its number = the value of the RECMAX terminal of the corresponding EVTLOG element) in the logger it moves back to the first location. A new event can be written in only if the next record location is empty or acknowledged or if the OWR (= overwrite permission ) bit of the CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 1. An event record contains event's type, code, date, time and a descriptive text (max 20 characters).
Use of Event Logger Debug
The FIRST and LAST output terminals mark the logger area that contains unacknowledged events. Once a new event has been written in, its record number will be the new value of the LAST terminal. If a record in the logger (between FIRST and LAST) is acknowledged then all older events up to the FIRST event are acknowledged, too. The new value of the FIRST terminal will be the oldest unacknowledged record number. If all events in the logger are acknowledged then value of the terminals FIRST and LAST = record number of the last (acknowledged) event. If the logger is empty then the value of these terminals = RECMAX. The TIME is read from a system clock and represents the number of the 100 us ticks since midnight. The DATE represents the number of days since the new year 1980.
Error Handling Error Codes (ERRC)
In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output indicates the applicable error code (see table 4). Error code = 10000+logger_number (1...8)*100+error_numbers Table 4.
Error # 0 1 2 4 5 14 Description Function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8. This logger does not exist. Invalid record number (RECNR) This record is empty. This logger does not exist. Two simultaneous attempts to acknowledge an event.
Related Documents
Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, ERROR, EVENT and EVT.
9 - 25
EVENT Detection
Summary
The EVENT element is used to detect boolean events and to write the event name and event time into the selected event logger. EVENT Table 1.
No F1 1 2 10 Name LOGNR I TEXT ERR Type II IB IA20 OB Description The NumbeR of the Event LOGger to be used. Control Input for event recording. Event description TEXT. ERRor
FI 1 2
EVENT
EVENT LOGNR I TEXT ERR 10
Call Connections
Figure 1.
Values 1...8
Function
The 01 input (I) signal transition signifies event occurrence. The 10 input (I) signal transition signifies event disappearance. Event occurrence causes the EVENT element to read the current date and time and write this information along with the descriptive text string (from the TEXT input) into the event logger as a new event. The status of this event is set to "ON". Event disappearance causes the EVENT element to set the event status to "OFF" in the event created during the previous event occurence. Event information in an event logger can be read by a Drive Tool and /or Panel equipments. The simple panel display may use e.g. the following presentation form: CONTACTOR FAILURE 1998 01 08 11:25:31,0571
9 - 26
Output pin ERR is set to 1 if one of the following error conditions exists: function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8 logger (LOGNR) does not exist logger (LOGNR) is full and the overwrite permission bit of the CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 0.
Related Documents
Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, ERROR, EVT and EVBUG.
9 - 27
Change Event Priority

Summary
EVPRTY PC element provides means for changing the priority of an event driven CONTRM. (By default such tasks have higher priority than any cyclic task.) EVPRTY (C1) Table 1.
Parameter C1 Description Event identification.
F=50-F1 1
EVPRTY
EVPRTY (2) REFCYCLE OLDPRI NEWPRI EVPRI ERRC 2 3 10
Figure 1.
Permissible values 1 = digital input from NCB board, 2 = CDP from AF100
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 1 2 3 10 Name REFCYCLE EVPRI OLDPRI NEWPRI ERRC Type II II OI OI OI Description REFerence CYCLE time. Original event priority. Original event priority. NEW PRIority (after the change) ERRor Code. Values (0...10000 ms)
Function
EVPRTY can be used for lowering the task priority down to lower level than the cyclic tasks of given reference cycle time REFCYCLE. It is not necessary to have any CONTRMs exactly with that cycle time. All CONTRMs with shorter cycle time will have higher priority and all with longer cycle time will have lower priority. The new priority after the change can be read from pin NEWPRI and original event priority from pin OLDPRI. The original high priority can be also restored with an other instance EVPRTY. Then REFCYCLE must be = 0, and input pin EVPRI must be connected to output pin OLDPRI of the first EVPRTY instance. Such arrangement is planned / recommended for those cases, where the first actions within the tasks are time critical, but most of the actions are not. In such a case the event driven CONTRM should contain first the real time critical PC elements, then EVPRTY, which lowers the priority then the other PC elements and finally EVPRTY which restores the original high priority.
9 - 28
Error Codes
Table 3.
Error # 1001 1002 1003 Description Illegal event identifier (= no such event driven CONTRM cannot exist or does not exist). Illegal cycle time (= illegal value in REFCYCLE pin, must be >=2 and <=20000. (or ==0) Illegal parameter (= should never occur, because such is an internal error between EVPRTY and the base system software.
9 - 29
Event Detection
Summary
EVT element is used to detect boolean events and to write the event name and event time into the selected event logger. EVT Figure 1. Table 1.
No F1 1 2 3 10 11 Name LOGNR I TEXT ACK ERR O Type II IB IA20 B OB OB Description The NumbeR of the Event LOGger to be used. Control Input for event recording. Event description TEXT. Event ACKnowledgement ERRor Copy of the input pin 1.
F1 1 2 3 EVT LOGNR I TEXT ACK
EVT
ERR O 10 11
Call Connections
Values 1...8
max 20 char 0=>1 = true 1 = true
Function
The 01 input (I) signal transition signifies event occurrence. The 10 input (I) signal transition signifies event disappearance. Event occurrence causes the EVT element to read the current date and time and write this information along with the descriptive text string into the event logger as a new event. The descriptive text string is plus (+) character and the first 19 characters from the text in the TEXT input. Event disappearance causes a new event to be written into the event logger like during the event occurance (see above) but minus (-) character is used instead of the plus character. Event information in an event logger can be read by a Drive Tool and /or Panel equipments. The simple panel display may use eg the following presentation form: +CONTACTOR FAILURE 1998 01 08 11:25:31,0571 The 01 ACK signal transition acknowledges the last event created by this element (and all older unacknowledged events, if any).
9 - 30
Output pin ERR is set to 1 if one of the following error conditions exists: function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8 logger (LOGNR) does not exist logger (LOGNR) is full and the overwrite permission bit of the CNTRL input of the corresponding EVTLOG element is set to 0 two simultaneous attempts to acknowledge an event (01 ACK signal transition).
Related Documents
Descriptions of PC elements EVTLOG, ERROR, EVENT and EVBUG.
9 - 31
Event Logger
Summary
EVTLOG
EVTLOG EVTLOG element is used to create and F1 LOGNR manage an event logger. Up to 8 such F2 RECMAX F3 NOTCLEAR loggers (numbered respectively from 1...8) 1 ENABLE can be declared. The EVENT, EVT and CNTRL 2 ERROR PC elements are used to source different classes of events that can be written into the event logger. The event logger can be accessed by PC Tool services and special Figure 1. panel PC elements.
ERR STAT RECCNT ERRC
10 11 12 99
Call Connections
EVTLOG Table 1.
No F1 F2 F3 Name LOGNR RECMAX NOTCLEAR Type II II IB Description Event LOGger NumbeR MAXimum number of event RECords. During system start: 0= Clear to logger 1= Do not clear the logger On-line change: Clear to logger (note: the direction 1=>0) ENABLE recording of new events. Operation CoNTRoL ERRor Logger STATus Current event RECord CouNT ERRor Code Values 1...8
1=>0 = true
1 2 10 11 12 99
ENABLE CNTRL ERR STAT RECCNT ERRC
IB II OB OI OI OI
0=>1 = true 1 = true 1 = true see Table 3 0...RECMAX
Table 2.
Bit # 0 Description OWR (permission to overwrite unacknowledged event records)
9 - 32
Bits of the STAT Terminal
Table 3.
Bit # 0 1 2 3 Description Un acknowledged event(s) in the logger. Logger in RUN state Logger in OVERWRITE mode Logger is full
Event Logger Operation
EVTLOG writes events into consecutive record locations of the logger in a cyclic manner. It means that after filling the last location (= RECMAX) in the logger it moves back to the first location. A new event can be written in only if the next record location is empty or acknowledged or if the OWR (= overwrite permission ) bit of the CNTRL input is set to 1. An Event Record contains event's type, status, code, date, time and a descriptive text (max 20 characters). The following event types can be recorded in the event logger: Event; sourced by EVENT and EVT PC elements Error; sourced by ERROR PC element System error; sourced by the AC80 system software.
Use of Event Loggers
Event logger(s) in the application program are used by the application program, the PC Tool, and the (operator or door) panels. There should be only one main user for each event logger. The main user of a logger can control the operation of the logger. Other users should only read the contents of the logger. Logger control means: running and stopping logger operation clearing of the whole logger enabling/disabling the overwriting of unacknowledged records acknowledgment of records
Error Handling Error Codes (ERRC)
In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output indicates the applicable error code (see Table 4). Error code = 10000 + logger_number (1...8) * 100 + error_number (see below)
9 - 33
Table 4.
Bit # 0 11 16 Description Function parameter F1 (LOGNR) is not in the range 1...8 Function parameter F2 (RECMAX) is too big. Multiple EVTLOG elements use the same LOGNR.
Related Documents
Descriptions of PC elements ERROR, EVENT, EVT and EVBUG.
9 - 34
Queue Register
Summary
FIFO
FIFO The queue register FIFO (First (C1,C2,C3) In First Out) can be used store FULL 8 IN 1 data to be used later and OCC 2 9 > OUT R 3 irrespective The queue register EMPTY 10 FIFO (First In First Out) can be 11 01 12 I1 used store data to be used later 21 02 22 I2 and irrespective of when the data was stored. The different IC2 10xC2+1 0C2 10xC2+2 queues in the element work in parallel, i.e. reading in, reading out, etc. are performed at the same time in all of the queues. Figure 1. Data may be of the types integer, real number, Boolean or time. A maximum of 9 queues, each with a maximum of 64 queue places, can be selected.
Call
FIFO (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 Description Data type Number of queues Number of queues places in each queue. Permissible values B,I,IL,R,T,TR 1...9 2...64
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name IN Type IB Description Dynamic INput for entering of data in the queues. Data is read from the inputs 11 to IC2. Dynamic input for reading data from the queues. Reset. Input which clears the queue register and prevents all further entry. Output which is set when the queue register is FULL. OCCupied. Output which specifies how many queue places are occupied.
2 3 8 9
>OUT R FULL OCC
IB IB OB OI
9 - 35
Table 2 continued
No 10 11 12 21 22 . . 10x0C2+1 10xC2+2 Name EMPTY I1 O1 I2 O2 IC2 OC2 Type OB IC1 OC1 IC1 OC1 IC1 OC1 Description Output which is set when the queue register is EMPTY. Input 1. Input data to queue no. 1. Output 1. Output data from queue no. 1 Input 2. Input data to queue no. 2. Output 2. Output data from queue no. 2. Input C2. Input data to queue no. C2. Output C2. Output data from queue no. C2.
Function
Each queue has a data input I. It is used to enter data at the end of the queue. Each queue has a data output O. Data from place 1 in each queue is continuously available at the outputsO1 to OC2. If both dynamic inputs (IN and OUT) are set during the same program cycle, data entry is performed first and then the output is read. Data at the I inputs are placed last in the queues when input IN is set. When the queue register is empty, data is stored at queue place 1, then at queue place 2, etc. When input OUT goes to 1, data at each occupied place in all queues are moved forward one place. Data that occupied queue place 2 now occupies queue place 1, and can be read at outputs O1 to OC2. The value 0 is entered at the previous last occupied place. When the input R is set, the complete contents the queues are cleared. All further entry is blocked. The number of occupied queue places is indicated continously by the output OCC. When the queue register is full, the output FULL is set and when the queue register is empty, the output EMPTY, the output EMPTY is set.
Entry of Data
Output of Data
Clearing of the Complete Register Supervision
9 - 36
FIFO 1 2 3 > IN > OUT R FULL OCC EMPTY 8 9 10
11 21 Queue inputs 31
I1 I2 I3
O1 12 O2 22 O3 32 Queue outputs
10 x C2 + 1
IC2
OC2
10 x C2 + 2
C3
Queue place
9 - 37
Filter
Summary
FILT-1P (FILTer-1Pole) is used as a single pole low-pass filter. The outputs signal can be limited with limit values specified at special inputs. The balancing function permits the output signal to track an external reference and permits a bumpless return to the normal function. All transfer from static states are bumpless. FILT-1P Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 Name I K T1 BAL BALREF OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR Type IR IR ITR IB IR IR IR OR OB OB OB Description
FILT-1P
FILT-1P I K T1 BAL BALREF OHL OLL O O = HL O = LL ERR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 11 12 13
Call Connections
Figure 1.
Input. Input for actual value. Input for setting gain. Time 1. Input for filter time constant. BALance. Input for activation of tracking. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when tracking. Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value. Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value. Output. Output signal. Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O reaches the upper limit value. Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O reaches the lower limit value. ERRor. Output set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
Function
The step response in the time plane for a single low-pass filter s O(t) = I(t) K (1-e sT1). The transfer function for a single pole low pass filter is G(s) = K(1/(1+sT1)). This has been implemented in the FILT-1P element as a recursive algorithm.
K t T1
Gain, FilterTime and Sampling Time
Certain constants are precalculated to make the execution time of the element as short as possible. The result is stored internally in the element. These constants are recalculated if T1 or K are changed by more than 1/128 of their previous value, or if the sampling time TS is changed. When recalculating, a test is performed to check if T1 >2xTS. If not, T1 is set equal to 2xTS.
Figure 2. Step Response
9 - 38
Tracking
If BAL is set to 1, the filter immediately goes into tracking and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value. Return to dynamic state is bumpless. The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the inputs OHL for upper limit value and OLL for the lower limit value. If the actual value exceeds the upper limit value, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit value, the output O = LL is set to 1.
IgIGI IgK
Ig 1 T1 G Ig 45 -90
Limitation Function
Figure 3. Bode Diagram
When the limitation status has been detected, a check is made each time the element is executed to determine whether K x I(t) exceeds the output signal limitations. If so, the limitation status remains. If not, the calculation of the output signal is performed by the algorithm in the normal way. Return from limitation to a dynamic state is bumpless. The element checks that the upper limit value the is greater that the lower limit value OLL. if not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the values they had in the sample before the error occurred. After an error the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, in the same way as in the case of tracking above.
7 OHL 8 OLL
I1 I1 < I2 I2 I1 I1 < I2
1 &
1
4 BA L 5 B A LR E F
I2
ACT
ACT
I1 I1 > I2 I2 I1 I1 < I2 I2 I1 I1 < I2 I2
10
O =H L 11 O = LI 1 2 ERR 13
ACT
X 1 I 2 K 3 TI
1
F I LT -1 P
P re se t
9 - 39
Filter Integer
Summary
The FILTer Integer element is used as a single pole low pass filter for long integer values. FILTI Table 1.
No 1 2 10 Name I T1 O Type IIL IIL OIL Description Input. Input for actual value. Filter Time constant. Output. Filtered actual value. Values
1 2 FILTI O I T1
FILTI
10
Figure 1.
Call Connections
0...8388607 (ms)
Function
The step response in the time plane for a single low pass filter is: O(t) = I(t)(1 - e-t/T1) The transfer function for a single low pass filter is: G(s) = 1/(1 + sT 1) The filtering algorithm is calculated using the following formula:
O=
I + (T1 TS) O n 1 T1 TS+ 1
Where TS is the cycle time of the program in milliseconds and On1 is the output from the previous execution cycle. If T1<TS then the output value O is set to the input value I. The internal calculation of the algorithm is done with 48-bit accuracy to avoid offset errors.
9 - 40
Function Header
Summary Call Function
The FUNCM (FUNCtion Module) is used for structuring of the PC program. FUNCM
FUNCM
FUNCM
Figure 1.
The purpose of FUNCM is to control the arrangement of the documentation. The element does not affect the execution. A function module can be used to provide a subdivision of a PC program, a control module or a slave module in several functionally associated parts. A function module can itself contain a control module or a new function module.
9 - 41
Function Generator
Summary
FUNG-1V (FUNtion Generator 1 Variable) is used for generation of an optional function of one variable, y = f(x). The function is described by a number of co-ordinates. Linear interpolation is used for values between these co-ordinates. A maximum of 255 co-ordinates can be specified.
1 2 3 4 5
FUNG-1V
FUNG-1V (C1) X BAL BALREF XTAB YTAB
Y
Y ERR
10 11 12
BALREFO
FUNG-1V (C1) Table 1.

Parameter C1 Description Number of co-ordinates which describe the function.
Figure 1.
Permissible values 2...255
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 Name X BAL BALREF XTAB YTAB Y ERR Type IR IB IR IGC1R IGC1R OR OB Description X-value. Input for X-value. BALance. Input for activation of balancing. BALance REFerence. Value which the Youtput is to adopt with balancing. X TABle. Group data for the X-table with C1 values. Y TABle. Group data for the Y-table with C1 values. Y-value. Output for Y-value. ERRor. Output set (to 1) if X outside the value of XTAB or if Y, on balancing, is outside the YTAB values. BALance REFerence Output. Output for calculated X-value with balancing.
12
BALREFO
OR
9 - 42
Function
The function generator FUNG-1V for one variable calculates an output signal Y for a value at the input X. The calculation is performed in accordance with a piece by piece linear function which is determined by the vectors XTAB and YTAB. For each X-value in the XTAB, there is a corresponding Y-value in the YTAB. The Y-value at the output is calculated by means of linear interpolation between the XTAB values, between which lies the value of input X is. The values in XTAB must increase from low to high serial numbers in the table. The function generated is performed as follows: y = Yk+(X-Xk)(Yk+1-Yk)/(Xk+1-Xk)
Interpolation Balancing
If BAL is set to 1, the value at Y is set to the value of the input BALREF. The X-value which corresponds to this Y-value is obtained at the output BALREFO. On balancing, the X-value is calculated by interpolation in the same way the Y-value is calculated during normal operation. To permit the balancing, the values in YTAB must increase from low to high serial numbers in the table. If the input signal X is outside the range defined by XTAB, the ERR output is set to 1. The Y-value is then set to the highest or lowest value in YTAB. ERR is also set to 1 if BALREF is outside the YTAB value range when BAL is set to 1. The value at Y is then set to the value at the input BALREF and BALREFO is set to the highest or lowest value in XTAB.
Y
Error Signal
Yc1 Yk+1 Y Yk Y2 Y1
X1 X 2
Xk Xk+1 X
Xc1
Figure 2. Example of a Function.
9 - 43
9 - 44
Chapter 10 - PC ELEMENTS from I to P Two Integer to Integer Long Conversion

IIL PC element is used to pack two Integer values to an Integer long value. IIL Table 1.
No 1 2 10 Name L H O Type II II OIL Description Input for the 16 less significant bits of the Integer Long output. Input for the 16 most significant bits of the Integer long output. Integer long Output.
IIL L H
IIL
1 2
10
Figure 1.
Function
The IIL PC element ignores the sign of the Integer Inputs. The element simply writes the L input to the 16 less significant bits and the H to the 16 most significant bits to the Integer long output O.
10 - 1
Integer Long to two Integer Conversion

ILI PC element is used to unpack an Integer long value to two Integer values. ILI Table 1.
No 1 11 12 Name I L H Type ILI II II Description
ILI I
ILI
L H
11 12
Figure 1.
Integer long input. Output for the 16 less significant bits of the Integer Long input. Output for the 16 most significant bits of the Integer long input.
Function
The ILI PC element ignores the sign of the Integer outputs. The element simply writes to the L output the 16 less significant bits and to the H output the 16 most significant bits of the Integer long input I.
10 - 2
Integrator
Summary
The INT (INTegrator) is used to give an integration effect. The output signal can be limited with limit values. The balancing function permits the output signal to track an external reference and gives a smooth return to the normal operation.
INT I K TI RINT BAL BALREF OHL OLL
INT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O O=HL O=LL ERR
10 11 12 13
Call Connections
INT Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 Name I K TI Type IR IR ITR Description
Figure 1.
RINT IB BAL IB BALREF IR OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR IR IR OR OB OB OB
Input. Input for actual value. Input for setting gain. Time Integration. Input for time constant for integration. Reset INTegrator. Input for clearing integrator. BALance. Input for activation of tracking. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when tracking. Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value. Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value. Output. Output signal. Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches to the higher limit value. Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches to the lower limit value. ERRor is set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
Function
The INT function can be written in the time plane as: O(t) = K/TI( I(t)dt) The main property controlled is that the output signal retains its value when the input signal I(t) = 0.
TI
Figure 2. Step Response
10 - 3
The step response in the time plane is: O(t) = k*I(t)*t/T1. The transfer function for an integrator is: G(s) = K(1/sTI).
Gain, Integration Time Constant and Sampling Time
The constant K*TS/TI is precalculated to reduce the execution time of the element. The result is stored internally in the element. This constant is recalculated if TI or K are changed from their previous values, or if the cycle time TS is changed. When recalculating, a test is performed to check whether TS/TI < 1.TS/TI is otherwise set to 1. The integrator is cleared when RINT goes to 1.
IgIGI lg K TI
G - 45 - 90
K TI
lg lg
Clearing of Integrator Tracking
Figure 3. Bode Diagram
If BAL is set to 1, the integrator immediately goes into tracking mode and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value. On return to normal operation from tracking mode, the value of the output O is maintained for one cycle, after which integration will continue from this value.
10 - 4
Limitation Function
The output value is limited between OHL and OLL. If the actual value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. The element checks that the value OHL is greater than the value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the values they had before the error occurred. After the limitation or error status has ceased, normal integration will continue using the old value.
7 OHL 8 OLL
ACT 4 BAL 5 BALREF

I1 I1 > I2 I2 I1 I1 < I2 I2 I1 I1 < I2 I2
O 10 ACT O =HL 11 O = LI 12 ERR 13
INT
2 K 3 TI
t
4 RINT
Reset
10 - 5
Inverter
Summary
The INV is used for inverting Boolean variables. The INV is used particularly when reading signals to the data base.
INV
Figure 1.
Call Connections
INV Table 1.
No 1 5 Name Type IB OB Description Input. Output of the inverted input value.
Function
The output signal from the INV element is set (to 1) if the input signal to the element is 0, and reset (to 0) when the input signal is 1. See the truth table below. Table 2. Truth table of INV 1 1 0 5 0 1
10 - 6
Absolute Read from Dual Port Memory

Summary
IOBUSRD
IOBUSRD IOBUSRD PC element makes possible to (2,3,0,0) F=1-F1 BOARD ERR read contents of Dual Port Memory of NCBF=0-F2 SPEC board. However the user must give the EN 1 absolute addresses of the interesting IB1 11 AIB1 locations. It is intended for debugging new IB2 12 AIB2 NCB specific PC elements and functions I1 21 AI1 during their development phase. (But it could I2 22 AI2 be used for some special purposes as well. 23 AI3 I3 E.g. when used together with IOBUSWR for HW testing DPM itself.) IOBUSRD is available Figure 1. only if you have enabled Toolbox option of AC80.
10
51 52 61 62 63
IOBUSRD (C1,C2,C3,C4) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 C4 Description Number of individual bytes to be read. Number of individual words to be read Not used (relict from PC element of APC with same name). Not used (relict from PC element of APC with same name). Permissible values (0...10) (0...10)
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 1 11 . . . 10+C1 21 . . . 20+C2 51 . . . 50+C1 Name BOARD SPEC EN AIB1 AIBC1 AI1 AIC2 IB1 IBC1 Type II II IB II II II II OI OI Description No meaning No meaning ENable Address offset of first data byte. Address offset of last data byte. Address offset of first data word. Address offset of last data word. First red data byte. Last red data byte. Values
10 - 7
Table 2 continued
No Name Type OI OI OB Description First red data word. Last red data word. ERRor Values
61 I1 . . . 60+C1 IC2 10 ERR
Function
The PC element reads the values from specified DPM locations to respective output pins. The values can be either words (=16 bits) or bytes (=8 bits), but in both cases the respective output pins of IOBUSRD are type (I) i.e.16 bits wide. The addresses of bytes in pins AIB... (and of words in pins AI...) are interpreted as offsets from the beginning of Dual Port Memory. The user does not need to know the base address of DPM. Remember however, that the offsets are byte offsets: difference of addresses between successive words is 2 the offsets must be entered as decimal value.
In other words you typically must convert a DPM address, which you get from NCB software listings according following rules: subtract the base address of DPM of NCB side (=0x2000) multiply the result by 2 convert the result to decimal representation.
The ERR output is set only if the NCB board is completely missing (and there is no DPM available). In other words, the offset values in input pins of IOBUSRD may refer over DPM area, but such an error is not detected by the PC element .
10 - 8
Absolute Write into Dual Port Memory

Summary
IOBUSWR PC element makes it possible to write data into absolute addresses of Dual Port Memory of NCB board. It is intended for debugging new NCB specific PC elements and functions during their development phase. (it could be used for some special purposes as well e.g. when used together with IOBUSRD for HW testing DPM itself.) IOBUSWR is available only if you have enabled Toolbox option of AC80.
IOBUSWR
IOBUSWR (2,3,0,0) BOARD ERR SPEC EN AIB1 AIB2 AI1 AI2 AI3 IB1 IB2 I1 I2 I3
F=1-F1 F=0-F2 1 11 12 21 22 23 51 52 61 62 63
10
IOBUSWR (C1,C2,C3,C4) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 C4 Description Number of individual bytes to be written. Number of individual words to be written. Not used (relic from PC element of APC with same name). Not used (relic from PC element of APC with same name).
Figure 1.
Permissible values (0...10) (0...10)
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 1 11 . . . 10+C1 21 . . . 20+C2 51 . . . 50+C1 Name BOARD SPEC EN AIB1 AIBC1 AI1 AIC2 IB1 IBC1 Type II II IB II II II II OI OI Description No meaning No meaning ENable Address offset of first data byte. Address offset of last data byte. Address offset of first data word. Address offset of last data word. First data byte to be written. Last data word to be written. Values
10 - 9
Table 2 continued
No Name Type OI OI OB Description First data word to be written. Last data word to be written. ERRor Values
61 I1 . . . 60+C1 IC2 10 ERR
Function
The PC element writes the specified data values from input pins into specified DPM locations. The values can be either words (= 16 bits) or bytes (= 8 bits), but in both cases the respective input pins of IOBUSWR are type (I) i.e. 16 bits wide. The addresses of bytes in pins AIB... (and of words in pins AI...) are interpreted as offsets from the beginning of Dual Port Memory. The user does not need to know the base address of DPM. Remember however, that the offsets are byte offsets: difference of addresses between successive words is 2 the offsets must be entered as decimal values.
In other words you typically must convert a DPM address, which you get from NCB software listings according following rules: subtract the base address of DPM of NCB side (=0x2000) multiply the result by 2 convert the result to decimal representation.
The ERR output is set only if the NCB board is completely missing (and there is no DPM available). In other words, the offset values in input pins of IOBUSRD may refer over DPM area, but such an error is not detected by the PC element .
10 - 10
Transmit/Receive I/O Datasets

Summary
The IORX (Input/Output Receive Xmit) element is used to transmit and/or receive datasets to/from an I/O device.
IORX
IORX (C1,C2,C3) NODE ERR RDY EN >RESET LINK CNTRL DS1
WR1
F1 1 2 3 21 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35
4 5 6
I11 I12 I31 DS*C2 WR*C2
O11
O21 O31
26 27 28
I1*C2 OI*C2 I2*C2 O2*C2 I3*C2 O3*C2 ERRC
36 37 38 99
Call
IORX (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 Description Block number Number of datasets Data type Permissible values
Figure 1.
1...8 1...2 (Note: 1 recommended for NDCS) I,IL (Note: I only for NDSC)
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 22 23 24 Name NODE EN RESET CNTRL ERR RDY LINK DS1 WR1 I11 I12 Type II IB IB II OB OB OI II IB II II Description NODE number of target device. ENable the block. RESET the error code ERRC. Operation CoNTRL ERRor in the FB or I/O link operation. Data ReaDY. New valid data received. Current status of the I/O LINK. DataSet number of the first transmit dataset. Enable the WRite of the first transmit dataset. First data Input of the first transmit dataset. Second data input of the first transmit dataset. Values 1...8 0 or 1 0 or 1
see table 3 1...254 0 or 1
10 - 11
Table 2 continued
No 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 99 Name I31 O11 O21 O31 DC*C2 WR*C2 I1*C2 I2*C2 I3*C2 O1*C2 O2*C2 O3*C2 ERRC Type II OI OI OI II IB II II II OI OI OI OI Description Values
Third data input of the first transmit dataset (when C3=I). First data output of the first received dataset. Second data output of the first received dataset. Third data output of the first received dataset (when C3=I). DataSet number of the last (C2) 1...254 transmit dataset. Enable the WRite of the last (C2) 0 or 1 transmit dataset. First data input of the last (C2) transmit dataset. Second data input of the last (C2) transmit dataset. Third data input of the last (C2) transmit dataset (when C3=I). First data output of the last (C2) received dataset. Second data output of the last (C2) received dataset. Third data output of the last (C2) received dataset (when C3=I). ERRor Code see Table 4
Table 3.
Bit # 0 1 2 Description I/O link is OK. I/O link is broken. I/O link initialisation (by the NCB communication board) after startup is not finished.
Note: The value of this terminal is not an integer value but a batch of 16 bits.
Initialisation of the I/O Communication Links
Before IORX PC elements can be executed you must declare and initialise (with the DB element NCBIO) the communication links to the I/O-modules, that are used in the application program.
10 - 12
Use of a IORX Block
The physical target device address of a IORX block is defined with the function parameter NODE (the address of this target device is also defined in the DB element NCBIO). Call parameter C1 defines the identitity and type of this IORX block. Each IORX instance with same NODE-parameter must have unique value for C1 in range 1...8. If C1 = 1, the IORX will be treated as basic block, and it is serviced by NCB-board with higher priority (=higher frequency) than the other IORX instances. Call parameter C2 defines the number (1...2) of the transmit datasets. Call parameter C3 defines the type of input and output data used by the function block: I: the 6 bytes of data are represented as 3 integers, each consisting of two bytes IL: the 6 bytes of data are represented as 2 long integers, each consisting of 3 bytes (the most significant byte of the long integer is ignored and contains value 0 when read).
The inputs DS1...DS*C2 define the dataset numbers (1...254) of the transmit datasets. EN input pin = 0 causes bypassing of all activities of this block. The values of the transmit datasets are in the I11...I3*C2 inputs. If the WR input of a transmit dataset is set to 1 then the IORX block transmits the values of this dataset to the target device and automatically receives the values returned by the target (an IORX block only starts this transmit/receive process during its execution and the actual transmitting/receiving is done as a background operation while the other blocks are executing). The MAFR code of the transmitted DDCS message is set to 00h (ddcs_to_dset). If the WR input of a transmit dataset is set to 0 then the IORX block does not transmit the values of this dataset to the target device but only receives the values returned by the target device. The MAFR code of the transmitted DDCS message is set to 01h (ddcs_from_dset). The values of the received datasets are in the O11...O3*C2 outputs. These values have been received from the target device after the previous execution of the IORX block (they are not read from the device during the current execution of this block).
10 - 13
The receipt of new valid values from all receive datasets of the IORX block is acknowledged by setting the RDY output to 1 for one execution cycle of this block. This output is set to 0 if new valid dataset values have not been received since the last execution of this block (either the cycle time of this block is too short or the I/Ocommunication link is invalid). CNTRL input pin is used for specifying several variations or options of the I/O-communication. I.e. it is value is interpreted as (groups of) bits, whose values have influence on different things. Table 4.
Bit# 0 Value 0x1 Description This is a synchronizing IORX (only one such IORX is allowed in whole application (this function is not implemented in current NCB). This I/O-module should cause interrupts (this option is possible only for NODE=1). If C3 = IL, the most significant byte of output data is filled according bit #23 of received data. Read dataset number is = given number +1 (= read and write dataset indentifiers are alternating). Read dataset number is = given number (= read and write dataset indentifiers are overlapping). If C3=IL, do not update 3rd. output pin at all. If C3=IL, do update 3rd. output pin with 4 first bytes of read 6 bytes data. If C3=IL, do update 3rd. output pin with 4 middle bytes of read 6 bytes data. If C3=IL, do update 3rd. output pin with 4 last bytes of read 6 bytes data.
1 2 3
0x2 0x4 0 0x8
4..5
0 0x10 0x20 0x30
Error Handling
In an error situation the ERR output is set to 1 and the ERRC output indicates the applicable error code (see Table 4). Errors are originated either from the execution of the IORX block itself (error codes 70nn...78nn) or from the DB element NCBIO that defines the target device of the IORX block (error codes 89nn). The ERR output is set to 0 with the first successful response. The ERRC output retains the code of the last occurred error. A 0->1 transition in the RESET input clears the ERRC output if the error situation is no more in effect.
10 - 14
Error Codes
Table 5. Error code = 7000 + error_number 34 (see below) or Error code = 7000 + i/o_device_number (1...8) * 100 + error_number (see below) or Error code = 8900 + error_number (see below)
Error # 1 4 5 8 16 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40...49 Description Invalid I/O device type definition (IOTYPE pin value in DB element NCBIO). The NCB communication board is missing. Invalid NCB communication board. The AC80 expansion module is other than the NCB communication board. Initialization error in NCB communication board Call parameter C1 is not in range 1...8 Call parameter C2 is not in the range 1...2 I/O link timeout I/O device address (NODE) is not in the range 1...8 DB element NCBIO does not exist in the application NCBIO with same NODE and C1 definitions exists already Dataset number (DSn) is not in the range 1...254 Communication error in NCB communication board
Related Documents
Description of DB element NCBIO.
10 - 15
Limiter
Summary
LIM-N (LIMiter-1-of-N address) is used for limitation of integers, real numbers or time values. Several limit values can be selected.
LIM-N
LIM-N (C1,C2) AERR A1 A2T AC2 I HLA1 HLA2 HLAC2 LLA1 LLA2 O >HLA HLA <LLA LLA 22 40 41
60 61
1 2 C2 21 31 32
30+C2 51 52
10 11
ERR
50+C2
LLAC2
LIM-N (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Data type Number of optional limit values
Figure 1.
Permissible values I,IL,R,T,TR 1...9
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name A1 Type IB Description Address 1. Input which, when set, limits the output O to the limit values connected to the inputs HLA1 and HLL1. Address 2. Input which, when set, limits the output O to the limit values connected to the inputs HLA2 and HLL2. Address C2. Input which, when set, limits the output O to the limit values connected to the inputs HLAC2 and LLAC2. Address ERRor. Output which is set when 2 or more of the inputs A1 to AC2 are set. ERRor. Output which is set when the limit for high level is less than limit for low level. Input. Input which is connected to the signal being limited. Output. Output for the limited signal.
2 . . . C2
A2
IM
AC2
IB
10 11 21 22
AERR ERR I O
OB OB IC1 OC1
10 - 16
Table 2 continued
No 31 Name HLA1 Type IC1 Description High Limit Address 1, Input for upper limit value which limits the signal when the input A1 is set. High Limit Address 2. Input for upper limit value which limits the signal when the input A2 is set. High Limit Address C2. Input for upper limit value which limits the signal when the input AC2 is set. Input >High Limit Address. Output which is set when the upper limit of the element is reached. High Limit Address. Output which specifies the upper limit where limiting begins. Low Limit Address 1. Input for lower limit value which limits the signal when the input A1 is set. Low Limit Address 2. Input for lower limit value which limits the signal when the input A2 is set. Low Limit Address C2. Input for lower limit value which limits the signal when the input AC2 is set. Input < Low Limit Address. Output which is set when the lower limit of the element is reached. Ligh Limit Address. Output which specifies the lower limit where limiting begins.
32
HLA2
IC1
. . . 30+C2 HLAC2
IC1
40
|>HLA
OB
41 51
HLA LLA1
OC1 IC1
52
LLA2
IC1
. . . 50+C2 LLAC2
IC1
60
|<LLA
OB
61
LLA
OC1
Function Selection of Limit Value
LIM-N is used to limit up to 9 different limits. Boolean output signals are given when the output is limited. The limit value inputs HLA1 to HLAC2 or LLA1 to LLAC2 that will limit the value at output O are selected with the inputs A1 to AC2. If the input A1 is 1, the output is limited by HLA1 and LLA1, if A2 is 1, the output is limited by HLA2 and LLA2, etc. if none of the inputs A1 to AC2 is 1, O is limited to the data value 0. If 2 or more of the inputs A1 to AC2 are set at the same time, the output is limited by the limit values corresponding to the lowest numbered set input. The error signal output AERR is set at the same time.
10 - 17
Limiting
When the input I exceeds the selected limit, the output O is limited to the limit value. One of the outputs |> HLA or |< LLA will then be set depending on which limit was exceeded. The value of the current limits for high and low level where limiting begins can be read at the outputs HLA and LLA. The element checks that the limit value HLA is greater than the limit LLA. If HLA is less than LLA, the error signal output ERR is set. The output O and the limit value outputs |> HLA and |< HLL are retained from the sample before the error status developed.
LIM-N 1 A1 2 A2 test C2 AC2
COMP
I1
Supervision of Limit Values
AERR
10
ERR 11
AO (0) 31 32 30 + C2 HLA1 HLA2 HLAC2 AO (0) 51 52 50 + C2 LLA1 LLA2 LLAC2
I1 > I2 I2
COMP
I1 I1 > I2 I2
I > HLA HLA
40 41
COMP
I1 I1 > I2 I2
I < LLA
60
LLA 61
21
O 22
10 - 18
Master Header
Summary
The master header MASTER is used for the execution control of subordinate slave modules.
MASTER
MASTER(C1,C2) ON RUN SINGLE MODP R
1 2 3
5 6
Figure 1.
MASTER (C1, C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Cycle time in ms Place in the cycle time table and/or scheduling strategy. Permissible values Allowed values are between 1 ms and 20000 ms in steps of 1 ms. 1...252: place in the cycle table, cyclic activation. 252: activation at initalization after power up
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 3 5 6 Name ON SINGLE R RUN MODP Type IB IB IB OB OB Description Currently not used. Should be connected to constant value 1. Currently not used. Should be connected to constant value 0. Currently not used. Should be connected to constant value 0 Currently not used. Value is always zero. Currently not used. Value is always zero.
Function
Master is a supervisory execution controlling element for a number of slave modules. The parameter C1 specifies how often the master and associated slave modules are executed, i.e the cycle time for the modules. Parameter C2 is used to specify the execution order of execution units with the same cycle time. The order in which the subordinate slave modules are executed is determined by their order in the documentation.
Normal Execution
10 - 19
Maximum Selector
Summary
MAX (MAXimum selector) is used to select the highest value of an optional number of integers or real numbers.
MAX
MAX(C1,C2) A DEADB IA1 O IA2 IAC2
1 11 12 10+C2
30 31
MAX (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Data Type Number of inputs
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 11 12 . . . 10 + C2 30 31 Name Type Description DEADBand. Input for deadband. Input Address 1. Input which is compared with the other inputs Input Address 2. Input which is compared with the other inputs Input Address C2 Input which is compared with the other inputs Address. Output for the number of the input having the highest value. Output. Output for the highest value.
DEADB IC1 IA1 IC1 IA2 IC1
IAC2 A O
IC1 OI OC1
Function
The values at the inputs IA1 .. IAC2 are compared and the greatest value is written to the output O. The number of the input with the highest value is written to the output A. If the two highest signal values are equal when the element is executed for the first time, the signal with the lowest input number is treated as having the highest output value.
10 - 20
Deadband
The deadband specified at the input DEADB is symmetrical around the value of the highest input. The upper and lower deadband limits are calculated from the value for the highest input in the preceding execution cycle. To prevent rapid changes at the output A, the value at A is retained until the value at the corresponding input is less than the calculated lower deadband limit or until one of the other inputs exceeds the upper deadband limit.
1 2 3 4
Sample n 2 4 1 3
Signal 4 = highest
Sample n + 1 DEADB 2 4 1 3
Signal 4 is still seen as highest
Signal 3 = highest
Sample n + 3 2 DEADB 1 3 4
Signal 1 = highest
Sample n + 6 DEADB
Signal 1 = highest
Figure 3. Example of Function with Deadban
10 - 21
DataSet Receiver for AF100

Summary
MB90REC
MB90REC A receiving function block, which is used to F1 ERR IDENT 10 receive cyclic dataset (=CDPs) from the STATION F2 ACT 1 RDY 11 Advant Field Bus AF100 (old name of the bus was sometimes MB90, that is I1 21 explanation for the name). Data types I... 20+... within the packet are indicated by the call I*C1 20+C1 IL1 parameters and can be I, IL, or R, and 51 IL... 50+... should equal the call parameters of the IL*C2 50+C2 respective transmitting MB90TRA PC R1 71 element (or DSP DB element if the R... 70+... transmitting station is not APC or AC80). RC3 70+C3 MB90REC element should be always 99 ERRC accompanied with respective DSP in DB part of the application (in order to specify Figure 1. assumed CDP transfer interval and to enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to summarize various CDPs in each station). The MB90REC PC element can be used to trigger execution of event driven task CONTRM (2,255,0). The main (and only) difference of MB90REC and AFREC is in the way, they deal with short integer data. (see below)
MB90REC (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 C3 Number of I values. Number of IL values. Number of R values. Where: 0 C1 2 Permissible values 0...16 0...8 0...8
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 1 Name Type Description Values
IDENT II STATION II ACT IB
Dataset IDENTity number. 1...50 Node number of the sender. 1...79 Input. ACTivates dataset 1 = active reception.
10 - 22
C2
C3
16
Table 2 continued
No
10 11 21 . . . 20+C1 51 . . 50+C2 71 . . . 70+C3 99
Name
ERR RDY I1 IC1 IL1 ILC2 R1 RC3 ERRC
Type
OB OB OI OI OIL OIL OR OR OI
Description
Communication ERRor. Output data has been updated Output. I value number 1. Output. I value number C1. Output. IL value number 1. Output. IL value number C2. Output. R value number 1.
Values
Output. R value number C1. ERRor Code. see Table 3.
Error Codes
Table 3.
Error # Description
Communication startup errors: 3002 Bus coupler self-test failed. 3003 Not enough memory available in system-RWM. 3004 AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB-element. 3005 Station address in the hardware is not equal to the STNNO value of PM825 AF100 part. 3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element in the same AC80). 3102 STATION value is equal to the address defined in the PM825 STNNO. (=impossible to receive from itself) 3103 Illegal IDENT. 3104 Illegal length of CDP. 3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified 3106 Respective DSP missing from DB part 3108 Respective DSP specified different CDP length 3109 Respective DSP specified different transfer direction 3201 Too many CDPs used in this station. 3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP configuration. Run time errors (may occur even after successful start-up): 3402 Time-out waiting for address frames from the BA. 3403 No response to address frame from the data source station. 3501 CRC-error (data frame corrupted during transfer, or two stations responded to same address frame).
10 - 23
Table 3 continued
Error # Description
When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error code (above) are translated to texts: 3000...3099 MB90 START FAILED 3100...3199 MB90 DATASET REJ. 3200...3299 MB90 FULL (LOCAL) 3400...3499 MB90 PARTNER FAIL 3500...3599 MB90 DISTURBANCE
Function
Upon initialization the MB90REC function block: checks that the PM825 DB element has specified the AF100 bus coupler checks the working condition of the bus coupler checks the legality of the IDENT and STATION parameters checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application allocates a communication port for the CDP.
The reception of the CDP is introduced internally to AF100 specific system software of the station, which then configures the local bus coupler respectively. But the reception preparations are not told to (or made in) the BusAdministrator. The specified CDP should be configured into BA by some other station, which thereafter is responsible also to send the data always after BA sends the proper address frames. If the sender is an AC80 station, it should contain a respective MB90TRA PC element or if some other type of station, contain a respective sending DSP element. This mechanism makes it possible, that MB90REC can for MB90REC to be able to indicate at ERRC pin, why the data was not received: Either address frames from the BA or actual CDP data from the sending station were missing. MB90REC captures from AF100 the CDP telegrams tagged with the specified signal address. The signal address is computed using the STATION and IDENT parameters. To enable the receive function of a communication port, the STATION and IDENT of the MB90REC PC element must equal the station and ident numbers found in the sending block.
10 - 24
Additionally, the length of the telegram must equal the length specified by the transmitting block. Identical values for call parameters (which effectively specify CDP length) should be therefore used in transmitting and receiving ends (mismatching length specification may disable the bus coupler to receive the CDPs, although they contained correct signal address). The STATION parameter of the MB90REC must be equal to the STNNO value of PM825 (AF100 part of it) DB element in the sending station. The IDENT parameter must be equal to IDENT of the sending MB90TRA. RDY is set (to 1) if a new CDP telegram was transferred after the previous execution, and the output terminals were updated. Updating of output data (and all other output pins as well) can be temporarily or permanently disabled by clearing the input ACT = 0. Error code ERRC, if set for any reason, can be cleared only by a rising edge (=transition 0 -> 1) at ACT pin. Boolean values must be unpacked from integers (I) or long integers (IL). Packed booleans DAT(B) or DAT(NB) from DSPs of other Advant Controller types must be unpacked from long integers. Short integers (I) within a CDP are assumed to be 2 bytes long, and pcked without paddings. This makes MB90REC incompatible with DSPs of other Advant Controller types, where DAT(I) is placed into CDPs so, that it takes 4 bytes space. Therefore we have also different restriction for call parameter C1 (C1 must be <= 16, whereas in AFREC it must be <= 8). If the sending DSP contains DAT(II) or DAT(NI), they can be received in AC80 by MB90REC as individual short integers (presuming that they reside in DSP before any DAT(IL) or DAT(R)). The order of the data in the CDP received by the MB90REC PC element is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of this rule, when assembling DSPs in other Advant Controller stations, if they should be receivable by AC80. If receiving integers (I) sent by AFTRA, C1 of MB90REC shall be twice the value of AFTRA, and every second (I)-type output of MB90REC will be continuously = 0. (However such communication (AFTRA -> MB90REC) is never necessary (or should not be used) between two APC or AC80 stations).
10 - 25
Fault Handling
The ERR output is set (to 1) when a new reception does not occur within 4 receiving intervals (or within 4 execution intervals, if the respective DSP is missing from the DB-part). A diagnostic error code is loaded to output ERRC (see table 3). The ERR output will reset (to 0) or set (to 1) depending on the communication status, but the last error code will always remain at the ERRC output even when ERR is reset (ERRC is assumed to be cleared during the next restart of the station, or by a 0-pulse in the ACT-pin.) A mismatch between the NODE value and hardware switch settings disables all CDP communications from and to the station. However, service communications to the station are still possible via AF100. During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not been received from the bus administrator and is not an error condition. Error code 3402 is also a normal thing after start-up, because BA does not send proper address frames for MB90REC before respective CDP is configured there by the sending station, and this may happen after MB90TRA became active. Look always ERR pin before you worry about ERRC contents.
Event Triggering
In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC, AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC elements that specifies an interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and start an event driven application task in the station. A MB90REC or MB90TRA PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with respect to data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was positive. The bus administrator does not know of the existence of CDP interrupts. MB90REC will be typically used. to specify the triggering CDP, although MB90TRA may be used as well. In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM that is executed due to interrupts from AF100. This CONTRM must have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined as 2 (AF100 interrupts).
10 - 26
The event triggering MB90REC PC element will normally reside inside the event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between the physical data reception and the actual updating of the output pins of the MB90REC PC element. The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur: the respective CDP communication port will be disabled no AF100 interrupts will be generated the event task will no longer be executed if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM then setting ACT (to 1 from 0) will have no effect, because the MB90REC is never executed and therefore never detects the change of ACT signal. (If the MB90REC element is outside the event driven task, then setting the ACT input (to 1 from 0) will reenable events to be triggered.)
Type Circuits
AF_INW type circuits are available to make it easier to insert both MB90REC and respective DSP into AC80 application. AF_INW will only insert respective DSP, but connect it to common DAT(IL) element named DUMMYDAT and do not update it is content. DUMMYDAT must be inserted into DB-part before AF_INW can be inserted anywhere in PC-part of the application. Note: If you need such a CDP, which has dedicated DATs for each contained data items, you shall build it from elementary blocks, or use type circuit AFIN, which however always uses PC element AFREC (and never MB90REC).
10 - 27
DataSet Transmitter for AF100 MB90TRA

Summary
MB90TRA
MB90TRA MB90TRA element is used to send cyclic F1 IDENT ERR 10 dataset (=CDPs) to the Advant Field Bus SCAN F2 ACT 1 AF100 (old name of the bus was sometimes MB90, that is explanation for the name). The ERRC 21 I1 99 data values are updated in the bus coupler 20+... I... memory each time the PC element is 20+C1 I*C1 IL1 executed. The actual cyclic transmission of 51 50+... IL... the data is however independent of the PC IL*C2 50+C2 element execution. The sending interval is 71 R1 configured by this block. Data types within 70+... R... the packet are indicated by the call 70+C3 RC3 parameters and can be I, IL, or R, and Figure 1. should equal the call parameters of the respective receiving MB90REC PC elements (or DSP DB elements if the receiving station is not APC or AC80). MB90TRA element should be always accompanied with respective DSP in DB part of the application (in order to enable AF100 BusConfiguration tools to summarize various CDPs in each station). The MB90TRA PC element can be used to trigger execution of event driven task. (=CONTRM (2,255,0)) The main (and only) difference of MB90TRA and AFTRA is in the way, they deal with short integer data. (see below)
MB90TRA (C1,C2,C3) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 C3 Number of I values. Number of IL values. Number of R values. Where: 0 C1 2 Permissible values 0...16 0...8 0...8
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 Name IDENT SCAN Type II II Description Data packets IDENTity number. Transmission interval. Values 1...50 1 = active
10 - 28
C2
C3
16
Table 2 continued
No Name Type Description Values
1 10 21 . . . 20+C1 . . . 51 . . . 50+C2 71 . . . 70+C3 99
ACT ERR I1 IC1 IL1 ILC2 R1 RC3 ERRC
IB OB II II IIL IIL IR IR OI
Input. ACTivates dataset transmission. Communication ERRor. Input. I value number 1. Input. I value number C1. Input. IL value number 1. Input. IL value number C2. Input. R value number 1.
1 = active
Input. R value number C3. see Table 4. ERRor Code.
SCAN Values
Table 3.
Value of SCAN 1 2 3..5 6...11 12...23 24...47 48...95 96...191 192...383 384...767 768...1535 1536...3071 3072...4096 Actual used Transmission Interval used 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096
Error Codes
Table 4.
Error # Description
Communication startup errors: 3002 Bus coupler self-test failed. 3003 Not enough memory available in system RWM.
10 - 29
Table 4 continued
Error # 3004 3005 Description
AF100 bus coupler not configured by PM825 DB element. Station address in the hardware is equal to the STNNO value of PM825 AF100 part. 3101 Signal address already reserved (by another PC element in the same AC80). 3103 Illegal IDENT value. 3104 Illegal length or SCAN value of CDP. 3105 Multiple interrupting CDPs specified. 3106 Respective DSP missing from DB part. 3107 Respective DSP specified different scan time. 3108 Respective DSP specified different CDP length. 3109 Respective DSP specified different transfer direction. 3201 Too many CDPs used in this station. 3301 Time slots cannot be allocated for the CDP. 3302 CDP identifier reserved by another station. 3401 Time-out waiting for a BA to request or to confirm the CDP configuration. Run time errors (may occur even after successful start-up): 3402 Time-out waiting for address frames from the BA. When recorded in the error logs, the first two digits of an error code (above) are translated to text: 3000...3099 MB90 START FAILED 3100...3199 MB90 DATASET REJ. 3200...3299 MB90 FULL (LOCAL) 3300...3399 MB90 FULL (GLOBAL) 3400...3499 MB90 PARTNER FAIL 3500...3599 MB90 DISTURBANCE
Function
Upon initialization the MB90TRA PC element: checks that the PM825 DB-element has specified the AF100 bus coupler checks the working condition of the bus coupler checks the legality of the IDENT and SCAN parameters checks that respective DSP is inserted into DB part of application allocates a communication port for the CDP.
The CDP is introduced to the Bus Administrator. After approval, the transmission of the CDP is started after a while (=not immediately), and repeated at intervals determined by the parameter SCAN.
10 - 30
Time-out of approval message and/or disappearance of cyclic time slots for the CDP (=disappearance of respective address frames from the BA) will be detected and signaled at MB90TRA error pins. The CDP configured by a MB90TRA PC element can be received by MB90REC PC element in other AC80s or APCs or by a DSP database element in other Advant Controller stations. Each MB90TRA IDENT value should be unique for a station. To be received correctly there should be at the other end of a link a receiver block MB90REC with identical call parameter and IDENT values. The STATION value of the receiving block must equal the station number of the transmitting AC80. The station numbers of transmitting stations are declared using the STNNO parameter of the DB element PM825. The matching address value must be also set physically in the AC80 hardware using the provided rotary switches in front panel. Allowed address range is 1 ... 79, and the station number must match STNNO parameter defined in PM825. Otherwise it is impossible to even download the application into the AC80. (Note: Hardware address is set up as decimal number: tens with upper switch ones with lower switch) SCAN determines the transmission interval for the CDP on AF100 (i.e., how often the data values are transmitted). See table 3 for possible values. The transmission interval can be clearly shorter than the execution interval of MB90TRA, provided there is capacity on AF100. (Or the opposite case, if AF100 is severely loaded and there is free capacity available in AC80, MB90TRA execution interval may be much shorter than than the CDP transfer interval.) Transmission can be initially and/or dynamically deactivated by reseting (to 0) the input ACT. Even then the MB90TRA PC element will present a CDP to the bus administrator and a communication port is locally reserved in the bus coupler memory for the CDP. However, the transmit function associated with the signal address will be disabled, and therefore the receiving blocks in other stations will show an error.
10 - 31
Boolean values must be packed into integers ( I ) or long integers (IL). Packed booleans intended for Advant Controller stations (= for DAT(B)s in DSPs) must be packed to long integers with CONV-BI before connecting to MB90TRA input. Short integer data items sent by MB90TRA occupy only 2 bytes each. (In all other respects MB90TRA functions are equal to AFTRA.) The order of the data in the CDP sent by the MB90TRA PC element is always: I values, IL values, and then R values. It is important to keep track of this rule, when transmitting to other Advant Controller stations.
Fault Handling
The ERR output is set (to 1) when a transmission does not occur within 4 sending intervals as defined by SCAN pin of the PC element. A diagnostic error code is loaded to output ERRC (see table 4). The ERR output will reset (to 0) or set (to 1) depending on the communication status, but the last error code will always remain at the ERRC output even when ERR is reset (ERRC is assumed to be cleared during the next restart of the station or by a zero-pulse in the ACT-pin). A mismatch between the STNNO value of PM825 and hardware switch settings disables all CDP communication from and to the station. However, service communication to the station is still possible via AF100. During communication start-up the ERRC output may contain the value -1. This indicates only that the configuration message has not been received from the bus administrator and is not an error condition. Error code 3402 is also a normal thing after start-up, because BA does not start sending proper address frames for MB90TRA immediately after it sent acknowledgement message about the CDP configuration. Look always ERR pin before you worry about ERRC contents.
Event Triggering
In each AC80 station there can be one (and only one) AFREC, AFTRA, MB90REC, or MB90TRA PC element that specifies an interrupting CDP. A negative value on the IDENT input is used to denote that the transfer of the CDP should cause an interrupt and start an event driven application task in the station. A MB90REC or MB90TRA PC element with a negative IDENT input will operate, with respect to data transfer, exactly the same as if the IDENT was positive. The bus administrator does not know of the existence of CDP interrupts. MB90TRA may be used to specify the event triggering CDP, although AFREC or MB90REC will be typically used.
10 - 32
In each AC80 station there can be only one control module CONTRM that is executed due to interrupts from AF100. This CONTRM must have C2 defined as 255 (denotes event driven task) and C1 defined as 2 (AF100 event task). The event triggering MB90TRA PC element will normally reside inside the AF100 event driven CONTRM. This minimizes the delay between the physical data transmitted and the actual updating of data for next transmission (=maximizes the time, how long updated data waits for transfer along the bus, and makes that time constant = c. scan time of the CDP). Note: that the first event caused by the MB90TRA is generated after the configuration message is received from the Bus Administrator. This first event does not signify that actual data has been sent from this MB90TRA by the AF100 bus coupler. The input ACT of the interrupting CDP PC element must never be reset (to 0), otherwise the following deadlock situation will occur: the respective CDP communication port will be disabled no AF100 interrupts will be generated the event task will no longer be executed if the AF100 PC element is contained under the event CONTRM then setting ACT (to 1 from 0) will have no effect, because the MB90TRA is never executed and therefore never detects the change of ACT signal. (If the MB90TRA element is outside the event driven task, then setting the ACT input (to 1 from 0) will reenable events to be triggered.)
Type Circuits
AF_OUTW type circuit is available to make it easier to insert both MB90TRA and respective DSP into AC80 application. AF_OUTW will only insert respective DSP, but connect it to common DAT(IL) element named DUMMYDAT and do not update it is content. DUMMYDAT must be inserted into DB-part before AF_OUTW can be inserted anywhere in PC-part of the application. Note: If you need such a CDP, which has dedicated DATs for each contained data items, you shall build it from elementary blocks, or use type circuit AFOUT, which however always uses PC element AFTRA (and never MB90TRA).
10 - 33
Minimum Selector
Summary
MIN (MINimum selector) is used to select the lowest value of an optional number of integers or real numbers.
MIN(C1,C2) 1 11 12 10+C2 DEADB IA1 IA2 IAC2
MIN
A O
30 31
MIN (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Data Type Number of inputs
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 11 12 Name Type Description DEADBand. Input for deadband. Input Address 1. Input which is compared with the other inputs. Input Address 2. Input which is compared with the other inputs. Input Address C2 Input which is compared with the other inputs. Address. Output for the number of the input having the lowest value. Output. Output for the least value.
DEADB IC1 IA1 IC1 IA2 IC1
. . . 10 + C2 IAC2 30 31 A O
IC1 OI OC1
Function
The values at the inputs IA1 .. IAC2 are compared and the lowest value is written to the output O. The number of the input with the lowest value is written to the output A. If the two lowest signal values are equal when the element is executed for the first time, the signal with the lowest input number is selected.
10 - 34
Deadband
The deadband specified at the input DEADB is symmetrical around the value of the lowest input. The upper and lower deadband limits are calculated from the value for the lowest input in the preceding execution cycle. To prevent rapid changes at the output A, the value at A is retained until the value at the corresponding input exceeds the calculated upper deadband or until one of the other inputs falls below the lower deadband limit.
1 2 3 4
Sample n 2 4 1 3
Signal 1 = lowest
Signal 1 is still seen as lowest
Signal 2 = lowest
Sample n + 3 DEADB
Signal 4 = lowest
Signal 4 is still seen as lowest
Sample n + 5 4
DEADB 1 2
Signal 4 is still seen as lowest 3
Sample n + 6
Signal 4 = lowest DEADB
Figure 2. Example of Function with Deadband.
10 - 35
ModBus Read
Summary
MODR
MODR MODR PC element can be used for reading data 1 STATION from a remote device through ModBus. AC80 2 REGADDR station shall be always the master station and the 3 ACTIVE ERR remote device is a slave station. MODR is always 4 >RESET included in the standard PC element set of AC80. OUT1 In other words, it does not presume Embedded OUT2 OUT3 ModBus option to be loaded. But in stead of OUT4 MVICHAN DB element, MODR presumes insertion ERRC of PANBUS DB element in DataBase part of the AC80 application. Figure 1.
10
21 22 23 24 99
MODR(C1) Table 1.
Parameter Description C1 Number of output pins (= data length of the message in words) Permissible values (1...32)
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 Name STATION REGADDR Type II II Description STATION number of the remote device on ModBus.. Internal REGister ADDress in Remote station, from where the data should be red (0...9998 if large address mode, otherwise 0...998). 1 = Enables operations 1 = Clear ERRC ERRor First data OUTput pin Last data OUTput pin. ERRor Code.
1 2 10 21 . . . 20+C1 99
ACTIVE RESET ERR OUT1 OUTC1 ERRC
IB IB OB OI OI OI
10 - 36
Function
The PC element can read data from the remote device using ModBus function code 04 (= Read Input Registers). The station address of the remote device is given in pin F1 (=STATION). The start address for reading is given through pin F2 (= REGADDR) and this value should contain the Base Address 3001 (=Small Address Mode) or 30001 (=Large Address Mode) depending on the value Param1 of PANBUS DB element. Param1 = 0 causes large addresses to be used and Param1 = 1 respectively small addresses. The base address is subtracted from REGADDR when the actual ModBus telegram is created. Note that all MODR and MODW elements must use same Address Mode (Small or Large, but not mixed). This restriction comes from fact, that it is possible to have only one PANBUS instance in the system, and it has only one PARAM1 pin. The dataset must consist of integers. No other data type is supported. The number of integers is given by C1. And respectively an output pin is created for each of them. The first integer is read from register of REGADDR, the next from REGADDR+1 etc. ACTIVE input pin selects whether new inquiries are sent or not (and whether new responses are used to update the output pins.) ACTIVE = 0 will disable all functions of MODR. RESET input pin is used for clearing the error code in ERRC output pin.
Error Codes
The error codes for station #1 are 25100..., for station number #2 they are 25200... etc. The last two digits indicate the found error type: Table 3.
Error # 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description DB element PANBUS missing from application. Too many different STATIONs accessed (=no control blocks available any more). Too many elements per STATION (= no buffers available any more). Attempted to delete nonexisting buffer (this error should never occur). ModBus handler not found (this error should never occur). Illegal size of ModBus buffer. Access to ModBus block denied. Error response from the remote device. No response from the remote device. Remote station too busy to handle msg. (Cannot detect).
10 - 37
ModBus Write
Summary
MODW PC element can be used for writing data to a remote device through ModBus. AC80 station shall be always the master station and the remote device is a slave station. MODW is always included in the standard PC element set of AC80. In other words, it does not presume Embedded ModBus option to be loaded. But in stead of MVICHAN DB element, MODW presumes insertion of PANBUS DB element in DataBase part of the AC80 application. MODW (C1) Table 1.
Parameter Description C1 Number of input pins (= data length of the message in words).
MODW
MODW STATION REGADDR ACTIVE >RESET IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 ERRC 99 ERR 10
F=1-F1 F=1-F2 1 2 21 22 23 24
Figure 1.
Permissible values (1...32)
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 Name STATION REGADDR Type II II Description STATION number of the remote device on ModBus. Internal REGister ADDress in Remote station, from where the data should be red. (0...9998 if large address mode, otherwise 0...998). 1 = Enables operations 1 = Clear ERRC ERRor First data INput pin. Last data INput pin. ERRor Code.
1 2 10 21 . . . 20+C1 99
ACTIVE RESET ERR IN1 INC1 ERRC
IB IB OB OI OI OI
Function
The PC element can write data to the remote device using ModBus function code 16 (= Preset Multiple Registers). The station address of the remote device is given in pin F1 (=STATION).
10 - 38
The start address for writing is given through pin F2 (= REGADDR) and this value should contain the Base Address 4001 (=Small Address Mode) or 40001 (=Large Address Mode) depending on the value Param1of PANBUS DB element. Param1 = 0 causes large addresses to be assumed and Param1 = 1 respectively small addresses. The base address is subtracted from REGADDR when the actual ModBus telegram is created. Note that all MODR and MODW blocks must use same Address Mode (Small or Large, but not mixed). This restriction comes from the fact that it is possible to have only one PANBUS instance in the system, and it has only one PARAM1 pin. The dataset must consist of integers. No other data type is supported. The number of integers is given by C1. And respectively an input pin is created for each of them. The first integer is written to register of REGADDR, the next to REGADDR+1 etc. ACTIVE input pin selects whether new update messages are sent or not. ACTIVE = 0 will disable all functions of MODW. RESET input pin is used for clearing the error code in ERRC output pin.
Error Codes
The error codes for station #1 are 25100..., for station number #2 they are 25200... etc. The last two digits indicate the found error type: Table 3.
Error # 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description DB element PANBUS missing from application. Too many different STATIONs accessed (=no control blocks available any more). Too many elements per STATION (= no buffers available any more). Attempted to delete nonexisting buffer (this error should never occur). ModBus handler not found (this error should never occur). Illegal size of ModBus buffer. Access to ModBus block denied. Error response from the remote device. No response from the remote device. Remote station too busy to handle msg. (Cannot detect).
10 - 39
Mono Function
Summary
The MONO element can be used for limiting or extending of the time for which a Boolean value is set (time for which the Boolean value is 1).
MONO
MONO RTG I TP
1 2 3
O TE
5 6
Call Connections
MONO
Table 1.
No 1 Name RTG Type IB Description
Figure 1.
2 3 5
I TP O
IN IT OB
TE
OT
ReTrigG. Input to select whether or not the MONO function is to be retriggerable. If RTG is set, a retriggerable function is selected. Input. Input for starting the MONO function when the input changes from 0 to 1. Time Pulse. Input for setting the pulse time. Output. Output which is set when the MONO function starts and resets (to 0) when the time TP has elapsed. Time Elapsed. Output for time elapsed when O is set. When the set time (TP) has elapsed, TE will stop.
Function
When the value of input I is changed from 0 to 1, the output O is set (to 1) and a timer is started. The output O is reset (to 0) when the time TP has elapsed.
O 5
&
TP
T TE
R TE 6
>1
1 3 RTG TP
10 - 40
MONO Function, Not Retriggerable
If the input RTG is reset (value is 0), the MONO function is not retriggerable. If a new pulse occurs at the input I before the time TP has elapsed, it does not affect the timer. Only after the time TP has elapsed and the output O is reset can the MONO function be restarted. If RTG is set (value is 1), a retriggerable MONO function is selected, i.e. the timer starts from 0 each time a new pulse occurs at the input I.
MONO Function, Retriggerable
0 TP = 4 s RTG = 0
10
Figure 3. Time Diagram for the MONO Function, not Retriggerable.
0 TP = 2 s RTG = 1
10
Figure 4. Time Diagram for the MONO Function, Retriggerable.
10 - 41
Element for Copying Data

Summary
MOVE copies the value at the inputs to the corresponding outputs. MOVE (C1, C2) Table 1.
MOVE
MOVE (C1,C2) 1 2 C2 21 22 20+C2
Figure 1.
Permissible values
C1 C2
Data type Number of inputs and outputs
B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...19
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C2 21 22 . . . 20+C2 Name Type IC1 IC1 Description Input for value 1. Input for value 2.
IC1 OC1 OC1
Input for value C2 Output for value 1. Output for value 2.
OC1
Output for value C2.
Function
The element copies the values at the inputs to the respective outputs. The type of data to be moved is determined by the call parameter C1. The number of values moved is determined by the call parameter C2.
10 - 42
Multiplier
Summary
MUL (MULtiplier) is used for multiplication of up to 19 integers or real numbers.
1 2
C2
MUL
*
20
C1
MUL (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Data type Number of inputs Permissible values I, IL, R 2...19
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 : . . C2 20 Name Type IC1 IC1 IC1 OC1 Description Input for multiplicand. Input for multiplier Input for multiplier. Output for product.
Function Overflow
The values at the inputs 1 ... C2 are multiplied and the product is stored at the output 20. If the maximum positive or negative value is exceeded, the output is limited to the highest or lowest allowable value for the data type.
10 - 43
Integer Scaling Element

Summary
MULtiplier DIVider element is used to scale an integer value by dividing the product of two integers with a third value.
MULDIV
MULDIV I O MUL REM DIV
1 2 3
10 11
Figure 1.
Call Connections
MULDIV Table 1.
No 1 2 3 10 11 Name I MUL DIV O REM Type IIL IIL IIL OIL OIL Description Input for multiplicand Input for MULtiplier. Input for DIVisor Output for quotient. Output for REMainder.
Function
The product of inputs I and MUL is divided by the input DIV. The quotient is loaded to the output O and the remainder to the output REM. The element uses internal 32-bit accuracy. If the maximum positive value is exceeded then the output O is limited to +32767. If the minimum negative value is exceeded then the output O is limited to -32768.
Overflow
10 - 44
Multiplexer for Text

Summary
MUltipleXer Array with Integer address is a PC element used as a selector for text arrays. An optional number of inputs can be specified as well as the number of characters in the text arrays. MUXA-I (C1,C2) Table 1.
Parameter Description C1 C2 Number of inputs. Number of characters in the arrays.
MUXA-I
MUXA-I (C1,C2) A AERR
11
31 .. 30+C2
IA1 .. IA*C2
50
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 5 Name AERR Type OB Description Address ERRor. Set (to 1) when input A is greater than call parameter C1 or a negative value. Address. Selection of which input value should be stored at the output O. If the value is 0 a blank text is stored at the output. Input Address 1. The first input in the selector. Input Address 2. The second input in the selector. Input Address x...
11
II
31 32 . . 30+ C1 50
IA1 IA2 IAx
IAC2 IAC2 IAC2
IAC1 O
IAC OAC2
Input Address C1. The last input in the selector. Output. Output from the selector.
Function
The text string at the input (IA1...IAC1), specified by the input address A (1...C1), is stored at the output O. If A is 0, then a blank text string is loaded at O. The value of the input address A is checked each execution of the PC element. If it is greater than the number of outputs specified by the call parameter C1 or it is a negative number, then the AERR output is set (to 1). A blank text string is loaded at output O.
Supervision
10 - 45
Multiplexer with Integer Address

Summary
MUX-I (MUltipleXer - with Integer address) is used as a selector. The data type can be integers, real numbers, Boolean variables or time
MUX-I
MUX-I (C1,C2) 11 31 32 30+C2 A IA1 IA2 IAC2 AERR O 5 50
MUX-I (C1,C2) Figure 1. Table 1.

Parameter Description Permissible values
C1 C2
Data type Number of inputs
B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...19
Connections
Table 2.
5 11 31 32 . . . 30 +C2 50
AERR A IA1 IA2
OB IIL IC1 IC1
Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when the address value is greater than the number of outputs, or negative. Address. Input for address value that specifies which input is to be connected to the output O. When A = 0, the output is set to 0. Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector. Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector.
IAC2 O
IC1 OC1
Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the selector. Output. Data output from the selector.
Function
Addressing
The input data value (IA1 .. IAC2) connected to the output O is specified with an address (integer 1 .. C2) at the input A. If the address is 0, the data value 0 is connected to the output O.
10 - 46
Supervision
The address A is monitored and if its value is greater than the number of inputs or negative, the error output AERR is set. The data value 0 is then written to the output O.
11 A1
A > C2 or A<0 test
AERR 5
D =0 31 IA1 32 IA2 30 + C2 IAC2
A0
O 50
10 - 47
Multiplexer with Memory and Integer Address

Summary
MUX-MI (MUltipleXer - with Memory and Integer address) is used as a selector with memory function. The data type can be integers, real numbers, Boolean variables or time.
MUX-MI
MUX-MI (C1,C2) S AERR L R A IA1 IA2 IAC2 O
1 2 3 11 31 32
50
MUX-MI (C1,C2) Table 1.

30+C2
Figure 1.
Permissible values
C1 C2
B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...19
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description Set. Input for loading of new values each time the element is executed. When the input S is reset, the last value loaded will remain at the output. Load. Dynamic input for loading of the data addressed. Reset. Input for resetting the output. This input overrides inputs S and L. Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when the address value is greater than the number of outputs, or negative. Address. Input for address value which specifies from which input data is to be loaded to the output O. When A = 0, the output is set to 0. Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector. Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector. Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the selector. Output. Data output from the selector.
2 3 5
L R AERR
IB IB OB
11
II
31 IA1 32 IA2 . . . 30 + C2 IAC2 50 O
IC1 IC1 IC1 OC1
10 - 48
Function
Addressing
The input data value (IA1 .. IAC2) stored to the output O is specified with an address (integer 1 .. C2) at the input A. If the address is 0, the data value 0 is stored to the output O. The value is loaded when the input L is set. If input S is set, new data is loaded each time the element is executed. When S is reset after having been set, the data most recently loaded remains until the element is executed with one of the inputs S, L or R set. The input S overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect. Setting the input R clears the data output and prevents further storage of data. The address A is monitored and if its value is greater than the number of inputs, or negative, the error signal output AERR is set. The data value 0 is then stored to the output.
Loading
11 A1
AERR 5
D =0 A0 31 IA1 32 IA2 30 + C2 IAC2 1 S 2 L 3 R
O 50
10 - 49
Multiplexer with Memory and 1-of-N Address

Summary
MUX-MN (MUltipleXer - with Memory and 1-of-N address) is used as a selector with memory function. The data type can be integers, real numbers, Boolean variables or time.
MUX-MN
MUX-MN (C1,C2) AERR S
1 2 3
11 12 10+C2 31 32 30+C2
L R
A1 A2 AC2 IA1 IA2 IAC2
50
MUX-MN (C1,C2) Figure 1. Table 1.

C1 C2
B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...16
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description Set. Input for loading of new values each time the element is executed. When the input S is reset, the last value loaded will remain at the output. Load. Dynamic input for loading of the data addressed. Reset. Input for resetting the output. This input overrides inputs S and L. Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when two or more of the inputs A1...AC2 are set. Address 1. Input to store data from the input IA1 to the output O. Address 2. Input to store data from the input IA2 to the output O. Address C2 Input to store data from the input IAC2 to the output O. Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector.
2 3 5 11 12
L R AERR A1 A2
IB IB OB IB IB
. . . 10 + C2 AC2 31 IA1
IB IC1
10 - 50
Table 2 continued
32 IA2 . . . 30 + C2 IAC2 50 O
IC1 IC1 OC1
Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector. Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the selector. Output. Data output from the selector.
Function
Addressing
The input data value (IA1 .. IAC2) stored at the output is specified with the inputs A1 .. AC2. If the input A1 is 1, the value from input IA1 is stored to the output. If A2 is 1, the value from input IA2, etc. If none of the inputs A1 .. AC2 is set to 1, the data value 0 is stored to the output O. The value is loaded when the input L is set. If input S is set, new data is loaded each time the element is executed. When S is reset after having been set, the data most recently loaded remains until the element is executed with one of the input S, L or R set. The input S overrides the input L, i.e. when S is set, L has no effect. Setting the input R clears the data output and prevents further storage of data. If two or more of the inputs A1 .. AC2 are set simultaneously, the output AERR is set and the value from the input which corresponds to the address input set with the lowest number is stored at the output O.
Loading
11 A1 12 A2 10 + C2 AC2 D =0 A0 31 IA1 32 IA2 30 + C2 IAC2 I 1 C R 1 2 AERR 5
1 S 2 L 3 R

test
O 50
10 - 51
Multiplexer with 1-of-N Address

Summary
MUX-N (MUltipleXer - with 1-of-N address) is used as a selector. The data type can be integers, real numbers, Boolean variables or time.
MUX-N
MUX-N
11 12 10+C2 31 32 30+C2
(C1,C2) AERR A1 A2 AC2 IA1 IA2 IAC2
50
MUX-N (C1,C2) Figure 1. Table 1.

C1 C2
B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...19
Connections
Table 2.
No 5 11 12 Name AERR A1 A2 Type Description OB IB IB Address ERRor. Output which is set to 1 when two or more of the inputs A1...AC2 are set. Address 1. Input to store data from the input IA1 to the output O. Address 2. Input to store data from the input IA2 to the output O. Address C2 Input to store data from the input IAC2 to the output O. Input Address 1. Input number 1 to the selector. Input Address 2. Input number 2 to the selector. Input Address C2. Input number C2 to the selector. Output. Data output from the selector.
. . . 10 + C2 AC2 31 IA1 32 IA2 . . . 30 + C2 IAC2 50 O
IB IC1 IC1 IC1 OC1
10 - 52
Function
Addressing
The value of the input address IA1 ... IAC2, which corresponds to the lowest address A1 ... AC2 that is set (to 1), is connected to the output O. If none of the inputs A1 ... AC2 is set, then the data value 0 is written to the output O.
Supervision
If two or more of the inputs A1 .. AC2 are set simultaneously, the output AERR is set and the value from the input which corresponds to the lowest address is stored to the output O.
11 A1 12 A2 10 + C2 AC2 D =0 31 IA1 32 IA2 30 + C2 IAC2 A0 2 AERR 5
test
O 50
10 - 53
Or Gate
Summary
OR is used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
1 2 C1
OR
OR 20
OR (C1) Table 1.
Figure 1.
Permissible values
C1
Number of inputs
2...19
Connections
Table 2.
1 2 . . C1 20
. . -
IB IB . . IB OB
Input Input . . Input Output
Function
The output signal is set to 1 if any of the inputs 1..C1 is 1. See the truth table below. Table 3. Truth table OR (3)
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 20 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 - 54
Or Gate
Summary
OR with AND gates on the inputs is used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
1
OR-A
>1
60
C1 11
10+C2 51
&
&
OR-A (C1,C2,C3...Cn) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 C3 . . . Cn
50+C6
Figure 1.
Permissible values
Number of inputs in the OR part of the 0...9 element. Number of inputs in the first AND gate of 0...9 the element. Number of inputs in the second AND 0...9 gate of the element. Number of inputs in the last AND gate of 0...9 the element. Where: 1 n 6
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 11 12 Name Type IB IB Description Input direct to the OR gate in the element. Input direct to the OR gate in the element. Input direct to the OR gate in the element.
IB IB IB
Input direct to the OR gate in the element Input to the first AND gate in the element. Input to the first AND gate in the element.
C1
C 2 ... Cn

40
10 - 55
Table 2 continued
No . . . 10+C2 21 22 . . . 10*(n-1)+1 10*(n-1)+2 . . . 10*(n-1)+Cn 60 Name Type IB Description
IB IB IB IB
Input to the first AND gate in the element. Input to the second AND gate in the element. Input to the second AND gate in the element. Input to the second AND gate in the element. Input to the last AND gate in the element. Input to the last AND gate in the element. Input to the last AND gate in the element
IB IB IB
IB OB
Input to the last AND gate in the element. Output
Function
This function provides faster execution than if separate elements are used. The inputs only need to be tested until the value of the output can be determined. If input 1 is 1 then the output can be set (to 1) irrespective of all other inputs. See the example of OR-A (3,3,3) as shown in figure 1 and in table 3. Table 3. Truth table AND-O (3)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x 11 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x 12 0 x x x 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 x x x 13 0 x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 x x x 21 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 x x x x x x 22 1 x 0 1 x 0 1 x 0 x x x x x 23 1 x x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x x x x 60 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
x indicates that the input has no effect on the value of the output or the execution time of the PC element.
10 - 56
Oscillator
Summary
Oscillator OSC-B (OSCillator -Boolean variables) with variable frequency and pulse time is used when pulse trains with periods from 2 x cycle time up to 14 hours are needed. OSC-B Table 1.
No 1 2 3 5 Name EN TP TC O Type IB IT IT OB Description
OSC-B
OSC-B EN TP TC
1 2 3
Call Connections
Figure 1.
ENable. Input for start of oscillator. Time Pulse. Input for setting of pulse time. Time Cycle. Input for setting of period. The period must be greater than the pulse duration. Output. Oscillator output.
Function
The oscillator starts when the input EN is set (to 1).
10 - 57
Oscillator for Sine Wave

Summary
OSCillator - SINe wave element is used to generate a sinusoidal signal. The period and amplitude are controlled by the inputs. OSC-SIN Table 1.
No 1 2 3 5 6 Name EN TC AMP O ERR Type IB ITR IR OR OB Description
OSC-SIN
OSC-SIN EN TC AMP
1 2 3
O ERR
5 6
Call Connections
Figure 1.
ENable. Input for activation of sine wave generation. Time Cycle. Input for period. AMPlitude. Input for amplitude. Output. Output for sine wave. ERRor. Output which is set (to 1) if the period TC is undersized.
Function
If EN is set (to 1) then the OSCSIN function block generates a AMP sinusoidal wave with period TC and amplitude AMP, as shown in figure 2. The sine wave is created TC from a table with 256 values per period. If EN is reset (to 0) the output O is Figure 2. General Waveform. cleared. When EN is set to 1 after having been 0, the sine wave begins from t=0. If the PC element is executed with a time period TC less than 20 times the cycle time of the function block, then the output ERR is set to 1. If the cycle time is less than the period TC, the output O is cleared (to 0).
Supervision
10 - 58
Panel Control PC Element

Summary
PANC controls one CDP80 panel. CDP80 has 16 push buttons and a display with four 20 character lines. PANC reads the pressing of the panel push buttons and builds four text lines. The panel operator can switch between 4 operation modes: 1. In internal mode CDP80 parameters can be set, e.g. the node number of the panel. 2. In event mode two events from one event logger are displayed. 3. In signal mode two DATs from a list of DATs are displayed. Figure 1.
F=1-F1 F=1-F2 1 2 20 21
PANC
PANC (10,10) PAN_ID ERR LOGNR RESET CNTRL DAT PAR BUTTONS STATUS DATSTAT DATNAME DATVALI DATVALR PARSTAT PARNAME PARVALI PARVALR ERRC
10 11 12 30 31 32 33 40 41 42 43 99
4. In parameter mode two PARDATs from a list of PARDATs are displayed. Communication with the panel(s) uses ModBus protocol. However, Embedded ModBus option is not necessary to enable. In stead, the application must contain a DB element PANBUS, which must specify 19200 bits/s speed and 8bits/no parity character structure. AC80 is the master station and CDP80s slave stations.
PANC (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Number of DATs Number of PARDATs Permissible values 0...72, default value = 0 0 = not used 0..144, default value = 0 0 = not used
Connections
Table 2.
No F1 F2 1 2 Name PAN_ID LOGNR RESET CNTRL Type II II IB II Description Station address of control panel. ID NumbeR of event LOGger. RESETs the error code, initializes the pointers. Specify optional modes PANC operation. Values 1...15 1...8 0 or 1
10 - 59
Table 2 continued
No 20 21 10 11 12 30 31 32 33 40 41 42 43 99 Name DAT PAR ERR BUTTONS STATUS DATSTAT DATNAME DATVAL1 DATVALR PARSTAT PARNAME PARVAL1 PARVALR ERRC Type IA20 IA20 OB OI OI OI OA20 OIL OR OI OB OIL OR OI Description String mask for DAT elements. String mask for PARDAT elements. ERRor indication outputs. Pressed push BUTTONS code. PANC operation STATUS. STATus of current DAT. NAME of current DAT. VALue of current DAT, if integer. VALue of current DAT, if Real STATus of current PARDAT NAMEof current PARDAT. VALue of current PARDAT, if integer. VALue of current PARDAT, if Real. ERRor Code.
Cycle Time of PANC
PANC generates a panel link message every time it is executed. The panel/printer link ModBus-protocol software operates cyclically at 100ms intervals. One panel is served during one transmission cycle. The cycle time of PANC should not be less than 200ms in order to avoid panel link overload. The cycle time can be 400ms without decline of panel performance. C1 defines the number of DATs that can be handled in signal mode. The DATs are fetched from the symbol table If C1 = 0 signal mode is not enabled. No values are therefore displayed. C2 defines the number ot PARDATs that can be handled in parameter mode. The PARDATs are fetched from the symbol table. If C2 = 0 parameter mode is not enabled. No values are therefore displayed.
Call Parameters
Control Terminal Functions
Terminal F1 (PAN_ID) should match the node number (1 to 15) set on CDP80 in internal mode. In case no panel with corresponding station number is active on the panel link, ERR is set and the error code 2xx05 (no response from panel) is output on ERRC.
Terminal F2 (LOGNR) specifies the logger to which PANC connects. In event mode CDP80 displays two successive events at a time, which can be scrolled. However if event mode is entered from other modes after a new event has occurred, you will first see the latest event alone. (You can scroll backwards to see the other events.)
10 - 60
If no logger with the specified number exists ERR is set and an error code output on ERRC
Terminal 1 (RESET) activates on the rising edge. The current event pointer is set to LAST event The symbol table search is initialized for DATs. The current DAT pointer is set to the first DAT The symbol table search is inititilaise for PARDATs. The current PARDAT pointer is set to the first PARDAT The communication buffer is initialised Terminal ERRC is cleared
Terminal 2 (CNTRL) is used to set special features to operation modes.

Bit # 0 1 Value 0 0x1 0 0x2 0 0x4 Description Display unacknowledged events only. Display all events (acknowledged, too). Display only those DATs, whose name match with string in DAT pin. Display all DATs. Display only those PARDATs, whose name match with string in PAR pin. Display all PARDATs.
Terminal 3 ( DAT ) defines the DAT: NAME mask used at look up. DATs are fetched in alphabetical order from the symbol table If more than C1 symbols exist DATSTAT displays 100 (= C1_TOO_SMALL).
Terminal 4 (PAR) defines the PARDAT: NAME mask used at look up. PARDATs are fetched in alphabetical order from the symbol table If more than C2 symbols exist PARSTAT displays 200 (= C2_TOO_SMALL).
Terminal 10 (ERR) is activated when an error has been detected. Terminal 11 (BUTTONS) displays the push button states. BUTTONS is updated every time PANC is executed. If it is not possible, the rest of PANC execution is bypassed.
10 - 61
The push buttons are shown identifiable by the following codes:

Code 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 -32758 Push Button DAT button PAR button INT button EVT button UP/UP button DOWN/DOWN button UP button DOWN button ENTER/ACK button F1 button F2 button F3 button F4 button F5 button RESTORE button SAVE button
Terminal 12 (STATUS) displays the current PANC status: STATUS_UNKNOWN INTERNAL_MODE SIGNAL_MODE PARAMETER_MODE PARAMETER_EDIT_MODE EVENT_MODE (0) (110) (120) (130) (131) (140)
Terminals 30..33 show current DAT data. Data is updated in signal mode only. If the shown DAT is of I or IL type, it is value is shown in pin 32 and pin 33 = 0 If the DAT is R type, it is value is shown in pin 33 and pin 32 = 0.
Terminals 40..43 show current PARDAT data. Data is updated in parameter mode only. If the shown PARDAT is of I or IL type, it is value is shown in pin 42 and pin 43 = 0 If the PARDAT is R type, it is value is shown in pin 43 and pin 42 = 0.
Terminal 30..43 are intended for diagnostics of panel functions.
10 - 62
Panel Push Button Functions
Push button states are returned from CDP80 in the Button Status Word of an inquiry message. Bits PB1 to PB16 on output terminal BUTTONS indicates the pressing of push buttons 1..16. The pushing of a button generates a pulse at the corresponding bit. Terminal BUTTONS is updated every time PANC is executed.
IN T
PAR
DAT
EVT
E NT A CK
F1
F2
F7
RES T
F3
S AVE
Figure 2. CDP80. Table 3 Push Buttons

Push Button PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 Name DAT PAR INT EVT 2 Up 2 Down Significance Selects Internal mode. Selects Parameter mode. Selects Signal mode. Selects Event mode. Scrolls current display upwards. Scrolls current display downwards. Increase current value. Decrease current value. Activation On rising edge On rising edge On rising edge On rising edge When pushed When pushed Function Exclusive with PB2,PB3, PB4. Exclusive with PB1,PB3, PB4. Exclusive with PB1,PB2, PB4. Exclusive with PB1,PB2, PB3. Exclusive with PB6. Exclusive with PB5. Parameter mode only. Parameter mode only.
PB7 PB8
Up Down
When pushed When pushed
10 - 63
Table 3 Push Buttons continued

Push Button PB9 Name ENTER/ ACK Significance Enter current value or ACKnowledge event(s). Activation On rising edge Function ENTER in Parameter edit mode. ACK in Event mode. Application specific. Application specific. Application specific. Application specific. Application specific. Parameter mode only. Parameter mode only.
PB10 PB11 PB12 PB13 PB14 PB15 PB16
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESTORE
Function Button 1. Function Button 2. Function Button 3. Function Button 4. Function Button 5. Restore PAR data (not abailable yet) Save PAR to PROM
On rising edge On rising edge On rising edge. On rising edge. On rising edge. On rising edge. On rising edge.
SAVE
Function of Buttons
PB1...PB4 are used to change operational mode and switch display: PB1/DAT selects DAT mode (=signal mode) PB2/PAR selects PARDAT mode (=parameter mode) PB3/INT selects internal mode PB4/EVT selects event mode.
Pushing a mode button may change the current mode. The new mode is activated on the display after PANC has detected that operator pressed such button, and sent a message for the first display in the new mode. PANC sends messages for on display mode only. (= for current mode). While switching modes PANC saves position data of the old mode. When the old mode is reentered PANC restores the display according saved data. PB5/2up, PB6/2down are used to scroll up and down: In internal mode the panel configuration parameters In parameter mode the PARDAT list In signal mode the DAT list the current In event mode the event buffer A pointer ( > ) indicates the current item.
10 - 64
PB7/up, PB8/down are used to increase/decrease the value of the current item. In internal mode the value of the current configuration parameter In parameter mode the value of the current PARDAT In signal mode the value of the current DAT (if writable) In event mode: no significance.
PB9/ENTER/ACK is used In internal mode to enter the value of the current configuration parameter In parameter mode to enter the parameter edit mode In parameter edit mode to enter the displayed value into the current PARDAT In event mode to acknowlefge the current event, and all older events.
PB10...PB14 can be freely used for application programming. PB15/RESTORE is used In parameter mode to restore old parameter values from FPROM. (however this function is not yet implemented) In signal and event mode for application programming.
PB16/SAVE is used In parameter mode to write changed PARDAT values to FPROM In signal and event mode for application programming.
Internal Mode
Internal mode is used to: Display and set the station number Display and set the contrast of the panel display Display and set the communication timeout time for the panel Display the version number of the panel.
Internal mode is entered by pressing PB3/INT. Internal mode is exited by pressing PB1 or PB2 or PB4 (= any other button on top row) assuming that a PANC element is active and detects the pressed buttons (i.e. CDP80 panel does not change it is operation mode because an operator requested it, but because the AC80 software did it.) The exception to this rule is: When operator presses PB3/INT, the panel enters immediately internal mode (=just as said above).
10 - 65
The configuration parameter to be set ( station, contrast etc. ) is selected by 2up/2down buttons. The set point is changed with up/down buttons and taken into active use with ENTER/ACK button. The entered station number must match the value of PAN_ID pin to enable PANC to communicate with the panel.
Parameter Mode
Parameter mode is enter by PB2. Parameter mode is exited by PB1 or PB3 or PB4 (or ENTER/ACK). In parameter mode two parameters are displayed. A parameter is represented by 2 lines. The upper line shows the PARDAT: NAME (text string with up to 20 characters) The lower line consists of Arrow indicating current PARDAT data type PARDAT: VALUE right aligned
The parameter mode display can be scrolled with 2up / 2down buttons. The PARDATs are automatically sorted in alphabetical order, and can be scrolled only in such order. By planning suitable prefixes into PARDAT names, the AC80 application designer can arrange the scrolling order of PARDATs. The PAR pin of PANC can be used to make a certain group of PARDATs scrollable. In such case PAR text must end with asterisk *. All those PARDATs, whose name up to asterisk match with PAR are then possible to display and modify. (It is also possible to see/modify other PARDATs on the panel display, but then you need to have bit #2 set in PANC CNTRL pin.) Parameter display example
DR3 > I DR3 NOM POWER KW 300 NOM SPEED RPM 1003
The text on the topmost line is the PARDAT: NAME DR3__NOM_POWER__KW. PARDAT: NAMED underscores will be replaced by spaces on panel display. In parameter mode button states PB10 to PB16 are written to output terminal BUTTONS. However buttons PB15,16 have their special meanings (Restore and Save) in Parameter mode only. In other modes PB15 and PB16 are traded just as PB10...PB14.
10 - 66
Parameter Edit Mode
Parameter edit mode is entered by ENTER/ACK while in Parameter mode. Parameter edit mode is exited with new parameter value by pressing ENTER/ACK or without changing the parameter value by pressing PB1, PB2, PB3 or PB4. Visually you can recognize parameter mode and parameter edit mode from each other, as in edit mode the current parameter value is surrounded by brackets. While in parameter edit mode, the PANC does not update the displayed parameter values at all, but allows you to increase or decrease it is value with PB8/UP and PB9/DOWN buttons. The speed of change increases gradually if you press the button continuously. So you can make big changes with good accuracy and within reasonable time, even if the parameter is a real number.
Event Mode
Event mode is activated by PB4/EVT. Event mode is exited by pushing PB1 or PB2 or PB3. Event mode is enabled if: An Event logger exists, whose number matches LOGNR pin of PANCON The Event logger contains at least one event.
An event is represented by two lines on the CDP80 display. The upper line shows the text assigned to the event (character string with up to 20 characters). The lower line shows date and time (100 us resolution) for the event. Event display example:
DR2 OVERCURRENT + 990324 13:20:24,324 DR2 SWITCHED ON + 990324 13:18:57,678
The shown event and all older events are acknowledged by PB9 (ENT/ACK). So, do not press ENT/ACK before you have looked the older events, too, if you are interested to see them. (It is also possible to see acknowledged events afterwards on the panel display, but then you need to have bit #0 set in PANC CNTRL pin.)
Signal Mode
In Signal mode two variables (= contents of DAT elements) are displayed. The upper line is the DAT: NAME (text string with up to 20 characters). The lower line consists data type value right aligned
10 - 67
The signal mode display can be scrolled with 2up / 2down buttons. The DATs are automatically sorted in alphabetical order, and can be scrolled only in such order. By planning suitable prefixes into DAT names, the AC80 application designer can arrange the scrolling order of DATs. The DAT pin of PANC can be used to make a certain group of DATs scrollable. In such case DAT text must end with an asterisk *. All those DATs, whose name up to asterrisk match with DAT are then possible to display. (It is also possible to see other DATs on the panel display, but then you need to have bit #1 set in PANC CNTRL pin.) Signal display example
DRIVE3 SPEED RPM R 1124.5 DRIVE3 CURRENT A I 1003
The text on the topmost line is DAT: NAME DRIVE3_SPEED___RPM. DAT: NAME underscores have been replaced by spaces on panel display. In signal mode pressing of buttons PB10 to PB16 are shown in output terminal BUTTONS.
Error Codes
Table 4.
Error # 2xx01 2xx02 2xx03 2xx04 2xx05 2xx10 2xx11 2xx12 2xx13 2xx14 2xx15 2xx16 2xx17 Description No database element PANBUS found. No more available node control blocks (= too many nodes) No more available buffers. Attempt to delete none existing buffer (should never happen). Eventlogger not faund. ModBus handler not found. Illegal size of ModBus buffer (should never happen). Access to ModBus element denyed. Error response from the printer. No response from the printer. Station too busy to handle msg. (Cannot be detected). Parameter values not received. Symbol table read error.
10 - 68
Save PARDAT Values to PROM

Summary
PARSAVE
PARSAVE PARSAVE PC element provides means for BUSY 3 1 TRIG controlling the storage of current PARDAT values 2 RDY 4 CNTRL into PROM memory. This PC element was SWAPS 5 6 SAVED considered necessary, because PARDAT values ERRC 99 may be changed continuously by the application program, and therefore automatic storage of new Figure 1. values could happen too frequently and ruin the flashPROM chip. (The flashPROM chips be wearing a little bit each time they are written, and after 10 000...100 000 rewrite cycles they may become permanently burned out.)
Call Connections
PARSAVE Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 99 Name TRIG CNTRL BUSY RDY SWAPS SAVED ERRC Type IB II OB OB OIL OI OI Description TRIGger next save action (0 > 1 sensitive). Options how to save parameters. Is save session active. Has save session become ReaDY. How many times active and passive Segments are SWAPped. How many PARDATs were SAVED this time. ERRor Code.
Functions
Whenever there is positive signal edge (=change from 0 to 1) in pin TRIG and the BUSY pin = 0, a new parameter save sequence will be started. There after you can see when the sequence becomes ready by looking output pins BUSY and RDY. In beginning BUSY changes from 0 to 1, and RDY is set = 0 (RDY might have been 0 already). At the end BUSY changes from 1 to 0, and RDY changes from 0 to 1. CNTRL pin is not (yet) used for anything. BUSY = 1 indicates, that saving has started, but not yet ended. SWAPS shows how many times parameter segments of flashPROM are swapped, i.e. how big the risk is that flash PROM is worn out. SAVED shows how many parameters (=PARDATs) were save. While BUSY=1 SAVED is = 0.
10 - 69
Error Codes
Table 2.
Error # -20482 16 17 18 19 Description = Calling of function PARAM_GetStatus() failed Passed function parameters were wrong FPROM hardware error Error accessing domains Insufficient space for storage
10 - 70
Program Header
Summary
The program header PCPGM is used for the structuring and execution control of the application program of a PC system.
PCPGM
PCPGM(C1,C2) ON RUN R
1 2
Figure 1.
PCPGM (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 Cyclicity in ms Permissible values Allowed values are between 2 ms and 2000 ms in steps of 2 ms. 1...251: Place in the cycle time table cyclic activation. 252: Activation at initialisation after power down.
C2*
Place in the cycle time table and / or scheduling strategy, i.e. Task priority.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 5 Name ON R RUN Type IB IB OB Description CONtrol input which is set (to 1) with normal execution. Reset Input for clearing execution units in the PC program. RUN indidates that the execution units in the PC program may be executed. Values
Function
The PC program is the highest level in the PC program structure. The program is intended to perform a complete control function. The program header PCPGM is used to control the enabling, disabling and resetting of the complete PC program, irrespective of subordinate execution units. The parameter C1 (see table 1) specifies how often the program header is to be executed. Parameter C2 is used to specify the position in the cycle time table which determines the execution order of the execution units with the same cycle time.
10 - 71
The program header cannot have directly subordinate elements. The control inputs ON and R are used to control when and how the complete PC program with subordinate execution units is to be executed. PCPGM itself is always executed, irrespective of the inputs ON and R.
Normal Execution
The input ON must be set to allow the normal execution of subordinate execution. At the start of the execution of subordinate execution units, a check is performed to ensure that the program header has RUN status. If the input R is set, the complete PC program is executed in reset mode. Input R overrides input ON. Output RUN is set only if normal execution is permitted, i.e. if the ON input is set and the R input is reset (to 0).
Clearing RUN
1 ON 2 R &
RUN 5
Supervisory control of execution units
10 - 72
PDP-Function
Summary
PDP (Proportional Derivating Proportional regulator) is used to give proportional effect and limited derivation effect. The output signal can be limited with limit values specified at special inputs. The balancing function permits the output signal to track an external reference and permits a bumpless return to the normal function. All transfers from balancing or from limited output signal are bumpless. PDP Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 Name I K T1 T2 BAL BALREF OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR Type IR IR ITR ITR IB IR IR IR OR OB OB OB Description
PDP I K T1 T2 BAL BALREF OHL OLL
PDP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O O=HL O=LL ERR
10 11 12 13
Figure 1.
Call Connections
Input. Input for actual value. Input for setting gain. Time 1. Input for time constant for lead. Time 2. Input for time constant for lag. BALance. Input for activation of tracking. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when tracking. Output High Limit.Input for lower limit value. Output Low Limit. Output. Output signal. Output=High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O reaches the upper limit value. Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O reaches the lower limit value. ERRor. Output which is set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
K T1 T2
Function
The step response for a PDP function is: O(t) = I(t)(K + k1e-tT2) where k1 = K(T1/T2-1)
K t T2
Figure 2. Step Response.
10 - 73
The transfer function for a PDP function is: G(s) = K(1 +sT1)/(1 +sT2) where T2<T1
IgIGI IgK
1 T2
Ig
This has been implemented in the PDP element as a recursive algorithm. The design of this algorithm is such that normal functioning is maintained even during limiting. This ensures a controlled return to a dynamic state.
T1 G -90
Ig
Gain, Time Constants and Sampling Time
Figure 3. Bode Diagram. Certain constants are precalculated to make the execution time of the element as short as possible. The results are stored internally in the element. These constants are recalculated if T1, T2 or K are changed by more than 1/128 of their previous value, or if the sampling time TS is changed. When recalculating, a test is performed to check whether T1 and T2 > 2 x TS. If not, T1 or T2 respectively is set equal to 2 x TS. If BAL is set to 1, the regulator immediately goes into tracking and the output O is set to value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the limit value. Return to dynamic state is bumpless.
OHL t
Tracking
Figure 4. Function in Limiting State.
Limitation Function
The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the inputs OHL for the upper limit and OLL for the lower limit. If the actual value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. The element checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the value they had in the sample before the error occurred. After an error, the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, as in the case of tracking.
10 - 74
PI-Function
Summary
PI PI (Proportional Integrating regulator) is F1 REVACT used as a standard PI-regulator for serial 1 REFV compensation in feed back systems. The 2 I control deviation is calculated internally in 3 K 4 TI the element. The output signal can be limited to limits specified at special inputs. 5 RINT 6 The balancing function permits the output 7 BAL BALREF signal to track an external reference and 8 OHL permits a bumpless return to normal 9 OLL function. All transfers from balancing Figure 1. limited output signal are bumpless.
PI
O O=HL O=LL ERR DEV
10 11 12 13 14
PI Table 1.
No F1 Name REVACT Type IB Description REVerse ACTion. Parameter input for inverted control action. REVACT = 1 gives inverted control action. REFerence Value. Input for desired value. Input. Input for actual value. Input for setting gain. Time Integration. Input for time constant for integration. Reset INTegrator. Input for clearing integrator. BALance. Input for activation of tracking BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when tracking. Output High Limit. Input for upper limit. Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit. Output Signal. Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O reaches the upper limit value. Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches the lower limit value. ERRor. Output set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL. DEViation. Output for control deviations, i.e. DEV = 1-REFV.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REFV I K T1 RINT BAL BALREF OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR DEV
IR OR IR ITR IB IB IR IR IR OR OB OB OB OR
Function
Control Deviation
DEV, the control deviation, is calculated as follows even when the regulator is tracking: DEV = 1-REFV.
10 - 75
Inverted Control Effect
REVACT is a function parameter which controls the direction of the output signal change in relation to the actual value. If REVACT is set to 0, direct action occurs, i.e. increasing actual value gives increasing output signal. When REVACT is set to 1, inverted action occurs, i.e. increasing actual value gives decreasing output signal.
2K K t T1
Transfer Function
The PI function can be written in the time plane as: O(t) = K(DEV(t) + tDEV()/TI d ) Its main property when controlling is that it permits the integral section to retain its value when the error DEV(t) = 0, i.e. the output signal is then constant. The transfer function for a PI function is: G(s) = K(1 + 1/sTI) This has been implemented in the PI element as a recursive algorithm.
Gain, Integration Time Constant and Sampling Time
IgIGI The constant K x TS/TI is precalculated to make the execution time of the element IgK as short as possible. The Ig result is stored internally in the 1 element. This constant is T1 recalculated if TI or K is G changed more than 1/128 of Ig the preceding value or if the 45 sampling time TS is changed. When the value is -90 recalculated, a test is Figure 3. Bode Diagram. performed to ensure that TS/TI < 1. If not, TS/TI is set to 1.
10 - 76
Clearing of Integrator
The integration section of the algorithm is cleared when RINT goes to 1. If the proportional section of the algorithm exceeds the limits of the output signal, the limit status remains and the internal status is updated in accordance with the section "Bumpless transfer from tracking or limitation". When RINT is set permanently to 1, the element functions as a P-regulator. The integration section of the algorithm is cleared when RINT goes to 1. If the proportional section of the algorithm exceeds the limits of the output signal, the limit status remains and the internal status is updated in accordance with the section "Bumpless transfer from tracking or limitation". When RINT is set permanently to 1, the element functions as a P-regulator. If BAL is set to 1, the regulator immediately goes into tracking and the output O follows the value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value. On return to a normal function the value to the output O during the last sample in tracking remains during one sample time. See below under "Bumpless transfer from tracking or limiting". The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the inputs OHL for upper limit value and OLL for the lower limit value. If the actual value exceeds the upper limit value, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit value, the output O = LL is set to 1. The element checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL. O = LL and O retain the values they had in the sample before the error occurred. Transfer from following status (BAL = 1) or from a limited output signals is bumpless. This is performed by recalculation of internal states, i.e. the integration part according to INT(t) = O(t) - K x DEV(t).
Clearing of Integrator
Tracking
Limitation Function
Bumpless Transfer from Following or Limitation
10 - 77
8 O HL 9 OLL
A CT 6 BA L 7 B AL RE F F1 REVACT 1 R E FV + 2 I 3 K 4 TI 5 R IN T
Alg orit hm
O 10
I1 I1 > I2 I2
A CT O = HL 11 O = LL 12
I1 < I2 I2
A CT P t I t
R e se t Pr es et
I1
I1 I1 < I2 I2
E RR 13
Lim iting 1
A CT
D E V 14
10 - 78
PII Regulator
Summary
PII
PII PII (Proportional Integrating regulator with I O 10 2 Integer calculation) is used as a PI-regulator O=HL 11 K 3 for serial compensation in the closed loop O=LL 4 12 T1 control system where the 16 bit integer ERR 5 13 RESET OPI 14 representation of the parameters and signals is 6 BAL sufficient. Control deviation is an input signal to 7 BALREF 8 OHL the controller. The output signal can be limited 9 OLL to limits specified by input parameters. The Tracking function forces the output signal to Figure 1. follow an external reference. The transfers from Tracking to normal function with PI algorithm is bumpless. Integer calculation inside the element is done with 32 bit resolution (using long Integers) to assure the adequate regulation accuracy.
Call Connections
PII Table 1.
No 2 3 4 5 6 Name I KI TI RESET BAL Type II II II IB IB Description Input deviation. Proportional gain Time Integration constant RESET the regulator outputs OPI and O to 0. BALance. Forcing the output OPI to follow the input reference BALance REFerence input Output High Limit. Output Low Limit. Regulator Output signal. Output signal On High Limit Output signal On Low Limit. ERRor. OHL is less than OLL Output of PI controller before limits. Values -32767...+32767 0...+32767(%) 0...32767 (ms)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BALREF OHL OLL O O=OHL O=OLL ERR OPI
II II II OI OB OB OB OI
32767...+32767 -32767...+32767 -32767...+32767 -32767...+32767
. -32767...+32767
Gain and Integration Time Constant Calibration
The calibration of the Proportional Gain KI is in "%". It means that value KI = 100 corresponds to a multiplication factor of 1.0 (100%). The calibration of the Integration Time Constant TI is directly in millisecond.
10 - 79
Transfer Function
P and I parts of the controller are calculated independently. The PI function can be written in the time plane as:
t O(t) = KI [ I(t)+(1/TI) I(t)dt] 0
2K K t T1
The transfer function of the PI function is:

G(s) = KI[1+1/(sTI)]
This has been implemented in the PII element with a recursive algorithm. The basic form of this algorithm is: 1. INT(k) = INT(k-1) + KII(k)TS/TI 2. = KI I(k) +INT(k) where: TS is an execution interval of the controller INT is the integral component.
IgIGI
IgK Ig 1 T1 G 45 -90
Ig
Figure 3. Bode Diagram.
Clearing the Requlator Output Limitation Function
When the RESET input signal is set to 1 he output of controller is reset to 0 if. The Integrator part of regulator can be cleared by setting input TI to 0. When TI is set again to value other than 0 is transfer bumpless. The OLL and OHL inputs provide the minimum and maximum limit values for the controller output signal. If the actual value exceeds the maximum limit value, then output "O=HL" is set to 1 and if it falls below the minimum limit value,then output "O=LL" is set to 1. The Element also compares OHL with OLL. If OLL value is greater then OHL then the ERR output is set to 1. While the error status persists, the output limits "O=HL", "O=LL" retain the previously accepted values . When BAL input is set to "1" the regulator "O" output is forced to follow the REFerence value from the BALREF input. If the BALREF signal exceeds the output limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value.
Tracking
10 - 80
Bumpless Transfer between Tracking and Normal Mode
The transfer from Tracking mode is bumpless. This is achieved by internal recalculation of the integration part in the tracking mode according to:
INT(k) = O(k)- KII(k)
There is no explicit feature in the regulator to support directly the bumpless transfer to the tracking mode. However such function can be easily implemented, by using the external FB (like e.g. RAMP element) to back feed the "O "output of the controller to its BALREF input.
10 - 81
PIP-Function
Summary
PIP (Proportional Integrating Proportional) is used to give a proportional effect and a limited integration effect. The output signal in the steady state is proportional to the input signal. The output signal can be limited with limit values specified at special inputs. The balancing function permits the output signal to follow an external reference and permits a bumpless return to the normal function. All transfers from static states are bumpless. PIP Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 Name I K T1 T2 BAL BALREF OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR Type II II II IB IB II II II OI OB OB OB Description
PIP I K T1 T2 BAL BALREF OHL OLL
PIP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O O=HL O=LL ERR
10 11 12 13
Figure 1.
Call Connections
Input. Input for actual value. Input for setting gain. Time 1. Input for time constant for lead. Time 2. Input for time constant for lag. BALance. Input for activation of following. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when following. Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value. Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value. Output. Output signal. Output=High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O is limited to the upper limit value. Output=Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output O is limited to the lower limit value. ERRor. Output set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL.
Function
Transfer Function
The step response in the time plane for the PIP function is: The transfer function for a PIP function is: This has been implemented in the PIP element as a recursive function.
10 - 82
Gain, Time Constant and Sampling Time
Certain constants are precalculated to make the execution time of the elements as short as possible. The result is stored internally in the element. These constants are recalculated if T1, T2 or K are changed by more than 1/128 of their previous value or if the sampling time TS is changed. When recalculating a test is performed to check if T1 and T2 2 x TS. If this is not the case, T1 or T2 respectively is set equal to 2 x TS. If BAL is set to 1, the regulator immediately goes into following and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the limit value concerned. Return to dynamic state is bumpless. The limitation functions limits the output signal to the values at the inputs OHL for the upper limit and OLL for the lower limit. If the actual value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1 and if it falls below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. When the limitation status has been detected, a check is made each time the element is executed to determine whether K x I (t) exceeds the output signal limitations. Is such is the case, the limitation status remains. If not, the calculated of the output signal is performed by the algorithm in the normal way. Normal updating of the internal status is sufficient to ensure bumpless return to the dynamic status. The element checks that the upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit value OLL. If this is not the case, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the values they had in the sample before that in which the error occurred. After an error the return to a dynamic state is bumpless, in the same way as in the case of following.
Following
Limitation Function
10 - 83
Pointer to next PC element

Summary
POINT
POINT POINT PC element provides information about 1 USE_DPM PODEP 3 the absolute code and data locations of the next 2 IDENT POLOP 4 PC element. It is intended for debugging new ERRC 99 PC elements during their development. If the Figure 1. next PC element is known to be error free, POINT is a rather useless PC element. (except e.g. for educational purpose: to show how AC80 memory domains are relocating during online changes). POINT is available only if you have enabled Toolbox option of AC80.
Call Connections
POINT Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 99 Name USE_DPM IDENT PODEP POLOP ERRC Type IB II IL IL I Description Are the result stored in DPM or not. Index, where to store the results (1...15) The absolute start address of next PC element instance. The absolute start address of POLO for these PC elements. EERor Code.
Function
The PC element shows currently used absolute addresses of the next PC element in the output pins and additionally may store these results DualPortMemory area (starting from DPM offset 0x7F80 = 64 bytes from the bottom of DPM). If the result values are stored in DPM, you may have 15 POINT blocks in various places of your application program without results overwriting. This is accomplished with specifying unique IDENT value for each POINT instance.
10 - 84
The DPM contents (which may be read from NCB side with appropriate tools (e.g.DriveDebug) are:
Offset # 0x7F80 0x7F84 0x7F88 0x7F8C 0x7F90 0x7F94 0x7F98 0x7F9C 0x7FA0 0x7FA4 0x7FA8 0x7FAC 0x7FB0 0x7FB4 0x7FB8 0x7FBC 0x7FC0 0x7FC4 0x7FC8 0x7FCC 0x7FD0 0x7FD4 0x7FD8 0x7FDC 0x7FE0 0x7FE4 0x7FE8 0x7FEC 0x7FF0 0x7FF4 0x7FF8 0x7FFC Content PODEP of POINT(ident = 1) POLOP of POINT(ident = 1) PODEP of POINT(ident = 2) POLOP of POINT(ident = 2) PODEP of POINT(ident = 3) POLOP of POINT(ident = 3) PODEP of POINT(ident = 4) POLOP of POINT(ident = 4) PODEP of POINT(ident = 5) POLOP of POINT(ident = 5) PODEP of POINT(ident = 6) POLOP of POINT(ident = 6) PODEP of POINT(ident = 7) POLOP of POINT(ident = 7) PODEP of POINT(ident = 8) POLOP of POINT(ident = 8) PODEP of POINT(ident = 9) POLOP of POINT(ident = 9) PODEP of POINT(ident = 10) POLOP of POINT(ident = 10) PODEP of POINT(ident = 11) POLOP of POINT(ident = 11) PODEP of POINT(ident = 12) POLOP of POINT(ident = 12) PODEP of POINT(ident = 13) POLOP of POINT(ident = 13) PODEP of POINT(ident = 14) POLOP of POINT(ident = 14) PODEP of POINT(ident = 15) POLOP of POINT(ident = 15) not used interrupt handshaking locations
If USE_DPM = 0, the results are not stored to DPM, but available only in output pins PODEP and POLOP. However, even then IDENT must be in range 1...15. If IDENT = 0, the POINT does nothing. If IDENT >15, ERRC is set = 1, no values written to DPM, and output pins PODEP and POLOP set = 0xFFFFFFFF.
10 - 85
Typical usage of POINT is such, that the result values of POINT can be entered as input values to some other debugging tools. E.g. XRAY or DriveDebug. In case of DriveDebug, the values may be read by the tool itself from the DPM (see the address list above, and remember conversion rules: DPM is in Y-address range. Divide the AC80-side DPM offset by 2, and add thereafter 0x2000, then you have respective absolute DPM address for NCB-side.
10 - 86
Printer Control PC element

Summary
PRTCON
PRTCON The PRTCON element transfers event data F=1-F1 PRT_ID ERR 10 from the specified event logger through F=1-F2 LOGNR BUTTONS 11 AC80s ModBus-protocol panel/printer link 1 RESET STATUS 12 2 and NAPI-01 Alarm Printer Interface unit to CNTRL ERRC 99 a standard matrix printer (e.g OKI Microline 280). The NAPI-01 unit has two functions: It Figure 1. converts the RS-485 level ModBus signals to parallel Centronics (TTL) signals. In addition it converts the ModBus protocol messages, which PRTCON has sent and the binary time stamp of the events to ASCII format for printing
Event data consists of date, time, event type, code and text ( max 20 characters ). The printer interface converts event data to one row of printout characters.
Call Connections
PRTCON Table 1.
No F1 F2 1 2 10 11 12 99 Name PRT_ID LOGNR RESET CNTRL ERR BUTTONS STATUS ERRC Type II II IB II OB OI OI OI Description Station number of the printer. LOGger NumbeR. Clear the error code. CoNTRoL of PRTCON operation. ERRor indication output. Feedback from the printer. PRTCON opeation STATUS. ERRor Code. Values 1...15 1...8 0...1
PRTCON Operation
PRTCON generates, when executed, a printer message if the event logger contains an event, which has not yet been output. PRTCON writes the message to the ModBus-protocol panel/printer link handler, which sends it to printer interface (NAPI-01) unit. The interface unit returns an acknowledgement, if the message was transferred successfully, and if the unit was able to receive it. (=no older messages still printing) PRTCON acknowledges in turn the event record in the event logger. PRTCON generates event messages in order starting from the oldest not acknowledged message (FIRST) to the newest not acknowledged (LAST). When the LAST message has been generated and acknowledged, PRTCON remains inactive waiting for the logger to write a new event.
10 - 87
The panel/printer link ModBus-protocol software operates cyclically at fixed intervals. It takes one transmission cycle to output a message to the printer. To reduce ModBus load the cycle time of PRTCON should be longer than 400 ms.
Control Terminal Functions
Terminal F1 (PRT_ID) is the node number on ModBus of the printer interface module. PRT_ID should match the node number (1 to 15) set on the module. In case no printer with corresponding station number is active on the panel link, ERR is set and the error code 2xx05 (no response from printer) is output on ERRC. Note: Printer interface units are delivered with default station address = 15. Terminal F2 (LOGNR) is number of the logger (1..8) from which PRTCON fetches messages to be transferred. Terminal 1 (RESET) resets on 0 ->1 the error code and the ModBus driver interface. Terminal 2 (CNTRL) consist of bits to control special operations Bit #0 0 => normal operation, messages are generated for new events 1 => reprint operation, send logger messages to the printer from the oldest (LAST+1) to the newest (LAST) when changed ->1.
Bit #1 2 => print without acknowledgements 0 => normal operation = acknowledgement after printing.
Terminal 3 (ERR) is set if no event logger has been defined (by EVTLOG) the ModBus handler returns error (e.g. on no response from the panel link).
Printer Messages
PRTCON transfers following data to the printer interface module. Date and time: as 2 long integers according to Advant time definition.
10 - 88
Event type: 1 = system error (originated by system SW) 2 = boolean (change) event (originated by PC element EVT or EVENT) 3 = error coded event (originated by PC element ERROR) 4 = drive event (not implemented)
Drive number: drive ID, where the event occurred (with drive events only) Text: application specific descriptive text (max. 20 characters) Code: original error code (in case of error type event) Event type numbers are converted to character strings: 1 = SYS 2 = EVT 3 = ERR 4 = DR#
As said earlier, there are two kinds of boolean (change) events. EVENT PC element records such event, when a boolean signal becomes TRUE, whereas EVT element records both edges of the boolean signal. Changes from 0 to 1 are symbolized with + sign and changes from 1 to 0 with - sign. EVENT and EVT events are thus typically different so that EVENT text is without leading + or - sign, but EVT text has always a leading + or - (Note that if the programmer has put + character in the beginning of his text, which he assigned to EVENT- element, it will be printed as if the same same text came from EVT without + character in the programmed text. Note also that only 19 first characters of the EVT text will be shown on panels and printed by PRTCON. The reason is, that the text in event logger may be only 20 characters long, and the leading + or takes one character position.
10 - 89
Formatting of Printer Output Lines
Each line consist of fields: type TYP(3), drive number DD(2), text XXXX(20), code CC(5), date DD(8), time TT(12)
There is a separating space between all fields except type and drive number.
SR|TYPDD|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX|CCCCC|DDDDDDDD|TTTTTTTTTTTT
See example below:

SYS EVT EVT EVT ERR DR#07 DR#11 System error 23 High Temperature +High Load -High Load PC elem error Overcurrent Overcurrent 99-03-25 99-03-25 99-03-25 99-03-25 99-03-25 99-03-25 99-03-25 12:31:57.202 12:31:59.289 12:31:59.289 12:31:59.289 12:31:57.202 12:31:57.202 12:31:57.202
12345
Error Codes
Table 2.
Error # 2xx01 2xx02 2xx03 2xx04 2xx05 2xx10 2xx11 2xx12 2xx13 2xx14 2xx15 Description PANBUS DB element missing. No more available node control blocks. No more available buffers. Attempted to delete non-existing buffer. (This should never happen.) Eventlogger not found. ModBus handler not found. Illegal size of ModBus buffer. Access to ModBus block denied. Error response from the printer. No response from the printer. Station too busy to handle message (cannot be detected).
Where xx is equal to 50 + node number (1...15).
10 - 90
Chapter 11 - PC ELEMENTS from R to X Ramp Generator

Summary
RAMP (RAMP generator) is used to limit the rate of change of a signal. The output signal can be limited with (limit) values specified at special inputs. The balancing function permits the output signal to track an external reference.
RAMP I STEP+ STEPSLOPE+ SLOPEBAL BALREF OHL OLL t
RAMP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O O = HL O = LL ERR
10 11 12 13
Call Connections
RAMP Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Name I STEP+ STEPSLOPE+ SLOPEBAL BALREF OHL OLL O O=HL O=LL ERR Type IR IR IR IR IR IB IR IR IR OR OB OB OB Description
Figure 1.
Input. Input for the start value. The greatest allowed positive STEP change. The greatest allowed negative STEP change. Positive ramp for the output. Negative ramp for the output. BALance. Input for activation of tracking mode. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value in tracking mode. Output High Limit. Input for upper limit value. Output Low Limit. Input for lower limit value. Output. Output signal. Output = High Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches the higher limit value. Output = Low Limit. Output which is set to 1 if the output reaches the lower limit value. ERRor is set to 1 if OHL is less than OLL
Function
The main property of the RAMP element is that the output signal tracks the input signal, while the input signal is not changed more than the value specified at the step inputs.
11 - 1
If the input signal change is greater than the specified step changes, the output signal is first changed by STEP+ or STEP- depending on the direction of change, and then by SLOPE+ or SLOPE- per second, until the values at the input and output are equal. This means that if STEP- = STEP+ = 0, a pure ramp function i.e. SLOPE/sec is obtained at the output. The greatest step change allowed at the output O is specified with the inputs STEP+ and STEP- for the respective direction of change. The ramp which the output signal is to track, if the change at the input I exceeds STEP+ or STEP-, is specified with the inputs SLOPE+ and SLOPE-. All parameters are specified as absolute values with the same unit as input I. The values of the parameters are stored internally in the element. New values are only entered under stationary conditions, i.e. when I(t) = O(t). Certain constants are precalculated to make the execution time of the element as short as possible. The results are stored internally in the element. These constants are recalculated if SLOPE+ or SLOPE- values are changed or if the cycle time TS is changed. Figure 3 shows the relationship between input, output and internal auxiliary variables when the element functions normally.
Calculation of Output Signal
When calculating the output signal O, three cases must be distinguished (see Figure 2): If I(t) = O(t-TS), then O(t) = I(t) If I(t) > O(t-TS), then the change of the output O value is limited as follows:
An internal auxiliary variable VPOS follows the input I value with the maximum rate of change defined by SLOPE+. If the input I value is greater than VPOS + STEP+, the output O value is limited to the value VPOS + STEP+. If the input I value is less than VPOS + STEP+ the output O value is set to be equal to I. If I(t) < O(t-TS), then the change of the output O value is limited as follows:
An internal auxiliary variable VNEG follows the input I value, with the maximum rate of change defined by SLOPE-. If the input I value is less than VNEG - STEP-, the output O value is limited to the value VPOS - STEP-. If the input I value is greater than VNEG - STEP- the output O value is set to be equal to I.
11 - 2

VNEG(t) = O(t)
STEPI(t) SLOPE+ * TS STEP+ O(t) O(t) SLOPE+ * TS STEP+ I(t) VPOS(t) VPOS(t) = O(t) O(t) I(t) < STEPTS SLOPE- * TS VNEG(t)
Figure 2. Relation between Input, Output and Auxiliary Variables under Normal Conditions.
Tracking Mode
If the input BAL is set to 1, the filter immediately goes into tracking mode and the output O is set to the value of the input BALREF. If the value at BALREF exceeds the output signal limits, the output is set to the applicable limit value. During tracking mode VPOS = VNEG = O = BALREF. Return to normal operation is done as if an unit step had occurred at the input. The limitation function limits the output signal to the limit values at the inputs OHL for upper limit and OLL for the lower limit. If the actual value exceeds the upper limit, the output O = HL is set to 1. If it falls below the lower limit, the output O = LL is set to 1. In the limiting state, VPOS(t), VNEG(t) and O(t) are set to the applicable limit value. The element checks that upper limit value OHL is greater than the lower limit value OLL. If not, the output ERR is set to 1. While the error status persists, the outputs O = HL, O = LL and O retain the values they had in the execution cycle before the error occurred.
8
9
Limitation Function
OHL
OLL
ACT
7 6 BAL BALREF
I1
O 10 ACT
I 1 > I2 I2 I1 I 1 < I2 I2 I1
I 1 < I2
O =HL 11
O = LI
ERR
12
13
I2
1 2
3 4 5
I ST EP+
ST EPSLOPE+ SLOPESTEP+ STEP1 sec SLOPE1 sec t SLOPE+ VPOS VNEG
11 - 3
S-RAMP Generator
Summary
RAMP-S1 (S-RAMP reference generator) element provides the signal ramp function with the first and second derivative values limitation. Typically used as a speed reference ramp to generate the output (speed reference) signal with smooth "rounded" transitions. Recommended whenever the acceleration (torque) rate of change has to be limited.
RAMP-S1
RAMP-S1 I OHL OLL MAXSLP STME MAXSLPF STMEF MAXSLPE STMEE HOLD HOLDS FASTSTOP EMSTOP BAL O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
O DVDT ERR ENDSPH
21 22 23 24
Call Connections
RAMP-S1 Table 1.
No 1 2 Name Type Description
15
Figure 1.
I IR MAXSLOPE IR
TMESTRTS IR
TMEENDS
IR
ENDSLIM
IR
6 7
BALREF BAL
IB IR
8 9
HOLD HOLDS
IR IR
Input signal. MAXimum SLOPE. Maximum absolute value of signal acceleration in "signal units" /seconds (e.g. in m/s/s). Value "0" connected to this input is internally substituted by the very small nonzero value. TiME STaRTS. Time in seconds for the initial S-phase. The time of second derivative ( = acceleration) absolute value transition from zero to the MAXSLOPE value. TiME ENDS. Time in seconds for the end Sphase. The time of second derivative ( = acceleration) absolute value transition from the MAXSLOPE value to zero. ENDS LIMit. Limit that determines the characteristics of the S-ramp in the end phase in terms of the under/overshoot. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value for tracking mode. BALance. Forcing the tracking mode in which the Output "O" value follows the BALREF input value. HOLD. Instantaneous freezing of the output "O" value. Ramping stopped. HOLD with S function. Forced termination of the ramping concluded with the end S-phase.
11 - 4
Table 1 continued
No 10 Name HYST Type OR Description HYSTeresis. The Hysteresis for the stationary state of the ramp. The Ramp function is not activated as long as the "DIFF" output value is within the Hysteresis value. Output High Limit. Affects the "I", "O" and "BALREF " signals. Output Low Limit. Affects the "I","O" and "BALREF " signals. ERRor. Set to "1" when the OHL OLL. S-Ramp Generator Output signal. The DIFFerence between the input "I" and output "O" signals. DVDT. The actual value of the output signal first derivative*TS. (The step of the S-Ramp output per execution cycle). START. Indication that the Ramp function is activated. END SECtor. Indication of the active end Sphase of the ramp.
11 12 21 22 23 24
OHL OLL ERR O DIFF DVDT
OB OB OB OR OR OR
25 26
START ENDSEC
OB OB
Function
The S-ramp function is activated when the absolute value of "DIFF" is greater then the absolute value of "HYST". The second derivative of the signal (or in other words the first derivatives rate of change) is calculated from the parameter "TMSTRTS" and is constant until the end S-phase is entered. The calculated second derivative is integrated (accumulated) to a first derivative (DVDT) which is limited by a parameter MAXSLOPE. DVDT is then integrated (accumulated) to the output signal "O". When the S-Ramp is activated, the element continuously recalculates the conditions that determine switching to the end S-phase. During the end S-phase the second derivative is calculated continuously to assure a correct ending of the ramp. The calculated second derivative is limited in this phase by the "ENDSLIM" input parameter value. The output of the S-ramp may be overshooting or undershooting the input "I" setpoint value based on the applied to "ENDSLIM" input limit function. Normally when no over- or undershoot is required the "ENSDSLIM" should be connected to the "DVDT" output. While the end S-phase is in progress the operation is unaffected by the changes on the "MAXSLOPE" and "TMEENDS". The Ramp can force the end S-phase also if the output "O" is calculated to go over one of the specified limit values "OHL" or "OLL".
11 - 5
The "HOLD" input overrides the normal ramp operation and freezes the value of the output "O" signal. The "HOLDS" input overrides the "normal ramping" by forcing the end S-phase. The overriding does not disturb the end S-phase that had been already in progress when "HOLDS" input became active. With the "BAL" input set to "1" the output signal "O" is immediately forced to follow the signal value from the "BALREF" input. In that case the "DVDT", "DIFF", "START" and "ENDSEC" outputs are all set to "0" and the Hold and Hold_S functions blocked. The value of "BAL" returning to "0" state reactivates the normal ramp function.
"I" (Input signal) "O" (Output signal) "BAL" = "HOLD" = "HOLDS" = 0
"TMESTRTS" "DVDT"
"TMEENDS"
"TMESTRTS" "MAXSLOPE"TS"
"TMEENDS"
"MAXSLOPE"TS"
Figure 2. Basic Operation of the RAMP-S1 Reference Generator.

"I"(Input signal)
"O"(Output signal)
"BALREF"
"DV/DT" t
"HOLD" "HOLD" "BAL"
t t t
Figure 3. Effect of the Forcing Signals on the Operation of the RAMPS1 Generator.
11 - 6
S-RAMP Generator
Summary
The PC element RAMP-SSH generates an S-haped output signal when reaching the level of the input signal.
RAMP-SSH
RAMP-SSH I OHL IOLL MAXSLP STME MAXSLPF STMEF MAXSLPE STMEE HOLD HOLDS FASTSTOP EMSTOP BAL BALREF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
O DVDT ERR ENDSPH
21 22 23 24
Call Connections
RAMP-SSH Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name I OHL OLL MAXSLP STME MAXSLPF Type IR IR IR IR ITR IR Description
14 15
Figure 1.
7 8
STMEF MAXSLPE
ITR IR
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24
STMEE HOLD HOLDS

FASTSTOP
EMSTOP BAL BALREF O DVDT ERR ENDSPH
ITR IB IB IB IB IB IR OR OR OB OB
Input. Input for the start value concerned. Output High Limit. Input for upper high limit. Output Low Limit. Input for lower high limit. MAXimum SLoPe. Maximum acceleration in the linear phase of the ramp, at normal run. S-TiME. S-time for normal run. MAXimum SLoPe emergency stop. Maximum acceleration in the linear phase of the ramp, at Faststop. S-TiME Faststop. S-time for faststop. MAXimum SLoPe Emergency stop. Maximum acceleration in the linear phase of the ramp, at emergency stop. S-TiME Emergency. S-time for emergency stop. HOLD. Instantaneous stop of the ramp. HOLD with S. Stop O the ramp with a s-phase. FASTSTOP. Faststop of the ramp. EMergency STOP. Emergency stop of the ramp. BALance. Input for activating following. BALance REFerence. Input for reference value when following. Output. Output signal. DVDT, (dv/dt) / (cycle time). ERRor. Error signal which is set at error conditions. END-S PHase. Signal which indicate end-s phase of the ramp function.
11 - 7
Data
Execution time, max 1.0 ms Memory requirement object code PC statement 68 bytes Local data area 54 bytes
Function
The s-ramp generator has facilities such as: operates with both positive and negative reference signals. orders for forced breaking a down to zero of the output signal. forcel setting if the end-s when the input signal is exceeding the limits. adaptation of d2V/dt2 in the end s-phase to reduce no of overshoots. following of a reference without any s-ramp function. Bumpless transition when switching between input references I and BALREF.
The s-ramp generator is activated when the input signal I output signal . The ramp starts with the starts-s phase continued with the linear phase and finish with the end-s phase, in the end-s phase is the output signal ENDSPH set to true. Depending on the size of the difference of I and O the linear phase is not always executed. HOLD and HOLDS is used to stop the s-ramp generator. HOLD stop the s-ramp momentarily without any s-function and HOLDS stops the s-ramp with an s-function. FASTSTOP and EMSTOP are conditions to break down the output signal O to zero. When FASTSTOP or EMSTOP order is released, the s-ramp generator is activated again. The EMSTOP order has higher priority than FASTSTOP. When the input BAL is set to true the s-ramp generator is activated until the output signal O has reached the level of the input signal BALREF. Then the output signal is following BALREF. The s-ramp generator is activated when BAL is set to false. It is recommended that the function which generate the BALREF input signal is executed with the same cyclicity as RAMP-SSH. When the s-ramp generator is activated to reach the level of the BALREF reference, it is recommended that the parameter STME is set to a minimum value and the parameter MAXSLP is set to a maximum value.
11 - 8
O OHL
BALREF
OLL
DVDT
ENDSPH HOLD HOLDS FASTSTOP EMSTOP BAL
Figure 2. Timing Diagram of the Ramp Function at HOLd and HOLDS Order.
O OHL
BALREF
OLL
DVDT
ENDSPH HOLD HOLDS FASTSTOP EMSTOP BAL
Figure 3. Timing Diagram of the Ramp Function at FASTSTOP EMSTOP and BAL Order.
11 - 9
Register
Summary
REG (REGister) is used as a memory element. The value of the data can be integer, real numbers, Boolean or time.
REG (C1,C2) S > L R I1 I2 IC2 12 14
REG
1 2 3 11 13 9+2xC2
10+2xC2
REG (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Data type Number of inputs and outputs
Figure 1.
Permissible values B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...35
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description Set. Input for loading of new data each time the element is executed. When S is set to 0, the last data loaded remains. Load. Dynamic input for loading of data to the register. Loading is performed when L goes to 1. Reset. Input for clearing the register. R prevents all further entry while it is 1. Input 1. Input data to position 1. Output 1. Output data from position 1. Input 2. Input data to position 2. Output 2. Output data from position 2. Input C2. Input data to position C2. Output C2. Output data from position C2.
IB
3 11 12 13 14 9+2C2 10+2C2
R I1 O1 I2 O2 IC2 OC2
IB IC1 OC1 IC1 OC1 IC1 OC1
Function
When input L becomes 1, the register is loaded with data from inputs I1 .. IC2. Data previously in the register is owerwritten. If input S is set, loading is performed each time the element REG is executed. When S is reset, the data most recently loaded remains until the element is executed again, with input S, L or R set. Input S overrides L so that when input S is set, L has no effect.
11 - 10
Clearing
When input R is set, the register is cleared and all further entry is prevented. R overrides both S and L.
11 I1 1 S 2 L 13 I2
REG I1 O1 1 L R O2 I2 L 2 R
O1
12
>1
>1
O2
14
9+2xC2 IC2 3 R
IC2
OC2 L C2 R
OC2 10+2xC2
11 - 11
Group Data Register

Summary
REG-G (REGister - Group data) is used to assemble individual variables to a single variable of group data type. The data type can be integer, real numbers, Boolean or time.
REG-G
REG-G(C1,C2 C3,C4,C5) S AERR >L >WR AWR R EXP I1 I2 IC2 O 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 10+C2
REG-G (C1,C2,C3,C4,C5) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 Description Data type Number of inputs Selection for expander input EXP Number of places in group data for expander input Number of places in group data for output
Figure 1.
Permissible values B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...30 0...1 0...254 1...255
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name S Type IB Description Set. Input for loading new data each time the element is executed. When S is set to 0, the last data loaded remains. Load. Dynamic input for loading data to the register. Loading is performed when L goes to 1. WRite. Dynamic input for changing data at the place specified by AWR. Address WRite. Input for address to the data to be changed according to WR. Reset. Input for clearing the register. R prevents entry further all while its 1. EXPander input. Input for group data to be linked with data at inputs I1...IC2. Address ERRor. Output which is set (to 1) if the address at AWR is greater than the number of inputs or is negative.
2 3 4 5 6 7
L WR AWR R EXP AERR
IB IB IIL IB IGC4 OB
11 - 12
Table 2 continued
No 11 12 . . . 10 + C2 50 Name I1 I2 Type IC1 IC1 Description Input 1. Input data to position 1. Input 2. Input data to position 2.
IC2 O
IC1 OGC1
Input C2 Input data to position C2. Output. Output for group data.
Function
REG-G combines individual variables of the same data type into a single group variable. The element has an expander input EXP for a group variable, which can be used when more than C2 variables are to be linked together. When input S is set, data is continuously assembled at the group variable of the output. The group variable of the output consists firstly of group data from the input EXP, and then of the values from the inputs I1 ... IC2. The element acts as a latch when the input S is reset. The latest data assembled then remains at the output. If S is reset and input L goes from 0 to 1, an assembly is performed to output O during this program cycle, as during normal assembly. If S or R is set, L has no effect. One of the ordinary data inputs I1...IC2 is used for changing data at a specified place in REG-G. The address (integer 1...C2.) of the place at which data is to be changed is stated at the input AWR. The new data value is entered from the input to the specified place when the input WR goes to 1. If AWR = 0 and the input WR goes to 1, group data is read from the input EXP to their different places. Places corresponding to the ordinary inputs are not affected.
Normal Assembly
Loading
Changing of Data at an Optional Place
11 - 13
When input R is set, data at all places in the group register are cleared and all further entry is prevented. R overrides both S and L. The address at the input AWR is checked and if its value is greater than the number of inputs, or is negative, the error signal output AERR is set. When an error is detected, AERR is set during one cycle if input WR is set. No place in the register is affected when an error occurs.
REG-G
1
REG
C 1
1 2 6
S L EXP > 1 1
R 2 C R C4 C R 3 2
11 I1 1 12 I2 1
I1 C R I2 C R I2 I1
50
10 + C2
IC2 1 5 R 0 3 WR 1 2 C2 A > C2 4 AWR or A<0
IC2 C R IC2
> 1
&
ERR 7
11 - 14
Memory Monitoring
Summary
RWM (Read-Write Memory monitoring) fetches information about the controller memory usage. It is used to reveal memory overrun situations before they occur.
1 RWM SEL
RWM
SIZE AFREE MFREE SQSTAT 11 12 13 14
Figure 1.
Call Connections
RWM Table 1.
No 1 11 12 13 14 Name SEL SIZE AFREE MFREE SQSTAT Type II OI OI OI OI Description SELection of data to output terminal SIZE. SIZE of data selected by input. Size of the contiguous Area in memory that is FREE. Total number of Memory Fractions that is FREE. Memory SQueeze (i.e. reorganising the memory to maximise the contiguous free area) STATus. Values See table 2. bytes or fractions fractions fractions 0: squeeze ready <>0: squeeze requested or active (internal squeeze flags)
Function
The PC element fetches information about the usage of the AC80 memory. The value in output terminal SIZE depends on the value connected to the input terminal SEL. Examples: 30 = size of task 3 (TADE+PODE+POLO) 152 = SIZE OF PODE of task 15.
The other outputs are explained in Table 1.
11 - 15
SEL values Table 2.

SEL value -2 -1 0 XXY (>0) SIZE value means Size of the application memory [fractions] Size of a fraction [bytes] Size of the largest task (TADE+PODE+POLO) [fractions] XX: Task number Y: Domain: 0 = TADE+PODE+POLO 1 = TADE (TAask DEscription domain, size is one fraction). 2 = PODE (PrOgram DEscription domain, contains the function blocks). 3 = POLO (PrOgram LOcal data domain, contains the "signals"). -1
Illegal
Memory Problems in AC80 Memory Capacity of the AC80
The overrun of the memory capacity in AC80 may cause problems in some projects. The overrun of the memory capacity may unfortunately occur without any warning during commissioning when the application program is modified on-line. Application programs are stored in FPROM and they run in RWM. The size of RWM available for application programs (target code) is readable by RWM element. Target code consists of domains. At least one memory fraction is allocated for each domain. A task (CONTRM or MASTER) consists of three domains: TADE, PODE and POLO. When the application program is modified on-line, two versions of the task domains (old and new) will temporarily exist in the AC80. During on-line change a temporary fourth domain PODC (Program Change domain) is created. If the on-line change is carried through successfully then the PODC domain and TADE+PODE+POLO for the old task will be erased. The total number of fractions needed for all domains including temporary domains, must never even temporaryly exceed the maximum number. The maximum momentary size of the application program size is: (program size) + (for the largest task: TADE+PODE+POLO+PODC). The reason for overrun of the memory capacity could be on-line change in a large task that is part of a large application program.
11 - 16
Using RWM to avoid Overrun of Memory
The RWM function block monitors the amount of available RWM memory in the AC80. RWM can be inserted in any slow task. Observing the output terminals helps avoiding overrun of memory: 1) SIZE+PODC>MRFEE: An on-line change will fail 2) SIZE+PODC<AFREE: An on-line change will succeed 3) SIZE+PODC>=AFREE if SIZE+PC<MFREE: An on-line change may succeed. PODC means here the size of the temporary domain PODC. The size of a PODC can not be measured by the RWM function block. Instead, it can be measured in PC by using a special utility program (e.g DOSprogram DOMSZ).
11 - 17
Save a Value
Summary
SAVE PC element provides means for the application program to save reference values or other semipermanent values to battery secured RAM memory, where these values are sustained over (not extensive) power breaks. The saved value is automatically fetched into output pin of SAVE block during power up of AC80 station. SAVE (C1) Table 1.
Parameter Description C1 Data type Permissible values B, I, IL, R
1 2 3 SAVE EN I DEF
SAVE
ERR O ERRC
10 11 99
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 1.
No 1 2 3 10 11 99 Name EN I DEF ERR O ERRC Type IB IC1 IC1 OB OC1 I Description ENable recording of present input value. Input value to be stored. DEFault value (in case stored value is lost, and EN=1) ERRor indicator. Output value (=saved value) ERRor Code.
Error Codes
Table 3.
Error # 28020 28021 28022 Description Saved values lost during power off period. Saved value not found (although other saved values are O.K.) All storage space used.
11 - 18
Function
The SAVE PC-element reads the value saved in battery backup RAM to the output O, if the input EN = 0. If the input EN = 1, SAVE writes the input value from I to battery backup RAM and copies it also to output O. The output ERR is set = 1, if the contents of battery backup RAM area was changed during power off period (and EN has not been = 1). In such case the DEF value is set to output O. The other possible reason for ERR = 1 is such case, there are too many SAVE instances. The battery backup area in RWM is sufficient for 100 SAVE blocks (= for 100 saved values) Note: Using SAVE blocks in AC80 does not require any DB element for specifying the SAVE area. In fact, there is no such DB element available.
11 - 19
Shift Register
Summary
Shift register SHIFT is used as a shift register of up to 250 positions. Data can be integers, real numbers, Boolean or time.
SHIFT
SHIFT (C1,C2) F/B-N > C R IF IB OB OF 12 14
2 3 4 11 13
SHIFT (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter Description C1 C2 Data type Number of positions
Figure 1.
Permissible values B, I, IL, R, T, TR 2...250
Connections
Table 2.
No 2 Name F/B-N Type IB Description Forward/Backward-N. Input for selection of shift direction. Shifting is forward when F/B-N=1 and backward when F/B-N=0. Control. Dynamic input for shifting. Reset. Input for clearing the sift register. All further shifting is prevented when R=1. Input Forward. Input data with forward shift. Output Backward. Output data with backward shift. Input Backward. Input data with backward shift. Output Forward. Output data with forward shift.
3 4 11 12 13 14
C R IF OB IB OF
IB IB IC1 OC1 IC1 OC1
Function
Forward Shift
When input C goes to 1 and the input F/B-N is 1, data is shifted forward in the register and data is read into position 1 from input IF. Data which was located at output OF before the shifting, is replaced at the shift forward by data at the next to last position. When input C goes to 1 and the input F/B-N is 0, data is shifted backwards in the register and data is read into position C2 from input IB. Data which was located at output OB before the shifting, is replaced at the shift backward by data from position 2.
Backward Shift
11 - 20
Clearing
The input R clears the shift register and prevents all further reading into the shift register.
2 F/B-N &
FORWARD
3 C
& > 1
BACKWARD
11 IF
O
1
OB
12
R R
BACKWARD
FORWARD
13 IB 4 R
1 R
C2
OF
14
11 - 21
Slave Header
Summary
SLAVEM (SLAVE Module) is used for structuring a PC program. PC elements can be included in a slave module.
SLAVEM
SLAVEM(C1,C2)
Figure 1.
SLAVEM (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 Description Identity of execution controlling master header Currently not used Permissible values The second part of the PC item designation of the master header.
C2
Function
The slave header SLAVEM is an element header for a slave module. The numerical identity of the master header associated with the slave module is specified with the call parameter C1. Numerical identity of a master header is the second part of its item designation (e.g. if master header item designation is PC1.4, the identity number is 4). The cycle time and the priority of the slave module in relation to other execution units is determined by the master header (see element MASTER). The slave modules within the same master are executed in the order of the documentation.
Reading variables from the I/O devices N orm al execution of
elem ents in all slave m odules .

Writing variables to the I/O dev ices
F or all slave m odules of the rela ted M aster.
11 - 22
Square Root Element

Summary
SQRT (SQuare RooT) is used to calculate the square root of a real number. The result can be multiplied by an optional value. SQRT Table 1.
No 1 2 5 6 Name I K O ERR Type IR IR OR OB Description
SQRT
SQRT I K
1 2
O ERR
5 6
Figure 1.
Call Connections
Input. Input for number whose square root is to be calculated. Input for multiplication factor K. Output. Output for the product of the value at input K and the square root of the value at input I. ERRor. Output which is set if the value at input is negative.
Function
The square root of the value at input I is calculated. The result is multiplied by the value at input K. The product is stored at the output O. If the value at the input I is negative, the error output ERR is set to 1 and value 0 is stored at the output O.
Supervision
11 - 23
Memory Element
The memory element SR (Set Reset memory) is used as a memory for Boolean variables. SR Table 1.
No 1 2 5 Name S R Type IB IB OB Description Set input Reset input which overrides the set input. Output from the memory element.
1 2
SR
SR I K 5
Figure 1.
Function
The element output is set (to 1) if the set input is set at the same time that the reset input is reset (to 0). If the reset input is set, the output is unconditionally reset.
1 S 1 &
2 R
11 - 24
Memory Element
Summary
Set Reset with AND set gate and AND reset gate PC element is used as a memory element for Boolean variables.
1
SR-AA
20 & 2 C1 11 & 12 R S
SR-AA (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Number of inputs in the set gate. Number of inputs in the reset gate.
10+C2
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 11 12 . . . 10+C2 20 Name Type IB IB IB IB IB IB OB Description Input to the set function. Input to the set function. Input to the set function. Input to the set function. Input to the reset function. Input to the reset function. Memory element output.
Function
The element output O is set to 1 if all the conditions (1...C1) for the AND set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time at least one of the conditions (11...C2) for the AND reset gate is not set. If all conditions for the reset gate are satisfied (all of 11 ...C2 are 1) then the output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides the set function.
11 - 25
1 2 C! 11 12 10+C2 & &
> 1
20 &
Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-AA.
11 - 26
Memory Element
Summary
Set Reset with AND set gate and OR reset gate PC element is used as a memory element for Boolean variables.
1
SR-AO
20 & 2 C1 11 12 >1 R S
SR-AO (C1,C2) Table 1.

10+C2
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 11 12 . . . 10+C2 20 Name Type IB IB IB IB IB IB OB Description Input to the set function. Input to the set function. Input to the set function. Input to the set function. Input to the reset function. Input to the reset function. Memory element output.
Function
The element output O is set to 1 if all the conditions (1...C1) for the AND set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time none of the conditions (11...C2) for the OR reset gate is set. If any condition for the reset gate is satisfied (any of 11 ...C2 is 1) then the output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides the set function.
11 - 27
1 2 C! 11 12 10+C2 1 &
> 1
20 &
Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-AO.
11 - 28
Memory Element
Summary
The memory element SR-D (Set Reset memory-Data input)
1 2 3 4
SR-D
S D >C R 5
Call
SR-D Table 1.
No 1 2 3 4 5 Name Type S D C R IB IB IB IB OB Description
Figure 1.
Connections
Set input Data input Clock. Dynamic input for entry of data from the Dinput. Reset input which overrides all other inputs. Output from the memory element.
Function
If only the S and R inputs are used, SR-D functions as an ordinary SR element. When the input R is reset and the input C goes to 1, the value at the input D is stored at the output 5. When the input R is set, the output 5 is unconditionally reset, i.e. R overrides the other inputs.
1 2 3
S D C & 1 S
> 1
& 1 R
11 - 29
Memory Element
Summary
Set Reset with OR set gate and AND reset gate PC element is used as a memory element for Boolean variables.
1 2
SR-OA
>1 20 S
...
C1 11 & 12 R
...
Call
SR-OA (C1,C2) Table 1.

10+C2
Call Parameters
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 11 12 . . . 10+C2 20 Name Type IB IB IB IB IB IB OB Description Input to the Set function. Input to the Set function. Input to the set function. Input to the reset function. Input to the reset function. Input to the reset function. Memory element output.
Function
The element output O is set to 1 if one or more of the conditions (1 to C1) for the OR set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time one of the conditions (11 to C2) for the AND reset gate is not set. If all conditions for the reset gate are satisfied (all of 11 to C2 is 1) then the output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides the set function.
11 - 30
1 2 C! 11 12 10+C2 & 1
> 1
20 &
Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-OA.
11 - 31
Memory Element
Summary
Set Reset with OR set gate and OR reset gate PC element is used as a memory element for Boolean variables.
1 2
SR-OO
>1 20 S
...
C1 11 12 >1 R
...
Call
SR-OA (C1,C2) Table 1.

10+C2
Call Parameters
Figure 1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C1 11 12 . . . 10+C2 20 Name Type IB IB IB IB IB IB OB Description Input to the Set function. Input to the Set function. Input to the set function. Input to the reset function. Input to the reset function. Input to the reset function. Memory element output.
Function
The element output O is set to 1 if one or more of the conditions (1 to C1) for the OR set gate are satisfied (set to 1) at the same time none of the conditions (11 to C2) for the OR reset gate is set. If any condition for the reset gate is satisfied (any of 11 to C2 is 1) then the output is unconditionally reset (to 0). The reset function overrides the set function.
11 - 32
1 2 C! 11 12 10+C2 1 1
> 1
20 &
Figure 2. Function Diagram SR-OO.
11 - 33
Subtractor
Summary
SUB is used for subtraction of two integers or real numbers.
1 2
SUB
C1 20
Figure 1.
SUB (C1) Table 1.

Parameter C1 Description Data type Permissible values I, IL, R
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 20 Name Type IC1 IC1 OC1 Description Input for minuend. Input for subtrahend. Output for difference.
Function Overflow
The value at input 2 is subtracted from value at input 1 and the result is stored at output 20. If the maximum positive or negative values are exceeded, the output is limited to the highest or lowest allowable value for the data type.
11 - 34
Switch
Summary
SW (SWitch) is used as a connection element for data and has channels with a closing function. The data type can be integer, real number, Boolean or time.
SW (C1,C2) ACT --/--/--/-
SW
1 11 21 10xC2+1
12 22 10xC2+2
Figure 1.
SW (C1,C2) Table 1.
Parameter C1 C2 Description Data type Number of inputs Permissible values B, I, IL, R, T, TR 1...9
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 11 Name ACT Type IB IC1 Description ACTivate. Input for activation of the switch. When the input is set to 1 the switch is activated. Input to channel 1 which is connected to the output for channel 1 when the switch is activated. Output from channel 1. Input to channel 2 which is connected to the output for channel 2 when the switch is activated. Output from channel 2.
12 21
OC1 IC1
22 . . . 10C2+1 10C2+2 -
OC1
IC1
OC1
Input to channel C2 which is connected to the output for channel C2 when the switch is activated. Output from channel C2.
Function
When the control input ACT is 0, the output data is 0 according to the data type. When ACT is set, data comes from the inputs 11 .. (10*C2 + 1)
11 - 35
Switch - Change Over

Summary
SW-C (SWitch - Changeover) is used as a connection element for up to 9 channels of data with switching functions. The data type can be integer, real number, Boolean or time.
SW (C1,C2) ACT --/---/---/--
SW-C
1
11 12 21 22 10xC2+1 10xC2+2
13 23
10xC2+3
SW-C (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter C1 C2 Description Data type Number of inputs
Figure 1.
Permissible values B, I, IL, R, T, TR, 1...9
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 Name ACT Type IB Description ACTivate. Input for activation of the switch. When the input is set to 1 the switch is activated. Input to channel 1 which is connected to the output for channel 1 when the switch is activated. Input to channel 1 which is connected to the output for channel 1 when the switch is not activated. Output from channel 1. Input to channel 2 which is connected to the output for channel 2 when the switch is activated. Input to channel 2 which is connected to the output for channel 2 when the switch is not activated. Output from channel 2. Input to channel C2 which is connected to the output for channel C2 when the switch is activated.
11
IC1
12
IC1
13 21
IC1 IC1
22
IC1
23 . . . 10xC2+1
OC1 IC1
11 - 36
Table 2 continued
No 10C2+2 10C2+3 Name Type IC1 Description Input to channel C2 which is connected to the output for channel C2 when the switch is not activated. Output from channel C2.
OC1
Function
When the control input ACT is 0, the data from the inputs 12 to 10*C2+2 are connected to the appropriate outputs. When ACT is set, data comes from the inputs 11 to 10*C2+1.
11 - 37
Element for Calculation of System Load

Summary
SYSL (SYStem Load) calculates the system load. If the system is overloaded this is indicated. Inputs and outputs for handling of maximum load may be selected with a call parameter.
SYSL
SYSL (C1) 1 2 MAXL HYS LOAD OVERL L>ML 5 6 7
Figure 1.
Call
SYSL (C1) Table 1.

Parameter C1 Description Determines whether inputs and outputs for the maximum load is to be included in the element. Permissible values 0...1
Call Parameters
Connection
Table 2.
No 1* Name MAXL Type IR Description
MAXimum Load. Input for maximum system load. 2* HYS IS HYSteris. Input for hysteresis for maximum system load. 5 LOAD OR Output for system LOAD in percent. 6 OVERL OB OVERLoad. Output that is set to 1 when the system is fully loaded. 7* L>ML OB Load>Maximum Load. Input that is set to 1 when the load exceeds the value specified the input MAXL. *These connections are only included if the call parameter C1 = 1.
Function
If the system is fully loaded the output OVERL is set to 1. The system load in percent (%) is given at the output LOAD. If the call parameter C1 has been set to 1 the element will have inputs MAXL and HYS, for maximum load and hysteresis respectively. When the load MAXL is exceeded the output L>ML is set to one. L>ML is reset when the load lowers to below MAXL-HYS. If MAXL the MAXL is used. If MAXL or HYS is negative the value 0 is used.
11 - 38
Time and Date Element

Summary
SYSTIME is used to get actual time and date.
SYSTIME
SYSTIME MILLI SECOND MINUTE HOUR DAY MONTH YEAR 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 16
Call Connections
SYSTIME Table 2.
No 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 16 Name MILLI SECOND MINUTE HOUR DAY MONTH YEAR WEEKDAY Type OI OI OI OI OI OI OI OI Description Output for MILLIsecond (0...999). Output for SECOND (0...59). Output for MINUTE (0...59). Output for HOUR (0...23). Output for DAY of month (1...31). Output for MONTH (1...12). Output for YEAR (>=1990). Output for DAY of WEEK (1...7): Monday = 1,..., Sunday = 7
WEEKDAY
Figure 1.
Function
Actual system time and date are output at the terminals of the PC element.
11 - 39
Threshold Element
Summary
THRESH-L (THRESHold - Logic) is used to determine when more than, or equal to, a given number of Boolean signals are set (to 1).
THRESH-L
1
2 C2 >=C1 20
Figure 1.
THRESH-L (C1,C2) Table 1.

Parameter
C1 C2
Description
Threshold value Number of inputs
Permissible values
1...C2 1...19
C2 must be greater than or equal to C1.
Connections
Table 2.
No 1 2 . . . C2 20 Name Type IB IB IB OB Description Input for the first Boolean value. Input for the second Boolean value. Input for the last Boolean value. Output which is set to 1 if C1 or more of the inputs 1...C2 are set.
Function
The THRESH-L element is used to determine if more than, or equal to, a specified number of Boolean values in a group are set to 1. If so, the output (20) is set.
11 - 40
Time Delay Off

Summary
Time delay off TOFF (Timer OFF-delay) is used for Boolean off state delay.
TOFF
T I /--/ O TD TE
1 2
5 6
Figure 1.
Call Connections
TOFF Table 1.
No 1 2 5 6 Name I TD O TE Type IB IT OB OT Description Input for start of time delay. Time Delay. Input for preset time. Max 23h 59m 59.999s. Output. Output which is reset when the preset time (TD) has elapsed. Time Elapsed. Output which specifies how long I has been reset. When the preset time (TD) has elapsed, TE stops.
Function
The value at the input I is delayed at the output O when the input value changes from 1...0 in accordance with the time pulse diagram, figure 2. The output value returns to 1 when the input value changes from 0 to 1.
Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TOFF with Preset Time 3s.
11 - 41
Time Delay On
Summary
Time delay on TON (Timer ON-delay) is used for Boolean on state delay.
T
TON
1 2
I /--/ O
TD TE
5 6
Figure 1.
Call Connections
TON Table 1.
No 1 2 5 6 Name I TD O TE Type IB IT OB OT Description Input for start of time delay. Time Delay. Input for preset time. Max 23h 59m 59.999s. Output. Output which is set when the preset time (TD) has elapsed. Time Elapsed. Output which specifies how long I has been set. When the preset time (TD) has elapsed, TE stops.
Function
The value at the input I is delayed at the output O when the input I value changes from 0...1 in accordance with the time pulse diagram, figure 2. The output value returns to 0 when the input value changes from 1...0.
Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TON with Preset Time 3s.
11 - 42
Time Delay On Retentive

Summary
TON-RET (Timer delay ON - RETentive) is a switch-on delay with accumulating time measurement of Boolean variables for use in connection with combinatory expressions. TONRET is used for e.g. operational time monitoring.
TON-RET
T
1 2
3
I /--/ O
R TD TE
5 6
Figure 1.
Call Connections
TON-RET Table 1.
No 1 Name I Type IB Description Input for start of time delay when the input changes from 0 to 1. The time circuit maintains its status even when the input returns to 0. Reset. Input which resets the timer. R must be reset (to 0) for the timer to function. Time Delay. Input for preset time. Max 23h 59m 59.999s. Output. Output which is set when the preset time (TD) has elapsed. Time Elapsed. Output which specifies how long I has been set to 1. When the preset time (TD) has elapsed, TE stops.
2 3 5 6
R TD O TE
IB IT OB OT
Function
The value of the input I is delayed at the output O when the input I value changes from 0 to 1 in accordance with the time pulse diagram (figure 2). If the input I value returns to 0, the time which has elapsed remains in the timer and when the value returns to 1, the time continues from the value which applied when the input I variable went to 0. The input R must be reset (to 0) when the timer functions. If R is set (to 1) both outputs O and TE are reset.
11 - 43

1s
= 3s 1
I 0 1 R 0 1 O 0
10
Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TON-RET with Preset Time 3s.
11 - 44
Trigger Element
Summary
The triggering element TRIGG is used for reducing impulse times at the start of automatic procedures and for calculating functions.
TRIGG
1 1 > 5
Figure 1.
Call Connections
TRIGG Table 1.
No 1 5 Name Type IB OB Description Input for start of trigger pulse. Output for trigger pulse.
Function
When the input signal is set, the output signal is also set. The output signal is cleared at the next program cycle, irrespective of the value of the input signal. For the output signal to be set, the input signal must have been 0 for the duration of one program cycle. The output signal from the element may only be used within its own execution unit, otherwise, detection of it cannot be guaranteed.
Figure 2. Example of Time Diagram for TRIGG.
11 - 45
Watchdog for AC80

Summary
WDOG80 PC element provides means for the application program to be continuously aware of running status (=health) of NCB board. WDOG80 Table 1.
No 1 2 Name Type Description
WDOG80
WDOG80 ALIVE COUNTER
1 2
Figure 1.
Call Connections
ALIVE OB COUNTER OI
NCB board ALIVE or not. Contents of NCB watchdog COUNTER in Dualport Memory.
Function
The PC element compares the contents of NCB watchdog counter in DualPortMemory with the previous value (from last execution time). If the values are different, the NCB board is considered to be alive (because NCB should increment the value once per each millisecond) and ALIVE is set = 1. Or if the values are same, ALIVE is assigned = 0. So the property, how soon WDOG80 can detect death of NCB board is determined by the cycle time of the CONTRM or MASTER/SLAVEM, which contains the WDOG80. Note however, if you put WDOG80 in 2 ms task, that e.g. interrupt load may cause 2 successive executions of WDOG80 to occur sometimes with shorter interval. Therefore WDOG80 might indicate dead NCB now and then for one ececution period.
11 - 46
Exclusive Or Gate
Summary
XOR (eXclusive OR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
1 2
XOR
= 1 5
Figure 1.
Call Connections
XOR
Table 1.
No 1 2 5 Name Type IB IB OB Description Input. Input. Output.
Function
The output signal from the XOR element is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal, see table 2 below. Table 2. Truth Table of XOR
1 0 0 1 1 2 0 1 0 1 5 0 1 1 0
11 - 47
11 - 48
Chapter 12 - DB Element Descriptions
Chapter 12 -DB Elements from A to P

Overview Common Terminals of S800 I/O Modules
IMPL and ACT Terminals
IMPL and ACT can be modified to determine the initialisation of a module or signal after next download of configuration data. IMPL = 0 IMPL = 1 ACT = 0 ACT = 1 means the module (and its signals) is spare and will not be initialised. means the module is implemented. means the signal is spare and will not be activated after module initialising. means the signal is activate. This Chapter contains the data sheets for all Data Base Elements available for Advant Controller 80.
The initialisation of modules and their signals will always be done after start-up of the Advant Controller 80 system or after on-line change of the data base element. The configuration values for the I/O modules are stored on the Advant Controller 80 processor module.
DIAG Terminal
The following table defines the bits of terminal DIAG for S800 I/O modules.
Bit 0 1 Value OPERATIONAL OSP Description The I/O module is operational, working okay. The I/O module has detected loss of communication with the Processor module PM810 and entered the OSP (Output Set as Predetermined) state. It will automatically be taken into operation again by the system. The module has its parameters and will automatically be taken in operation by the system. The module has not its configuration parameters. The system will automatically send down the parameters and take the module into operation. The module or the system has detected a faulty module or the communication with the module is broken. Replace the I/O module, if the module shows a red LED. The module is performing an initiation. The system will automatically configure the module and take it into operation.
2 3
READY NOT CONFIGURED
ERROR
INITIATION
AC80 Reference Manual, DB Elements
12 - 1
Bit 6 7 8
Value MAINTENANCE STATE: 7 NO CONFIGURATION
Description Not reported by any I/O module. Undefined state #7. Please report to ABB Service. Default value when creating the data base element. The system will automatically doweled the configuration and take the module into operation. It is also reported when the IMPL (Implemented) flag is set to 0. Set IMPL to 1. The processor module PM810 has detected that it could not access the I/O module two times in a row and forced it into the OSP (Output Set as Predetermined) state. It will automatically be taken into operation again by the system. The I/O module and the data base configuration does not comply. Change the I/O module or replace the data base element with the appropriate type. The CI810 module reports this when performing configuration of the I/O module. The communication module (e.g CI810) has detected an error on the I/O module. Replace the I/O module. The I/O module is not inserted in its position. Insert the I/O module. Undefined state #14. Please report to ABB Service. Undefined state #14. Please report to ABB Service.
OSP (FORCED)
10
WRONG TYPE
11 12
CONFIGURING ERROR (FORCED)
13 14 15
HW MISSING STATE: 14 STATE: 15
12 - 2
AI Module
Summary
AI810,AI820
The AI Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Input hardware module of type AI810 or AI820 contained in an Advant Fieldbus 100 I/O station. The Data Base element is superior to the signal elements associated to the analog input channels in the module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module. By means of the call name AI810 or AI820 an Engineering Station will create: I Data Base element of type AI module 8 (AI810) or 4 (AI820) Data Base elements of type Analog Input
Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_1 AI Module: AI800_1 0 0 0 1 AI810 50Hz 4...20mA NAME BUS WARNING ERR DIAG
STATION POSITION IMPL TYPE GRIDFREQ CONV_PAR
Figure 1.
Terminal Description
Table 1.
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks 1
NAME BUS
2
user predef
3
AI800_x 0
4
-
5
Unique NAME of the I/O module. BUS number. Part of address.
6
Max 20 characters -
12 - 3
Table 1 continued
STATION POSITION IMPL
2
predef user user
5
STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0 = the module is spare 1 = the module is implemented Module TYPE designation. GRIDFREQuency. Values: 16 2/3Hz, 50Hz, 60Hz. CONVersion PARameter. Default value for the I/O signal elements: 0...20mA, 4...20mA, 0...10V, 2...10V, 0...20mA,LL, 4...20mA,LL, 0...10V,LL, 2...10V,LL. WARNING indicates a non-fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal errors, such as configuration errors or hardware error. DIAGnostics.
B(r)
TYPE GRIDFREQ
predef user
AI810/ AI820 50Hz
CONV_PAR
user
4-20mA
The comma before LL in some of the values is part of the string value.
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
DIAG
system
I(r)
See the Section DIAG Terminal of S800 I/O Modules on the first pages in Chapter 12.
12 - 4
RTD Module
Summary
AI830
The RTD Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Input RTD hardware module of type AI830 contained in an Advant FieldBus 100 I/O station. The data base element is superior to the signal elements associated to the RTD input channels in the module and contais diagnostic information of the I/O module: By means of the call name AI830 an Engineering Station will create: 1 Data Base element of type RTD module 8 Data Base elements of type RTD Input
Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_2 RTD Module: AI800_2 0 0 0 1 AI830 50Hz Pt100,850C NAME BUS WARNING ERR DIAG
Figure 1.
Table 1.
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 NAME BUS STATION POSITION 2 user predef predef user 3 AI800_x 0 0 0 4 5 Unique NAME of the I/O module. BUS number. Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. 6 Max 20 characters -
12 - 5
Table 1 continued
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks
1 IMPL 2 user 3 1 4 B(r) 5 IMPLemented. 0 = the module is spare 1 = the module is implemented Module TYPE designation. GRIDFREQuency. Values: 50Hz, 60Hz. CONVersion PARameter. Default value for the I/O signal elements: See the table Conversion Parameters below. WARNING indicates a non fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal error, such as configuration errors or hardware errors. DIAGnostics. 6
TYPE GRIDFREQ CONV_PAR
predef user user
AI810/ AI820 50Hz 4-20mA -
Modification denied after creation.
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
DIAG
system
I(r)
Conversion Parameters
Table 2.
Value
1
Range
Value
Range -112...176F -328...482F -328...1562F -76...356F -112...500F -142...500F
Pt100,80C -80...80C Pt100,250C -112...250C Pt100,850C -200...850C Ni100,180C -60...180C Ni120,260C -80..260C Cu10,260C -100...260C Resistor,400 0...400 1 ( ) All values include a comma.
Pt100,176F Pt100,482F Pt100,1562F Ni100,356F Ni120,500F Cu10,500F
12 - 6
TC Module
Summary
AI835
The TC Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Input TC hardware module of type AI835 contained in an Advant Fieldbus 100 I/O station. The Data Base element is superior to the signal elements associated to the TC input channels in the module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module. By means of the call name AI835 an Engineering Station will create: 1 Data Base element of type TC module 8 Data Base elements of type TC Input
Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_3 TC Module: AI800_3 0 0 0 1 AI835 50Hz J,C 0 30.0C NAME BUS WARNING ERR DIAG
STATION POSITION IMPL TYPE GRIDFREQ TC_TYPE CJC FJT
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME BUS STATION POSITION IMPL
2
user predef predef user user
3
AI800_x 0 0 0 1
4
B(r)
5
Unique NAME of the I/O module. BUS number. Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0=the module is spare Module TYPE designation 1=the module is implemented Module TYPE designation
6
Max 20 characters -
TYPE
prefed
AI835
12 - 7
Table 1 continued
GRIDFREQ
2
user user
3
50Hz J,C
5
GRIDFREQuency. Values: 50Hz, 60Hz. ThermoCouple TYPE. Default value for the I/O signal elements. Values: See the table TC-Types below.
TC_TYPE
CJC
user
FJT
user
30.0C
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
DIAG
system
I(r)
Cold Junction Compensation Values 0=Cold Junction: Compensation =Fixed Junction Compensation Fixed Junction Temperature. Values: -40.0C to 100.0C or -40.0F to 212.0F. WARNING indicates a non fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal errors, such as configuration errors or hardware errors. DIAGnostics.
Both for Celsius and Fahrenheit. Modification denied after creation. Modification denied after creation.
TC-Types
Table 2.
Value
1
Range
0...1820C 0...2300C -270...1000C -210...1200C -270...1372C -270...1300C -50...1769C -50...1769C -270...400C -40...100C -75...75mV
Value
Range
32...3308F 32...4172F -454...1832F -346...2192F -454...2501.6F -454...2372F -58...3216.2F -60...3216.2F -454...752F -40...212F
B,C C,C E,C J,C K,C N,C R,C S,C T,C Pt100,C Linear
B,F C,F E,F J,F K,F N,F R,F S,F T,F Pt100,F
12 - 8
AI Calculated (Event option)

Summary
AIC
The AI Calculated element is an event channel element used for detection of calculated analog events. An event is detected when the real value (terminal VALUE) exceeds one of the two high or low limits or moves back into the range. The hysteresis parameter (terminal HYST) can be used to suppress event generation if the value is fluctuating around a limit.
Overview
AI Calculated: Base Part Limit Check
NAME ACT NORM_TR AL_DIAL

SCANT
VALUE ERR
EN_HI2 HI_LIM2 EN_HI1 HI_LIM1 EN_LO1 LO_LIM1 EN_LO2 LO_LIM2 HYST
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-DAT4

AI Calculated: Base Part
AIC1 1
0 0 640ms
NAME ACT NORM_TR AL_DIAL SCANT
VALUE ERR
Figure 2.
Terminal Description, Base Part
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
AICx 1
5
Unique module NAME. The element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive
6
Max 20 characters. Element must be referenced by an EVS(S) when ACT=1.
12 - 9
Table 1 continued
NORM_TR
2
user/ PC user
3
0
4
B(r/w)
5 NORMal TReatment. 0=event detection disabled 1=event detection enabled DIAL the master on ALarm. 0=no dial on alarm 1=dial on alarm SCAN Time for event recording. Values: 10ms, 20ms, 40ms, 80ms, 160ms, 320ms, 640ms, 1280ms, 2560ms, 5120ms, 10240ms, 20480ms,40960ms, 81920ms, 163840ms, 327680ms. ERRor flag indicating fatal errors. Signal VALUE (is watched for events).
6
Not allowed to change on-line. Not in use.
AL_DIAL
SCANT
user
640ms
ERR VALUE
system PC 0
B(r) R(r/w)
Limit Check
Edit DB Terminal Values-AIC1

AI Calculated: Limit Check
0
90.0 0 80.0 0 -80.0 0 -90.0 5.0
EN_HI2 HI_LIM2 EN_HI1 HI_LIM1 EN_LO1 LO_LIM1 EN_LO2 LO_LIM2 HYST
Figure 3.
12 - 10
Terminal Description, Limit Check
Table 2.
EN_HI2
2
user/ PC
3
0x
4
B(r/w)
5 ENables High limit no. 2 for event generation. 0=disable 1=enable HIgh LIMit no.2 for event generation of VALUE. ENables HIgh limit no. 1 for event generation. 0=disable 1=enable HIgh LIMit no. 1 for event generation of VALUE. ENables LOw limit no. 1 for event generation of VALUE. LOw LIMit no.1 for event generation of VALUE. ENables LOw limit no. 2 for event generation. 0=disable 1=enable LOw LIMit no.2 for event generation of VALUE. HYSTeresis for limit check.
6
Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line. 0.0 Not allowed to change on-line.
HI_LIM2
user/ PC user/ PC
90.0
R(r/w)
EN_HI1
B(r/w)
HI_LIM1
user/ PC user/ PC user/ PC user/ PC
80.0
R(r/w)
EN_LO1
B(r/w)
LO_LIM1
-80.0
R(r/w)
EN_LO2
B(r/w)
LO_LIM2
user/ PC user/ PC
-90.0
R(r/w)
HYST
5.0
R(r/w)
12 - 11
AO Module
Summary
AO810,AO820
The AO Module Data Base element specifies an Analog Output hardware module of type AO810 or AO820 contained in an Advant FieldBus 100 I/O Station. The Data Base element is superior to the signal elements associated to the analog output chanels in the module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module. By means of the call name AO810 or AO820 an Engineering Station will create: 1 Data Base element of type AO module 8 (AO810) or 4 (AO820) Data Base elements of typeAnalog Output.
Edit DB Terminal Values-AI800_1 AI Module: AI800_1 0 0 0 1 AI810 50Hz 4...20mA NAME BUS WARNING ERR DIAG
Figure 1.
Table 1.
2
3
AI800_x 0 0 0 1
4
-
5
Unique NAME of the I/O module. BUS number. Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0 = the module is spare 1 = the module is implemented
6
Max 20 characters -
12 - 12
Table 1 continued
TYPE CONV_PAR
2
predef user
3
AO810/ AO820 4-20mA
5
Module TYPE designation. CONVersion PARameter. Default value for the I/O signal elements: 0...20mA, 4...20mA, WARNING indicates a non-fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal errors, such as configuration errors or hardware errors. DIAGnostics.
6
See call name Modification denied after creation.
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
DIAG
system
I(r)
12 - 13
Boolean Data
Summary
DAT(B)
The DAT(B) Data Base element holds 32 packed Boolean Data values. The data values are given a name and a valid flag. By means of the call name DAT(B) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Boolean Data.
Overview
Boolean Data:
Base Part
VALUE11-VALUE20 VALUE21-VALUE32
NAME
VALID VALUE VALUE2 VALUE3 VALUE4 VALUE5 VALUE6 VALUE7 VALUE8 VALUE9 VALUE10
VALUE11 VALUE12 VALUE13 VALUE14 VALUE15 VALUE16 VALUE17 VALUE18 VALUE19 VALUE20
VALUE21 VALUE22 VALUE23 VALUE24 VALUE25 VALUE26 VALUE27 VALUE28 VALUE29 VALUE30 VALUE31 VALUE32
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.B1 Boolean Data: Base Part NAME VALID VALUE VALUE2 VALUE3 VALUE4 VALUE5 VALUE6 VALUE7 VALUE8 VALUE9 VALUE10
Figure 2.
12 - 14
Table 1.
NAME
2
user
3
*
4
B(r/w)
5
Unique element NAME. Default name from superior Data Set element. When created independently default name is DATx. VALID. Can be set by PC element (or MMI,...). Boolean VALUE. Boolean VALUE.
6
Max 20 characters. Example if DSP is named SET1:SET1.B1
VALID VALUE VALUE2 . . . VALUE10
PC system system
B(r/w) B(r/w) B( r )
system
B(r/w)
Boolean VALUE.
VALUE11VALUE20
Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.B1 Boolean Data:

VALUE11-VALUE20
VALUE11 VALUE12 VALUE13 VALUE14 VALUE15 VALUE16 VALUE17 VALUE18 VALUE19 VALUE20
Figure 3.
VALUE21VALUE32
Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.B1 Boolean Data:

VALUE21-VALUE32
VALUE21 VALUE22 VALUE23 VALUE24 VALUE25 VALUE26 VALUE27 VALUE28 VALUE29 VALUE30 VALUE31 VALUE32
Figure 4.
12 - 15
Terminal Description, VALUE11VALUE32
Table 2.
VALUE11 VALUE12 . . . VALUE32
2
system system
3
-
4
B(r/w) B(r/w)
5
Boolean VALUE. Boolean VALUE.
system
B(r/w)
Boolean VALUE.
12 - 16
Integer Data
Summary
DAT(I)
The DAT(I) Data Base element holds one 16 bit integer data value. The data value is given a name and a valid flag. By means of the call name DAT(I) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Integer Data.
Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.14 Integer Data: SET1.14 NAME VALID VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME
2
user
3
*
5
Unique element NAME. Default name from superior Data Set element. When created independently default name is DATx. VALID flag. Can be set by PC element (or MMI,...). VALUE of type Integer.
6
Max 20 characters. Example if DSP is named SET1:SET1.B1
VALID VALUE
PC system
B(r/w) I(r/w)
12 - 17
Packed Integer Data

Summary
DAT(II)
The DAT(II) Data Base element holds two 16 bit integer values. The data values are given a name and a valid flag. The element can not be created automatically by a DSP. By means of the call name DAT(II) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Packed Integer Data.
Edit DB Terminal Values-DAT4 Packed Integer Data: DAT4 1
1
NAME
SCA_FTR
VALID VALUE
SCA_FTR2 VALUE2
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME SCA_FTR
2
user user
3
DATx 1
5
Unique element NAME. SCAling FacTorR for VALUE. Allowed values: 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000. SCAling FacTorR for VALUE2. Allowed values: 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000. VALID flag. Can be set by PC element (or MMI). VALUE of type Integer. VALUE number 2 of type Integer.
6
Max 19 characters.
SCA_FTR2
system
VALID VALUE VALUE2
PC system system
0 -
B(r/w) I(r/w) I(r/w)
12 - 18
IntegerLong Data
Summary
DAT(IL)
The DAT(IL) Data Base element contains one 32 bit integer data value. The data value is given a name and a valid flag. By means of the call name DAT(IL) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type IntegerLong Data.
Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.IL7 IntegerLong Data: SET1.IL7 NAME VALID VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME
2
user
3
*
5
Unique element NAME. Default name from superior Data Set element. When created independently default name is DATx. VALID flag. Can be set by PC element (or MMI): VALUE of type IntegerLong.
6
Max 20 characters. Example if DSP is named SET1: SET1.IL1
VALID VALUE
PC system
B(r/w) IL(r/w)
12 - 19
Real Data
Summary
DAT(R)
The DAT(R) Data Base element holds one real dat value. The data value is given a name and a valid flag. By means of the call name DAT(R) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Real Data.
Edit DB Terminal Values-SET1.R2 Real Data: SET1.R2 NAME VALID VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME
2
user
3
*
5
Unique element NAME. Default name from superior Data Set element. When created independently default name is DATx. VALID flag. Can be set by PC element (or MMI): VALUE of type Real..
6
Max 20 characters. Example if DSP is named SET1: SET1.R1
VALID VALUE
PC system
B(r/w) R(r/w)
12 - 20
Fieldbus Adapter Parameters(=DCB initialisation) DCB01

Summary
The DCB01 Data Base element is necessary for initialization and usage of an optional FBA module of AC80. (FBA acronym comes from FieldBus Adapter. The name DCB01 comes from former APCsystems, where respective boards were called DCB boards = Drive Communication Boards.) "DCB interface" is a programming and hardware standard used to link the AC80 with various types of FBA modules (=in order to interface an AC80 station to various types of communication systems which presume attached stations to use specific communication protocol). DCB01 defines the usage of the DCB segment within DualPortMemory of AC80. (DualPortMemory is a common interface media between CPU board and NCB board inside AC80.) The actual FBA is connected to NCB board (= to AC80) with optic fibers and DDCS protocol. The DCB segment has always preallocated fixed size, but it can be divided into appropriate number of buffers for VCIs (= Virtual Interface Connectors) according input values of DCB01. Each buffer (of same channel) will have equal size. And the number of VCIs will be limited so, that the available fixed data area size of the channel(s) is not exceeded. The existence (and acceptable configuration values) of DCB01 is a prerequisite for any other FBA related PC elements (= DCBAID,DCBRX, ). DCB01 is also used/necessary to specify, which type of FBA is presumed to exist in installed AC80 hardware, and which protocol variant (of possible multivariant FBA) should be used by (and exist in) the FBA. Additionally the programmer may define max. 30 communication parameters, which shall be downloaded into FBA during initialisation phase. These parameters do not have any specific meaning for DCB01 or for any other DCBxx elements in general. Their interpretation and checking is done thoroughly (=and only) by the interfaced FBA module. However, if some of the parameter values is/are not acceptable with specified protocol and FBA module, such configuration error prevents operations of FBA and is indicated back to AC80 and to user by DCBxx PC elements and/or DriDeb tool connected to NCB board. (DCB01 DB element has no live output pins).
12 - 21
Generally it is not necessary to specify those communications parameter values, which equal with default values of parameters inside FBA. However if you specify such values, you thus define, that this particular application should use your given values even if the default values in FBA firmware are later changed (for some reason). Most of the FBA modules will be "single channel" type (= use channel #1). But it is possible to specify also the second channel (with same or different VCI size) with DCB01 (if the FBA module supports 2 channels). The communication channels of FBA modules are principally dependent of each other and may not be parameterized individually. However, there is an exception: both channels may have their own number and size of VCIs. (It is possible to design a FBA so, that both channels have their own parameters, but these channel specific parameters must then have different identifying numbers. DCB01 or AC80 systems software does not know, which parameter is specifying e.g. baud rate for channel #1 and which for channel #2. (Note: This is different from DCB00 and DCBINIT of APC, where both channels had equal independent set of parameters).
Overview
DCB Link: Base Part NAME FBATYPE PROTOCOL
Channels
Par.Adjustments 1..
RECS1 RECSIZE1 RECS2 RECSIZE2
IND1 VAL1 IND2 VAL2 IND3 VAL3 IND4 VAL4 IND5 VAL5 IND6 VAL6 IND7 VAL7 IND8 VAL8 IND9 VAL9
Figure 1.
12 - 22
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-DCB1 DCB Link: Base Part DCB1 NPBA_80 10 NAME FBATYPE PROTOCOL
Figure 2.
Table 1.
NAME FBATYPE
2
user user
3
DCB NFBA_xx
5
Unique element NAME. TYPE of the FBA module (a string converted to a number). A code number to specify the desired PROTOCOL.
6
Max 20 characters.
PROTOCOL
user
10
Channels
Edit DB Terminal Values-DCB1 DCB Link: Channels 0 12 0 0 RECS1 RECSIZE1 RECS2 RECSIZE2
Figure 3.
Terminal Description, Channels
Table 2.
RECS1 RECSIZE1 RECS2 RECSIZE2
2
user user user user
3
0 12 0 0
5
Number of data buffers (VCIs) for channel #1. Size of a data buffer (VCI) for channel #1 (in bytes). Number of data buffers (VCIs) for channel #2. Size of a data buffer (VCI) for channel #2 (in bytes).
6
(1) (1) (1) (1)
(Note, that RECS2 > 0 or RECSIZE2 > 0 are allowed values with dual channel FBAs only).
12 - 23
(1) If RECSx = 0 and RECSIZEx > 0 the RECSx will be tuned as high as possible. Respectively if RECSx > 0 and RECSIZEx = 0. If both RECSx > 0 and RECSIZEx > 0 given RECSIZEx will be used as it is. Table 3. Valid strings for the protocol and respective integer codes in DCBAID.
String NFBA_xx NPBA_80 Code 0 141
Note 1: Recerved memory for each VCI buffer is 2*RECSIZE + 22 words. In other words: RECSIZE = length of the dat block (in words), and for each block it is necessary to allocate storage of 2 copies of the block (= for concurrent reading and writing) and additional VCI header (= 22 words regardless of data block size). Note 2: Max possible value for RECSIZE1 or RECSIZE2 = 127.
Communication Parameters
Communication Parameters are entered in parameter windows. There are 3 windows with 9 parameter entries (= pin pairs) in each, and one window with 3 parameter entries. Each pin pair is PARIDx/PARVALx. (both pins can be connected to integers). PARIDx value specifies, which parameter is the destination of PARVALx. Relevant PARIDx values are in range 340. It is not necessary to put them in increasing order (although recommended). If PARIDx = 0 (default value), the respective PARVALx value has no significance. Parameters 332 are sent to FBA. Parameters 3340 are for internal use in AC80. E.g. Parameter 33 = Timeout value in milliseconds for all DCBRX elements.
12 - 24
Par. Adjustments 1..
Edit DB Terminal Values-DCB1 DCB Link: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Par.Adjustments 1..
IND1 VAL1 IND2 VAL2 IND3 VAL3 IND4 VAL4 IND5 VAL5 IND6 VAL6 IND7 VAL7 IND8 VAL8 IND9 VAL9
Figure 4.
Terminal Description, Par. Adjustments 1..
Table 4.
IND1
2
user
3
0
5
INDx = index of the parameter to be changed. 040
6
By means of INDxVALx combinations some default values of DCB parameters can be changed.
VAL1 IND2 VAL2 IND3 VAL3 IND4 VAL4. . . . IND30 VAL30
user user user user user user user
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VALx = new value for the parameter.
user user
0 0
12 - 25
DI Module
Summary
DI810,DI811,DI820,DI821
The DI module Data Base element specifies a Digital Input hardware module of type DI810, DI811, DI820 or DI821 contained in an Advant FieldBus 100 I/O station. The data base element is superior to the siganal elements associated to the digital input channels in the module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module. By means of the call name DI810, DI811, DI820 or DI821 an Engineering Station will create: 1 data base element of type DI module 16 (DI810,DI811) or 8 (DI820, DO821) data base elements of type Digital Input
Edit DB Terminal Values-DI800_1 DI Module: DI800_1
0 0 0 1 DI810 8 NO 64
NAME
BUS STATION
WARNING ERR
DIAG
POSITION IMPL TYPE FILT SUP INSCANT
Figure 1.
Table 1.
2
3
DI800_x 0 0 0 1
5
Unique NAME of the I/O module. BUS number. Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0=the module is spare 1=the module is implemented
6
Max 20 characters.
B(r)
12 - 26
Table 1 continued
TYPE
2
predef
3
DI810/ DI811/ DI820/ DI821 8
5
Module TYPE designation.
FILT
user
On/off delay FILTer time in ms. Values: 2,4,8 and 16.
The actual filter time may vary in the following intervals: 23 ms, 46 ms, 812 ms and 1624 ms.
SUP
user
NO
INSCANT
user
64
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
DIAG
system
I(r)
Sensor power SUPervision of channel group 1 and 2. Values: YES=enabled NO= not enabled SCANner cycle time on AF 100 for INcoming values. Allowed values:1,2,4,8,16,32,64, 128,256,512,1024,2048, 4096. WARNING indicates a non-fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal errors, such as configuration errors or hardware errors. DIAGnostics.
12 - 27
DI Calculated (Event option)

Summary
DIC
The DI Calculated element is an event channel element used for detection of calculated digital events. An event is detected when the boolean value (terminal VALUE) changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa, and event generation is deblocked (terminal NORM_TR=1). There is a filtering facility to suppress event generation in case of rapidly changing values.
Edit DB Terminal Values-DIC1 DI Calculated:
DIC1 1 0 0 0 640ms 0
Base Part
NAME ACT NORM_TR NORM_POS AL_DIAL SCANT FILT_FTR
VALUE ERR
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
DICx 1
5
Unique NAME of the event channel. Element is: 0= not ACTive 1=ACTive NORMal TReatment. 0=event detection disabled 1=event detection enabled NORMal POSition for this channel. DIAL the master on ALarm. 0=no dial on alarm 1=dial on alarm
6
Max 20 characters. Element must be referenced by an EVS(S) when ACT=1. Not allowed to change online.
B(r/w)
NORM_TR
user/ PC
NORM_POS
user user
0 0 B(r)
AL_DIAL
Not in use.
12 - 28
Table 1 continued.
SCANT
2
user
3
640ms
5
SCAN Time for event detection. Values: 10ms, 20ms, 40ms, 80ms, 160ms, 320ms, 640ms, 1280ms, 2560ms, 5120ms, 10240ms, 20480ms, 40960ms, 81920ms, 163840ms, 327680ms. FILTer time FacToR. The filter time = FILT_FTR x SCANT is the duration of a value change before the change is accepted as event. Signal VALUE (is watched for events).
FILT_FTR
user
032
VALUE ERR
PC
system
B(r/w) B(r)
12 - 29
DO Module
Summary
DO810, DO820
The DO module Data Base element specifies a Digital Output hardware module of type DO810 or DO820 contained in an Advant FieldBus 100 I/O station. The data base element is superior to the siganal elements associated to the digital output channels in the module and contains diagnostic information of the I/O module. By means of the call name DO810 or DO820 an Engineering Station will create: 1 data base element of type DO module 16 (DO810) or 8 (DO820) data base elements of type Digital Output
Edit DB Terminal Values-DO800_1 DO Module:
DO800_1 0 0 0 1 DO810 NO
NAME BUS
WARNING ERR DIAG
STATION POSITION IMPL TYPE

SUP
Figure 1.
Table 1.
2
3
DO800_x 0 0 0 1
5
Unique NAME of the I/O module. BUS number. Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0=the module is spare 1=the module is implemented Module TYPE designation: DO810 or Do820
6
Max 20 characters.
B(r)
TYPE
predef
DO810
12 - 30
Table 1 continued
SUP
2
user
3
NO
5
Sensor power SUPervision of channel group 1 and 2. Values: YES=enabled NO=not enabled WARNING indicates a non-fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal errors, such as configuration errors or hardware errors. DIAGnostics.
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
DIAG
system
I(r)
12 - 31
DriveBus Link
Summary
DRB00
The DB element DRB00 is used to define the (physical) drive numbers, drive types and application identifiers of the ACS 600 drives (e.g. ACS600 SingleDrive or ACS600 MultiDrive) connected to AC80. The logical drive numbers of the connected drives are always in the range 1...12 and these logical numbers are used in the DRNR inputs of the ACS function blocks (e.g. ACSRX).
DRB00 DRNR1 DRTYPE1 APPID1 DRNR2 DRTYPE2 APPID2 DRNR3 DRTYPE3 APPID3 DRNR4 DRTYPE4 APPID4 DRNR5 DRTYPE5 APPID5 DRNR6 DRTYPE6 APPID6 DRNR7 DRTYPE7 APPID7 DRNR8 DRTYPE8 APPID8 DRNR9 DRTYPE9 APPID9 DRNR10 DRTYPE10 APPID10 DRNR11 DRTYPE11 APPID11 DRNR12 DRTYPE12 APPID12 Drives 1...4 Drives 5...8 Drives 9...12
Figure 1.
Table 1.
DRNR1
2
system
3
1
5
Physical DRive NumbeR of the first drive (this number must be set in the drive) DRive TYPE of the first drive (NO_DRIVE or ACS600)
DRTYPE1
user
NO_DRIVE
12 - 32
Table 1 continued
APPID1
2
user
3
0
5
APPlication IDentification number of the first drive (see section "Application Identifiers"). Physical DRive NumbeR of the second drive. DRive TYPE of the second drive. APPlication IDentification number of the second drive.
DRNR2 DRTYPE2 APPID2 . . . DRNR12 DRTYPE12 APPID12
system user user
2 NO_DRIVE 0
system user user
12 NO_DRIVE 0
DRive TYPE of the 12th drive. APPlication IDentification number of the 12th drive.
Note: The terminals indicated as Entered by the system are not modifiable by the USER.
Application Identifiers APPIDn
The Application Identifier of a drive application is a 16 bit integer defined by the drive application programmer. Note: Application Identifiers are not supported in the AC80 software package 801SW010 (the only legal value of an APPIDn input is the default value 0). Application Identifiers are supported in the AC80 software package 801SW110. Legal values of the APPIDn inputs are: 0 = DriveBus management function is deactivated. 1 = Drivebus management function is activated, any Application Identifier in the corresponding drive is acceptable.
DriveBus Management
In the DriveBus Management function is used then it initialises and supervises the communication link from AC80 on the drives and gives status information through the output terminal LINK of the ACSRX PC elements. If the link connection fails DriveBus Manager disconnect the communication to the drive. After the link connection is restarted DriveBus manager reactivates the communication. Description of PC element ACSRX.
Related Documents
12 - 33
Drive Data Set

Summary
DRIDS
The Drive Data Set element is referenced by the Engineered drive Data Base element. It specifies a data package to be exchanged cyclicly with the drive.
Edit DB Terminal Values-DRIDS1 Drive Data Set: DRIDS1 1 1 NAME ACT DS_NO WR_ENA I1 I2
I3 O1 O2 O3
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
DRIDSx 1
5 Unique NAME of the data set. Element is: 0 = not ACTive 1 = ACTive
6
Max 20 characters. Element must be referenced by an EVS(S) when ACT=1. 1255
DS_NO WR_ENA
user system
I(r) B(r/w)
I1 I2 I3 O1 O2 O3
system system system system system system
I(r/w) I(r/w) I(r/w) I(r/w) I(r/w) I(r/w)
Data Set Number. WRiting ENAbled. Enables writing the Drive Data Set. Integer 1 of the data set transmitted. Integer 2 of the data set transmitted. Integer 3 of the data set transmitted. Integer 1 of the data set received. Integer 2 of the data set received. Integer 3 of the data set received.
12 - 34
Engineered Drive
Summary
DRIENG
The DRIENG Data Base element specifies an Engineered drive hardware module on the module bus. By means of the call name DRIENG an Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Engineered drive.
Overview
Engineered Base Part Drive: NAME WARNING BUS ERR STATION POSITION IMPL TYPE DIAG
Parameter Part Reference Part
APPID
SPEEDSF NOMSPEED NOMVOLT NOMPOWER
REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REF5 REF6 REF7 REF8 REF9 REF10
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-DRIENG1 Engineered Drive:

DRIENG1 0 0 0 1 ACS600ENG
Base Part
NAME BUS
WARNING ERR DIAG
Figure 2.
Table 1.
2
3
DRIENGx 0 0 0 1
5 Unique NAME of the drive. BUS number.Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0=the drive is spare 1=the drive is implemented
6
Max 20 characters.
12 - 35
Table 1 continued
TYPE WARNING
2
user system
3
ACS600 ENG
4
I(r/w) B(r)
5 Module TYPE. WARNING flag indicating non-fatal errors. ERRor flag indicating fatal errors. DIAGnostics.
6
Max. 10 characters.
ERR DIAG
system system
B(r) I(r)
Parameter Part

0
Parameter Part
APPID
Figure 3.
Terminal Description, Parameter Part
Table 2.
APPID
2
user
3
0
5 APPlication IDentity which has to match with the application identity in the drive. 0:no match is required >0: match is required SPEED Scale Factor is used in calculations to get the rpm of the motor. NOMinal SPEED of motor. This value can be used by the application in calculations of the actual speed.
SPEEDSF
system
I(r)
NOMSPEED
Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration. Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration.
12 - 36
Table 2 continued
NOMSPEED
2
system
4
I(r)
5 NOMinal SPEED of motor. This value can be used by the application in calculations of the actual speed. NOMinal VOLTage of the motor. This value can be used by the application in calculations of the actual voltage. NOMinal POWER of the motor. This value can be used by the application in calculationsof the actual power.
6
Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration. Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration. Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration.
NOMVOLT
system
I(r)
NOMPOWER
system
R(r)
Reference Part

Reference Part
Figure 4.
Terminal Description, Reference Part
Table 3.
REF1 REF2 . . . REF10
2
user user
5 REFerence 1 to a DRIDS element. REFerence 2 to a DRIDS element.
6
Maximum 20 characters. Maximum 20 characters
user
REFerence 10 to a DRIDS element.
Maximum 20 characters.
12 - 37
Standard Drive
Summary
DRISTD
The DRISTD Data Base element specifies a Standard drive hardware module on the module bus. By means of the call name DRISTD an Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Standard drive.
Overview
Standard Drive:
Base Part
Parameter Part Reference Part
NAME BUS
WARNING ERR DIAG
REF1 REF2
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-DRISTD1 Standard Drive:

DRISTD1 0 0 0 1 ACS600STD
Base Part
NAME BUS
WARNING ERR DIAG
Figure 2.
Table 1.
2
3
DRISTDx 0 0 0 1
5 Unique NAME of the drive. BUS number. Part of address. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0=the drive is spare 1=the drive is implemented
6
Max. 20 characters
12 - 38
Table 1 continued
TYPE WARNING ERR DIAG
2
user system system system
3
ACS600 STD
5 Module TYPE.
6 Max. 10 characters.
B(r) B(r) I(r)
WARNING flag indicating non-fatal errors. ERRor flag indicating fatal error. DIAGnostics.
Parameter Part

Parameter Part
Figure 3.
Terminal Description, Parameter Part
Table 2.
SPEEDSF
2
system
4
I(r)
5 SPEED Scale Factor is used in calculations to get the rpm of the motor. NOMinal SPEED of motor. This value can be used by the application in calculations of the actual speed.
6
Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration.
NOMSPEED
system
I(r)
12 - 39
Table 2 continued
NOMVOLT
2
system
4
I(r)
5 NOMinal VOLTage of the motor. This value can be used by the application in calculations of the actual voltage. NOMinal POWER of the motor. This value can be used by the application in calculations of the actual power.
6
Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration. Updated from drive when IMPL=1 during configuration.
NOMPOWER
system
R(r)
Reference Part

Reference Part
REF1 REF2
Figure 4.
Terminal Description, Reference Part
Table 3.
REF1 REF2
2
user user
5 REFerence 1 to a DRIDS element. REFerence 2 to a DRIDS element.
6
Maximum 20 characters. Maximum 20 characters.
12 - 40
DataSet Peripheral
Summary
DSP
The DataSet Peripheral element represents a block of data to be received or sent over Advant Fieldbus 100 via Data Set Communication. However in AC80, actual communication is done by PC-elements (=AFTRA, AFREC, MB90TRA or MB90REC) where you must specify address, mode and data for the data set. DSP element should specify same address, direction, cycle time and data length as defined in respective PC-element. By means of the call name DSP the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type DataSet Peripheral.
Overview
DSPx NAME ACT BUS IDENT NO_BREC NO_INT

NO_INTL VALID ERR
DataSet Peripheral Base Part Value references
NO_REAL USER SOURCE BLOCKED STATION CYCLETIM SORT_REF REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REF5 REF6 REF7 REF8
Figure 1.
12 - 41
Base Part
DSPx
DSP1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 RECEIVE 0 1 512 YES
NAME ACT BUS IDENT NO_BREC NO_INT

NO_INTL
VALID ERR
DataSet Peripheral Base Part Value references
NO_REAL USER SOURCE BLOCKED STATION CYCLETIM SORT_REF
Figure 2.
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user PC
3
DSPx 1
5 Each Data Set must have a unique NAME The element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive BUS number of related bus. IDENTifies the Data Set on the Advant Fielbus 100. Number of Boolean RECords in the set. Number of INTeger regords in the set. Number of INTegerLong records in the set Number of REAL records in the set. USER 0 = Advant Fieldbus 100 communication 1 = not yet defined 2 = not yet defined SOURCE, defines the direction of the communication, RECEIVE, SEND
6
Max 20 characters.
BUS IDENT
user user
0 1
Treated as comment. 150
NO_BREC NO_INIT NO_INTL NO_REAL USER
user user user user predef
0 0 0 0 0
08 08 08 08
SOURCE
user
RECEIVE
12 - 42
Table 1 continued
BLOCKED STATION CYCLETIM
2
predef user user
3
0 1 512
5
For compatibility reason. STATION number of opposite target. CYCLETIMe, transmission interval in milliseconds. 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. SORT REFerences, if YES then all DAT refs are sorted in order: B, I, IL, R. VALID. Not updated in AC80. ERRor. Not updated in AC80
6
180
SORT_REF
user
YES
VALID ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
Value References
DSPx REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REF5 REF6 REF7 REF8 DataSet Peripheral Base Part Value references
Figure 3.
Terminal Description, Value References
Table 2.
2
user user
5
REFerence: Name of a DAT element. REFerence: Name of a DAT element.
user
REFerence: Name of a DAT element.
12 - 43
Because DSP is not executable element in AC80, it means, that connected DAT DB-elements are not updated by receiving DSP neither sent out by transmitting DSP. Therefore the purpose of DAT connections is just to specify same data length for the data set as updated by the PC-element and all connections to from DSP REF pins may lead to same single (dummy) DAT. There is however one exception: If you want to update the DAT values by AdvaCommand supervisory system with single service messages, the DAT must be dedicated for the reference value and belong to some DSP.) There are 3 reasons why AC80 application should contain DSPs, although they are not used for communication. Bus Configuration Builder (=tool program) extracts AF100 dataset information from DSPs. If they are omitted, and datasets introduced only with PC elements, thos datasets will stay hidden from overall bus configuration files. PC-elements AFTRA, AFREC, MB90TRA and MB90REC check during their initialization phase, that respective DSP element should exist in DB part. And if not, an error code (=3106) will be set in ERRC output pin. (However the PC element is still usable, although it shows such error code. Maybe we should say, that it is a Warning code) AFREC and MB90REC do not specify the CYCLETIM attribute of the data set. If the cycle time of the data set differs much from the CONTRM cycle time, ERR output pin of the PC-element setting after 4 consecutive failed PC-element executions, is principally wrong. But if the receiving DSP exist, its CYCLETIM value is used by the PC-element for dataset supervision, and this error so corrected.
To make it easier for users to insert both DSP and respective PC element at same time, it is possible to insert a type circuit in AC80 application, which contain both. Following type circuits are prepared for this purpose:
AFIN AFOUT AF_IN AF_OUT AF_INW AF_OUTW
= AFREC and DSP with connections to individual DATs = AFTRA and DSP with connections to individual DATs = AFREC and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT = AFTRA and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT = MB90REC and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT = MB90TRA and DSP with connections to common DUMMY_DAT
12 - 44
Event Set (Send) (Event option)

Summary
EVS(S)
Event Set (EVS) element are used for transport of time-tagged events from Advant Controller 110 to Advant Controller 400 Series. An Event Set element groups a set of Event Channels for sending or receiving of events. The Event Set (Send) element collects events from referenced Event Channel elements and sends them to the event receiver when requested. The maximum number of Event Set elements is restricted to 16 per Advant Controller 110 station. An Event Channel element (AIC, DIC) may not be referenced by different EVS(S) elements.
Overview
Event Set (Send): Base Part
Ev en t Ch an .1- 16 Ev en t Ch an .17 -3 2
NAME ACT IDENT QUEUE
CLEAR_Q Q_EMPTY WARNING ERR ERRTYPE
REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REF5 REF6


Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-EVS1

Event Set (Send): Base Part
EVS1 1 1 NORMAL
NAME ACT IDENT QUEUE
CLEAR_Q Q_EMPTY WARNING ERR ERRTYPE
Figure 2.
12 - 45
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
EVSx 1
5 Unique NAME of the Event Set. The element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive IDENTifies the Event Set element in the node.
6
Max 20 characters.
IDENT
user
QUEUE
user
NORMAL
CLEAR_Q
system
B(r/w)
Q_EMPTY
system
B(r)
WARNING ERR ERRTYPE
system system system
B(r) B(r) I(r)
Specifies the size of the event QUEUE. Values: NORMAL (100 ENTRIES) EXTENDED (500 entries) CLEAR event Queue. 0=no action 1=clear event queue Flag indicating: 0=Event Queue is not EMPTY 1=Event Queue is EMPTY WARNING flag indicating non-fatal errors. ERRor flag indicating fatal errors. Indicating ERRor TYPE.
165535 Not allowed to change on-line. Not allowed to change on-line.
Event Chan. 1-16
Edit DB Terminal Values-EVS1 Event Set (Send):

Ev en t Ch an .1- 16

Figure 3.
12 - 46
Event Chan. 17-32
Edit DB Terminal Values-EVS1 Event Set (Send):

Ev en t Ch an .17 -3 2

Figure 4.
Terminal Description, Event Chan. 1-32
Table 2.
2
user user
3
EVSx 1
5 REFerence: Name of an Event Channel element. REFerence: Name of an Event Channel element.
6
(1) (1)
user
REFerence: Name of an Event Channel element.
(1)
(1) The REF1 to REF16 terminals are used to fill in the reference to the event channels. References can be made to the AIC and DIC elements generating events.
Bit Values of Terminal ERRTYPE
Table 3.
Bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 Description Communication disturbed to at least one event source. Communication disturbed to at lest one event target Event source error Event target error Event queue filled to 80% or more for one or more event targets Event queue overflow for one or more targets
Value of ERR, WARNING

WARNING=1 WARNING=1 ERR=1 ERR=1 ERR=1 ERR=1
12 - 47
MVI Data Block (ModBus option)

Summary
MVB
The MVB specifies one block of data to be either transmitted or received over the ModBus interface. One MVB may contain up to 128 DAT's of any type. The MVB requires creation needed DAT elements.
Overview
MVI Data Block: Ba se Part
Value ref.1-16
NAME ACT
EXECUTE EXECDONE VALID REGADDR ERR CMDCODE AUXINFO2 NO_BREC

NO_INT NO_INTL NO_REAL SOURCE BLOCKED NET
RE1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REF5 REF6

Va lu e re f. 11 3- 12 8
AUXINFO1
REMNODE CYCLETIM SORT_REF
Value ref.17-32

REF119 REF120 REF121 REF122 REF123
Value ref.33-48
Value ref.49-64
Value ref.65-80
Value ref.81-96
REF124 REF125 REF126
Value ref.97-112
REF127 REF128
Figure 1.
12 - 48
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-MVB1

MVI Data Block: Ba se Part
MVB1 1 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 RECEIVE 0 1 1 512 YES
NAME ACT REGADDR CMDCODE AUXINFO1 AUXINFO2 NO_BREC

NO_INT NO_INTL NO_REAL SOURCE BLOCKED NET REMNODE CYCLETIM SORT_REF
EXECUTE EXECDONE VALID

ERR
Figure 2.
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
MVBx 1
5 Unique module NAME. The element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive REGister start ADDRess in external PLC/RTU. CoMmand CODE to be executed by the MVI protocol handler, protocol dependent. AUXiliary INFOrmation 1, protocol dependent. AUXiliary INFOrmation 2, protocol dependent. Number of Boolean RECords DAT(B). Number of INTeger records DAT(I). Number of INTegerLong records DAT(IL). Number of REAL records DAT(R). SOURCE. Defines the direction of the data transmission. Values: RECEIVE, SEND
6
Max 20 characters.
REGADDR CMDCODE
user user
0 110
ModBus: 3001...49999 1500
AUXINFO1 AUXINFO2 NO_BREC NO_INT NO_INTL NO_REAL SOURCE
user user user user user user user
0 0 0 0 0 0 RECEIVE
0128 0128 0...128 0...128
12 - 49
Table 1 continued.
BLOCKED
2
user/ PC
3
0
4
B(r/w)
5 Cyclic data transmission. 0=not BLOCKED 1=BLOCKED MVI NETwork number used for Data Block transmission. REMote NODE number. In master mode: node no. of slave. In slave mode: node no. of master Defines the CYCLE TIMe of the protocol command execution in multiples of 100 milliseconds. Values: 0(no cyclic execution), 4,8,16,32,64,128,256,512, 1024,2048,4096,8192, 16384,32768 SORT REFerences. Values: NO=references not sorted YES=references sorted in the order B,I,IL,R. EXECUT invokes single execution of the specified protocol handler command when changing from 0 to 1. EXECDONE indicates that the single execution invoked by EXECUTE was done. Boolean VALue (IDentity) for handshaking between MVI and appl. program. - receiving MVB: 0=MVB has not been received within 3XCYCLETIM. 1=MVB has been updated -sending MVB: 0=MVB has not been sent 1=MVB has been sent ERRor flag.
6
Not allowed to change online. Set to 1
NET
user
REMNODE
user
1240
CYCLETIM
user
512
SORT_REF
user
YES
EXECUTE
system
B(r/w)
EXECDONE
system
B(r)
VALID
system
system
B(r/w)
ERR
system
B(r)
12 - 50
Value ref. 1-16
Edit DB Terminal Values-MVB1

MVI Data Block:
Va lue ref.1-16
RE1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REF5 REF6

Figure 3. Value ref. 17-32, 33-48, 49-64, 65-80, 81-96, 97-112, 113-128. The value references 17-128 are analogous to Value ref. 1-16.
Terminal Description, Value ref.1-128
Table 2.
2
user user
5 REFerence: Name of a DAT element. REFerence: Name of a DAT element.
user
REFerence: Name of a DAT element.
Command Codes for ModBus
Table 3.
CMDCODE ModBus Code
MOVE BLOCK MASTER=0 101 102 104 106 201 202 205 206 3D0 3D0 3D0 3D4 3D4 3D4 3D4 MASTER=1 3C4 3C8 3C8 3C8 3C4 3C4 3C4 3C4 Read exception st. Read I/O register. Read I/O register Read I/O status. Preset 1 register Preset register Force 1 coil Force coils
Command Description
6 16 5 15
12 - 51
MVI Channel (ModBus option)

Summary
MVICHAN
The MVICHAN element specifies the configuration of the ModBus channel. The ModBus channel should consist of less than 8 nodes each node is configured with a MVINODE element.
Overview
MVI Channel: Base Part Co mmu nica tio n Parameters
NAME ACT NET NODE

MASTER TIMESYNC
PROTTYPE CTRLERR DSR DUPLEX DCD DIAL SPEED CHLEN STOPBITS

PARITY LINESTAB CARRDEL MAXRETR CHARTOUT TURNTIME UARTTOUT POLLCYCL CTS RI
PARAM1 PARAM2 PARAM3 PARAM4 PARAM5 PARAM6 PARAM7 PARAM8
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-MVC1

MVI Channel: MVC1 1 1 1 0 NONE
Base Part
NAME ACT NET NODE

MASTER TIMESYNC
ERR
Figure 2.
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
MVCx 1
5 Unique element NAME. The element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive NETwork number of MVI channel.
6
Max 20 characters.
NET
user
Set to 1 Not used.
12 - 52
Table 1 continued
NODE
2
user
3
1
5 Own NODE number of MVI channel.
6
1240 Not allowed to change online. Not allowed to change online. Set to 0 Not used
MASTER
user
TIMESYNC
user
ERR
system
B(r)
MVI channel in: 0=slave mode 1=MASTER mode TIME SYNChronization. Values: NONE, MASTER, SLAVE ERRor flag.
Communication

MVI Channel: 2 FULL 0 9600 8 1 ODD 1 0 2 2 200 1 10
Co mmu nica tio n
PROTTYPE CTRLERR DSR DUPLEX DCD DIAL SPEED CHLEN STOPBITS

PARITY LINESTAB CARRDEL MAXRETR CHARTOUT TURNTIME UARTTOUT POLLCYCL CTS RI
Figure 3.
Terminal Description, Communication
Table 2.
PROTTYPE DUPLEX
2
user user
3
3 FULL
5 PROTocol TYPE 3=ModBus RTU DUPLEX mode, concerns modem signals between MVI channel and modem. Values:FULL,HALF,HALF (DCD IGNORED).
6
Set to 3 Set to HALF
12 - 53
Table 2 continued
DIAL
2
user
3
0
5 DIALing. 0=disabled 1=enabled (for dialing) Transmission SPEED of communication in bits/second. Values: 300,9600,19200 CHaracter LENgth in bits. STOP BITS. Values:1,1.5,2 PARITY. Values: NONE,ODD,EVEN LINE STABilization time. Number of characters to allow the carrier wave to stabilize before transmission of the first character. CARRier DELay. Number of characters to wait after transmission of the last character before deactivating RTS. MAXimum number of RETRansmissions before line is considered broken. CHARacter Time_OUT TURN around TIME in milliseconds. Assumed time for telegram processing in slave mode depending only on system load. Total time to wait for response is: TURNTIME + transmission time. UART transmission TIme_OUT. Maximum number of characters for the to wait for a DCD before aborting the transmission (used if DUPLEX=HALF). Maximum time between two POLLing CYCLes in seconds.
6
Set to 0 Not used 300 for testing only
SPEED
user
9600
CHLEN STOPBITS PARITY LINESTAB
user user user user
8 1 ODD 1
Set to 8 Set to 1 Use EVEN ModBus: 015, Set to 0 Not used ModBus: 015, Set to 0 Not used ModBus: 020 ModBus: 0...15 10...20000 in steps of 10
CARRDEL
user
MAXRETR
user
CHARTOUT TURNTIME
user user
2 200
UARTTOUT
user
0...15 Set to 1
POLLCYCL
user
10
ModBus: 0...255
12 - 54
Table 2 continued
CTRLERR
2
system
4
B(r)
5 Indicating any (ConTRoL) ERRor in the modem interface. Modem signal Data Set Ready. Modem signal Data Carrier Detect. Modem signal Clear To Send. Modem signal Ring Indicator.
DSR DCD CTS RI
system system system system
B(r) B(r) B(r) B(r)
Parameters

MVI Channel: 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Parameters
Figure 4.
Terminal Description, Parameters
Table 3.
2
user user user user user user user user
3
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5
Protocol PARAMeter 1. Protocol PARAMeter 2. Protocol PARAMeter 3. Protocol PARAMeter 4. Protocol PARAMeter 5. Protocol PARAMeter 6. Protocol PARAMeter 7. Protocol PARAMeter 8.
6
ModBus: 0...1 Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0. Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0
12 - 55
MVI Node (ModBus option)

Summary
MVINODE
The MVINODE represents a node on ModBus and specifies: 1. In master mode One slave node connected to the MVI channel The status words 1-3 for this slave node.
2. In slave mode The own status in status word 1.
Dialling and phone numbers are not used with AC80/ModBus.

Edit DB Terminal Values-MVN1 MVI Node:
MVN1 1 1 1
NAME ACT NET REMNODE DIALSTR1 PHONENO1 DIALSTR3 PHONENO2 DIALSTR3 PHONENO3 DIALSTR4 PHONENO4
STATUS1 STATUS2 STATUS3 ERR
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
MVNx 1
5 Unique element NAME. The element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive MVI NETwork number REMote NODE number. In master mode: node no. of slave. In slave mode: node no. of master.
6
Max 20 characters.
NET REMNODE
user user
1 1
Set to 1 Not used 1...240
12 - 56
Table 1 continued.
DIALSTR1 PHONENO1 DIALSTR2 PHONENO2 DIALSTR3 PHONENO3 DIALSTR4 PHONENO4 STATUS1 STATUS2 STATUS3 ERR
2
user user user user user user user user system system system system
5 DIAL STRing 1 for modern. PHONE Number 1. DIAL STRing 2 for modem. PHONE Number 2. DIAL STRing 3 for modem. PHONE Number 3. DIAL STRing 4 for modem. PHONE Number 4.
6
Max. 20 characters. Max. 20 characters. Max. 20 characters Max. 20 characters Max. 20 characters Max. 20 characters Max. 20 characters Max. 20 characters
IL(r) IL(r) IL(r) B(r)
MVI STATUS word 1. MVI STATUS word 2. MVI STATUS word 3. ERRor flag.
12 - 57
Special I/O Link

Summary
NCBIO
The DB element NCBIO is used to define the (physical) I/O device numbers and types connected to AC80. The logical device numbers of the connected I/O device are always in the range 1...8 and these logical numbers are used in the NODE inputs of the IORX PC element.
NCBIO IOTYPE1 IOTYPE2 IOTYPE3 IOTYPE4 Devices 1...4 Devices 5...8
IOTYPE5 IOTYPE6 IOTYPE7 IOTYPE8
Figure 1.
Table 1.
IOTYPE1
2
user
3
NO_DEVICE
IOTYPE2 . . . IOTYPE8
user
NO_DEVICE
5 I/O TYPE of the first I/O module (NO_DEVICE,DI/DO_DEVICE, AI/AO_DEVICE,DSU_DEVICE, COUNTER_DEVICE I/O TYPE of the second I/O module
user
NO_DEVICE
I/O TYPE of the eighth I/O module.
Related Documents
Description of the PC elements IORX.
12 - 58
Panel Bus Configuration

Summary
PANBUS
The PANBUS element specifies the configuration Panel Bus of AC80. Panel Bus can consist of up to 16 nodes used PC elements type PANC, PRTCON, MODR, MODW.
Overview
PanelBus Base Part master: NAME ACT NET NODE MASTER TIMESYNC
Communication Parameters
ERR
PROTTYPE DUPLEX DIAL SPEED CHLEN STOPBITS PARITY LINESTAB CARRDEL MAXRETR CHARTOUT TURNTIME UARTTOUT POLLCYCL
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-PANBUS1 PanelBus Master: Base Part PANBUS1 1 1 1 0 NONE NAME ACT NET NODE MASTER TIMESYNC ERR
Figure 2.
12 - 59
Table 1.
NAME ACT
2
user user
3
PANBUSx 1
4
-
5
Unique element NAME. Element is: 0 = spare 1 = ACTive NETwork number of Panel Bus. Own NODE number of Panel Bus. No effect because AC80 is master. Panel Bus in: 1 = MASTER mode TIMESYNChronization. Values: NONE ERRor flag.
6
Max 20 characters -
NET NODE
user user
1 1
1...254
MASTER TIMESYNC
user user
0 NONE
Must be master. -
ERR
system
B(r)
Not updated.
Communication
Edit DB Terminal Values-PANBUS1 PanelBus Master: 3 HALF 0 19200 8 1 NONE 1 0 2 2 200 1 10

Communication
PROTTYPE DUPLEX DIAL SPEED CHLEN STOPBITS PARITY LINESTAB CARRDEL MAXRETR CHARTOUT TURNTIME UARTTOUT POLLCYCL
Figure 3.
12 - 60
Terminal Description, Communication
Table 2.
PROTTYPE
2
user
3
3
4
-
5
PROTocol TYPE (ASCII, binary, checksum), 3 = ModBus RTU DUPLEX mode. Values: HALF DIALing. 0 = disabled Transmission SPEED of communication in bits/second. Values: 9600, 19200 CHaracter LENgth in bits. Values: 8 STOP BITS. Values: 1, 1.5, 2 PARITY. Values: NONE,ODD,EVEN (for RCOM, others). LINE STABilization time. Number of characters to allow the carrier wave to stabilize before transmission of the first character. CARRier DELay. Number of characters to wait after transmission of the last character before deactivating RTS. MAXimum number of RETRansmissions before line is considered broken. CHARacter Time-OUT TURN around TIME in milliseconds. Assumed time for telegram processing in slave mode depending only on sytem load. Total time to wait for response is: TURNTIME + time for telegram trasmission.
6
1...255
DUPLEX DIAL SPEED
user user user
HALF 0 19200
Normally used speed = 19200
CHLEN STOPBITS PARITY
user user user
8 1 NONE
Recommended.
LINESTAB
user
0...15
CARRDEL
user
0...15
MAXRETR
user
0...20
CHARTOUT TURNTIME
user user
2 1000
0...15 10...20000 in steps of 10
12 - 61
Table 2 continued
TURNTIME UARTTOUT
2
user user
3
1000 1
4
-
5
UART transmissin Time-OUT. Maximum number of characters for the controller to wait for a DCD before abording the transmission (only used if DUPLEX=HALF). Maximum time between two POLLing CYCLes in seconds.
6
0...15
POLLCYCL
user
10
0...255
Parameters
Edit DB Terminal Values-MVC1 PanelBus Master: 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Parameters
Figure 4.
Terminal Description, Parameters
Table 3.
1 = Terminal Name, 2 = Value Entered by, 3 = Default Value 4 = PC Connection Data Type, 5 = Description, 6 = Remarks 1 PARAM1 2 user 3 1 4 5
Protocol PARAMeter 1. (0 = large address model) 1 = small address model
6
PANC and PRTCON assume small address model. -
PARAM1 user 1 PARAM2 user 0 PARAM3 user 0 PARAM4 user 0 PARAM5 user 0 PARAM6 user 0 PARAM7 user 0 PARAM8 user 0 PARAM2...8 are used for nothing.
12 - 62
Boolean Param
Summary
PARDAT(B)
The PARDAT(B) Data Base element holds 32 packed Boolean Data values. Each data value is given an initial value. A name is given for the complete element. By means of the call name PARDAT(B) the engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Boolean Param.
Overview
Boolean Data:
Base Part
VALUE11-VALUE20 VALUE21-VALUE32
NAME INIVAL INIVAL2 INIVAL3 INIVAL4 INIVAL5 INIVAL6 INIVAL7 INIVAL8 INIVAL9
VALID VALUE VALUE2 VALUE3 VALUE4 VALUE5 VALUE6 VALUE7 VALUE8 VALUE9
INIVAL11 VALUE11 INIVAL12 VALUE12 INIVAL13 VALUE13 INIVAL14 VALUE14 INIVAL15 VALUE15 INIVAL16 VALUE16 INIVAL17 VALUE17 INIVAL18 VALUE18 INIVAL19 VALUE19 INIVAL20 VALUE20
INIVAL21 VALUE21 INIVAL22 VALUE22 INIVAL23 VALUE23 INIVAL24 VALUE24 INIVAL25 VALUE25 INIVAL26 VALUE26 INIVAL27 VALUE27 INIVAL28 VALUE28 INIVAL29 VALUE29 INIVAL30 VALUE30 INIVAL31 VALUE31 INIVAL32 VALUE32
INIVAL10 VALUE10
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Boolean Data:

PD1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Base Part
NAME INIVAL INIVAL2 INIVAL3 INIVAL4 INIVAL5 INIVAL6 INIVAL7 INIVAL8 INIVAL9
VALID VALUE VALUE2 VALUE3 VALUE4 VALUE5 VALUE6 VALUE7 VALUE8 VALUE9
INIVAL10 VALUE10
Figure 2.
12 - 63
Table 1.
NAME INIVAL VALUE INVAL2 VALUE2 . . . INVAL10 VALUE10
2
user user system user system
3
PDx 0 0 -
4
B(r/w) B(r/w)
5
Unique element NAME. INItial VALue. Boolean VALUE INitial VALue. Boolean VALUE.
6
Max 20 characters -
user system
0 -
B(r/w)
Boolean VALUE.
VALUE11VALUE20
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Boolean Param:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VALUE11-VALUE20
INIVAL11 VALUE11 INIVAL12 VALUE12 INIVAL13 VALUE13 INIVAL14 VALUE14 INIVAL15 VALUE15 INIVAL16 VALUE16 INIVAL17 VALUE17 INIVAL18 VALUE18 INIVAL19 VALUE19 INIVAL20 VALUE20
Figure 3.
VALUE21VALUE32
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Boolean Param:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VALUE21-VALUE32
INIVAL21 VALUE21 INIVAL22 VALUE22 INIVAL23 VALUE23 INIVAL24 VALUE24 INIVAL25 VALUE25 INIVAL26 VALUE26 INIVAL27 VALUE27 INIVAL28 VALUE28 INIVAL29 VALUE29 INIVAL30 VALUE30 INIVAL31 VALUE31 INIVAL32 VALUE32
Figure 4.
12 - 64
Terminal Description, VALUE11-32
Table 2.
INIVAL11 VALUE11 INIVAL12 VALUE12 . . . INIVAL32 VALUE32
2
user system user system
3
0 0 -
4
B(r/w) B(r/w)
5
INItial VALue. Boolean VALUE. INItial VALue. Boolean VALUE.
6
Max. 20 characters -
user system
0 -
B(r/w)
INItial VALue. Boolean VALUE.
12 - 65
Integer Param
Summary
PARDAT(I)
The PARDAT(I) Data Base element holds one 16 bit integer data value. The data value is given a name and an initial value. By means of the call name PARDAT(I) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Integer Param.
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Integer Param: PD1
0
NAME INIT_VAL VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME INIT_VAL VALUE
2
user user system
3
PDx 0
4
-
5
Unique element NAME. INITial VALue. VALUE of type integer.
6
Max.20 characters
I(r/w)
12 - 66
Packed Int. Param

Summary
PARDAT(II)
The PARDAT(II) Data Base element holds two 16 bit integer data values. The data values are given a name and an initial value. By means of the call name PARDAT(II) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Packed Int. Param.
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Packed Int.Param: PD1
0 0
NAME INIT_VAL VALUE

INIT_VAL2 VALUE2
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME INIT_VAL INIT_VAL2 VALUE VALUE2
2
user user user system system
3
PDx 0 0
4
-
5
Unique element NAME. INITial VALue. INITial VALue 2. VALUE of type Integer. VALUE 2 of type Integer.
6
Max.20 characters
I(r/w) I(r/w)
12 - 67
IntegerLong Param
Summary
PARDAT(IL)
The PARDAT(IL) Data Base element holds one 32 bit integer data values. The data values is given a name and an initial value. By means of the call name PARDAT(IL) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type IntegerLong Param.
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 IntegerLong Param: PD1
0
NAME INIT_VAL VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME INIT_VAL VALUE
2
user user system
3
PDx 0
4
-
5
Unique element NAME. INITial VALue. VALUE of type IntegerLong.
6
Max.20 characters
IL(r/w)
12 - 68
Packed Bool. Param

Summary
PARDAT(NB)
The PARDAT(NB) Data Base element holds a data value representing 32 bit values. By means of the call name PARDAT(NB) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Packed Bool. Param. 32 data base elements of type Boolean Value
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Packed Bool.Param: PD1 NAME VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME VALUE
2
user system
3
PDx
4
IL(r/w)
5
Unique element NAME. VALUE of type IntegerLong.
6
Max.20 characters
12 - 69
Packed Int. Param

Summary
PARDAT(NI)
The PARDAT(NI) Data Base element holds a data value representing two 16 bit integer values. By means of the call name PARDAT(NI) the Engineering Station will create. 1 data base element of type Packed Int. Param 2 data base elements of type Integer Value
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Packed Int.Param: PD1 NAME VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME VALUE
2
user system
3
PDx
4
IL(r/w)
5
Unique element NAME. VALUE of type IntegerLong.
6
Max.20 characters
12 - 70
Real Param
Summary
PARDAT(R)
The PARDAT(R) Data Base element holds one real data value. By means of the call name PARDAT(R) the Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Real Param.
Edit DB Terminal Values-PD1 Real Param: PD1 0.0 NAME INIT_VAL VALUE
Figure 1.
Table 1.
NAME INIT_VAL VALUE
2
user user system
3
PDx 0.0
4
-
5
Unique element NAME. INITial VALue. VALUE of type Real.
6
Max.20 characters
R(r/w)
12 - 71
Processor Module
Summary
PM825
PM825 is the Processor Module (CPU) of the AC80 Advant Controller control system. By means of the call name PM825 an Engineering Station will create 1 data base element of type Processor Module.
Overview
Processor Module:
Ba se Part AF100 Part Serial IF Part
NAME BUS STATION IMPL TYPE

SUP_PS SUP_PS_E SUP_BAT STARTMOD IOSCANT
WARNING ERR DIAG
CABLE EN_DTMO TIMESYNC BUSNO

STNNO
CH2TYP CH2
POSITION ACTSCANT
Figure 1.
Base Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-PM1 Processor Module:

PM1 0 0 0 0 PM825 NO NO NO BLOCKED 0
Ba se Part
NAME BUS STATION IMPL TYPE

SUP_PS SUP_PS_E SUP_BAT STARTMOD IOSCANT
WARNING ERR DIAG
POSITION ACTSCANT
Figure 2.
12 - 72
Table 1.
2
user predef predef predef predef
3
PM1 0 0 0 1
4
-
5
Unique NAME of the module. BUS number. STATION number. Part of address. POSITION. Part of address. IMPLemented. 0=the module is spare 1=the module is implemented Station TYPE designation. Enable SUPervision of redundant Power Supplies. Values: YES=enabled NO=not enabled Enable SUPervision of redundant Power Supplies on the optofibre Expansion. Values: YES=enabled NO=not enabled Enable BATtery SUPervision. Values: YES=enabled NO=not enabled Define STARTMODe behaviour. Values: CLEAR, BLOCKED Proposal for IOSCANner cycle Time in ms. WARNING indicates a non-fatal error. ERRor indicates fatal errors, such as configuration errors or hardware errors.
6
Max 20 characters
TYPE SUP_PS
predef user
PM825 NO
SUP_PS_E
user
NO
SUP_BAT
user
NO
STARTMOD
user
CLEAR
IOSCANT
user
Default in old versions = BLOCKED 0,2,4,6,8,10, 12,100
WARNING ERR
system system
B(r) B(r)
12 - 73
Table 1 continued
DIAG
2
system
4
I(r)
5
DIAGnostics.
6
ACTSCANT
system
I(r)
ACTual SCANner cycle Time.
AF 100 Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-PM1

Processor Module: S NO NONE 0 1
AF100 Part
CABLE EN_DTMO TIMESYNC BUSNO

STNNO
Figure 3.
Terminal Description, AF 100 Part
Table 2.
CABLE
2
user
3
S
5
CABLE connection. Values: S=Single R=Redundant ENable Double TiMeOut. Values: NO, YES TIME SYNChronization. Values: NONE, MASTER, SLAVE BUS Number of the bus connected to this processor module. STation Number of the current station on the bus given by BUSNO.
EN_DTMO TIMESYNC BUSNO
user user user
NO NONE 0
0255
STNNO
user
080
Serial IF Part
Edit DB Terminal Values-PM1

Processor Module: NONE
Serial IF Part
CH2TYP CH2
Figure 4.
12 - 74
Terminal Description, Serial IF Part
Table 3.
CH2TYP
2
user
3
NONE
5
CH2TYPe. Values: NONE, PANEL, MVC. NONE if the RS485 interface of AC80 (=CH2) is not used att all. PANEL if use it with PANBUS, PANC, PRTCON, MODW or MODR -elements. MVC if use with MVICHAN, MVINODE and MVB -elements. CH2 pin is left unconnected if CH2TYP=NONE or PANEL. If CH2TYP=MVC must assign the name of MVICHAN element into CH-2pin.
6
The MVC alternative is possible only if Embedded ModBus Option is selected and installed in AC80 target.
CH2
user
12 - 75
ABB Oy AC Drives P.O.Box 184 FIN-00381 Helsinki FINLAND Telephone Telefax
+ 358 10 22 2000 + 358 10 22 22681
3BFE 64021737 REV C / EN EFFECTIVE: 20.09.2002

En Ac80remapcelem C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En Ac80remapcelem C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB Drives

Reference Manual PC Elements Advant Controller 80

Reference Manual PC Elements

AC80 Code: 3AFE 64021737 REVC EN EFFECTIVE: 20.09.2002 SUPERSEDES: 15.03.2000

2002 ABB Oy. All rights reserved.

Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 1 - Table of Contents Chapter 8 - PC ELEMENTS from A to C .................................................................................... 8-1

Absolute Value ABS

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 9 - PC ELEMENTS from D to F .................................................................................... 9-1

Management of FBA Communications DCBAID

Derivator DER Divider DIV Divider DIV-MR Error Detection ERROR

Function Generator FUNG-1V

Chapter 10 - PC ELEMENTS from I to P.................................................................................. 10-1

Two Integer to Integer Long Conversion IIL

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

............................................................. 10-82 .................................... 10-84 .................................... 10-87

Chapter 11 - PC ELEMENTS from R to X ................................................................................ 11-1

Ramp Generator RAMP

S-RAMP Generator RAMP-SSH Register REG Group Data Register REG-G

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 1 - Table of Contents

Chapter 12 -DB Elements from A to P..................................................................................... 12-1

Drive Data Set DRIDS

Event Set (Send) (Event option) EVS(S)

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Panel Bus Configuration PANBUS

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

The Programming Language Call

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

> L U / D-N > C R EN I

COUNT (C1) > 0 = 0 < 0

Figure 2. Graphic Symbol

Connection of PC Element Inputs and Outputs

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Overflow of Real Numbers

Element Library for AC80

Programming with the PC Language

The Data Sheets

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

AC80 PC Element Descriptions

Figure 3. Description, Schematic Outline.

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

Bitwise Operation on the Integer Data Type Memory Elements

Read One Bit Set One Bit

SR SR-AA SR-AO SR-D SR-OA SR-OO

MONO OSC-B OSC-SIN TOFF TON TON-RET TRIGG

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

FIFO MOVE REG REG-G SHIFT

Switch Switch with Changeover

CONV CONV-BI CONV-IB IIL ILI

DEMUX-MI MUXA-I MUX-I MUX-MI MUX-MN MUX-N

AC80 Reference Manual, PC Elements

Chapter 3 - AC80 PC Elements According to Type

COMP COMP-I COMP-R MAX MIN

Function Generators Feedback and Filter Algorithms

Supervision Elements Communication Elements

Element for Actual Time and Date System Load Measurement